GHSH Lineage 1000

EMB-190ECJ
GROUND HANDLING
AND
SERVICING HANDBOOK
GHSH-3800
15 SEPTEMBER 2009
REVISION 00 - 15 SEPTEMBER 2009
Copyright 2009 by EMBRAER - Empresa Brasileira de Aeronutica S.A. All rights reserved. This
document shall not be copied or reproduced, whether in whole or in part, in any form or by any means
without the express written authorization of Embraer. The information, technical data, designs and
drawings disclosed in this document are proprietary information of Embraer or third parties and shall
not be used or disclosed to any third party without permission of Embraer.
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
CUSTOMER COMMENT FORM
Please use this Customer Comment Form to notify us of

any discrepancies or problems you encounter in our
Technical Publications. We would also welcome
constructive suggestions on how we can further improve
our documentation or service.
Your feedback will be acknowledged, and we will advise

you of the action we intend to take.
Sincerely,
Embraer Technical Publications.
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK

Please Specify:
Publication Part Number: ...................................................................................
Chapter: .................................. Revision:.......................... Date:.......................
Comment/Suggestion:........................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................
Your Name: ................................................ Department: ..................................

Company Name: ................................................................................................
Address:.............................................................................................................
Fax Number: ................................... Telephone Number: .................................
E-mail: ............................................. Website:
...................................................
Please return this Customer Comment Form to:

EMBRAER - EMPRESA BRASILEIRA DE AERONUTICA S.A.
TECHNICAL PUBLICATIONS
Av. Brigadeiro Faria Lima, 2170
CEP 12227-901
So Jos dos Campos SP-BRASIL
FAX: ++ 55 12 3927-7546
E-mail: distrib@embraer.com.br
Website: www.embraer.com.br
This Space Reserved for Embraer

CCF N ..................................
Comment received:..........................
Date Acknowledged:..............
Person Actioned:.............................................................................................
Action to be taken:...........................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................
Proposed date for implementation:..................................................................
Implemented:...................................................................................................
EMPRESA BRASILEIRA DE AERONUTICA S.A.

AV. BRIGADEIRO FARIA LIMA, 2170 - CAIXA POSTAL 8050 - TELEFONE (55) 12 3927-7517
FAX (55) 12 3927-7546 - CEP 12.227-901 - SO JOS DOS CAMPOS - SO PAULO - BRASIL
e-mail:distrib@embraer.com.br / http://www.embraer.com
TO: HOLDERS OF PUBLICATION No. GHSH-3800 - GROUND

HANDLING AND SERVICING HANDBOOK, APPLICABLE TO
EMB-LINEAGE 1000 AIRCRAFT.
REVISION No. 00 DATED SEPTEMBER 15/09
HIGHLIGHTS
Pages which have been added, revised, or deleted by the current revision are indicated
by an asterisk, on the List of Effective Pages.
HIGHLIGHTS
Page 1 of 2
Sep 15/09
Copyright 2009 by EMBRAER - Empresa Brasileira de Aeronutica S.A. All rights reserved.
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
PAGE
DATE
FRONTMATTER
LOEP........................... LEP-1 .............. Sep 15/09
LOEP........................... LEP-2 .............. Sep 15/09
LOEP........................... LEP-3 .............. Sep 15/09
LOEP........................... LEP-4 .............. Sep 15/09
LOEP........................... LEP-5 .............. Sep 15/09
LOEP........................... LEP-6 .............. Sep 15/09
LOEP........................... LEP-7 .............. Sep 15/09
LOEP........................... LEP-8 ..Blank... Sep 15/09
LOEA............................ LEA-1 ............. Sep 15/09
LOEA............................ LEA-2 ..Blank.. Sep 15/09
INTRODUCTION ...... INTRO-1 ............ Sep 15/09
INTRODUCTION....... INTRO-2 ............ Sep 15/09
INTRODUCTION ...... INTRO-7 ............ Sep 15/09
INTRODUCTION....... INTRO-10 .......... Sep 15/09
INTRODUCTION....... INTRO-15 ......... Sep 15/09
INTRODUCTION....... INTRO-16 ......... Sep 15/09
PROCEDURE
TOC................................. 1 ................. Sep 15/09
TOC................................. 2 ................. Sep 15/09
TOC................................. 3 ................. Sep 15/09
TOC................................. 4 ...... ..........Sep 15/09
TOC................................. 5 ................. Sep 15/09
TOC.................................. 6.......Blank..Sep 15/09
09-10-01-500-801-A .. ........201 ........... Sep 15/09
09-10-01-500-801-A .. ........202 ........... Sep 15/09
09-10-01-500-801-A .. ........203 ........... Sep 15/09
09-10-01-500-801-A .. ........204 ........... Sep 15/09
09-10-01-500-801-A .. ........205 ........... Sep 15/09
09-10-01-500-801-A .. ........206 ........... Sep 15/09
09-10-01-500-801-A .. ........207 ........... Sep 15/09
09-10-01-500-801-A .. ........208 ........... Sep 15/09
09-10-01-500-801-A .. ........209 ........... Sep 15/09
09-10-01-500-801-A .. ........210 ........... Sep 15/09
CHAPTER
SECTION
SUBJECT
PAGE
DATE
09-10-01-500-801-A . ........211 ........... Sep 15/09

09-10-01-500-801-A . ........212 ........... Sep 15/09
09-10-01-500-801-A . ........213 ........... Sep 15/09
09-10-01-500-801-A . ........214 ........... Sep 15/09
09-10-01-500-801-A . ........215 ........... Sep 15/09
09-10-01-500-801-A . ........216 ........... Sep 15/09
09-10-01-500-801-A . ........217 ........... Sep 15/09
09-10-01-500-801-A . ........218 ........... Sep 15/09
09-10-01-500-801-A . ........219 ........... Sep 15/09
09-10-01-500-801-A . ........220 ........... Sep 15/09
09-10-02-500-801-A . ........201 ........... Sep 15/09
09-10-02-500-801-A . ........202 ........... Sep 15/09
09-10-02-500-801-A . ........203 ........... Sep 15/09
09-10-02-500-801-A . ........204 ........... Sep 15/09
09-10-02-500-801-A . ........205 ........... Sep 15/09
09-10-02-500-801-A . ........206 ........... Sep 15/09
09-10-02-500-801-A . ........207 ........... Sep 15/09
09-10-02-500-801-A . ........208 ........... Sep 15/09
09-10-02-500-801-A . ........209 ........... Sep 15/09
09-10-02-500-801-A . ........210 ........... Sep 15/09
09-10-02-500-801-A . ........211 ........... Sep 15/09
09-10-02-500-801-A . ........212 ........... Sep 15/09
09-10-02-500-801-A . ........213 ........... Sep 15/09
09-10-02-500-801-A . ........214 ........... Sep 15/09
09-10-02-500-801-A . ........215 ........... Sep 15/09
09-10-02-500-801-A . ........216 ........... Sep 15/09
09-10-02-500-801-A . ........217 ........... Sep 15/09
09-10-02-500-801-A . ........218 ........... Sep 15/09
09-10-02-500-801-A . ........219 ........... Sep 15/09
09-10-02-500-801-A . ........220 ........... Sep 15/09
09-10-02-500-801-A . ........221 ........... Sep 15/09
09-10-02-500-801-A . ........222 ........... Sep 15/09
09-10-02-500-801-A . ........223 ........... Sep 15/09
09-10-02-500-801-A . ........224 ........... Sep 15/09
09-10-02-500-801-A . ........225 ........... Sep 15/09
09-10-02-500-801-A . ........226 ........... Sep 15/09
09-10-02-500-801-A . ........227 ........... Sep 15/09
09-10-02-500-801-A . ........228 ........... Sep 15/09
09-10-02-500-801-A . ........229 ........... Sep 15/09
09-10-02-500-801-A . ........230 ........... Sep 15/09
09-10-02-500-801-A . ........231 ........... Sep 15/09
09-10-02-500-801-A . ........232 ........... Sep 15/09
09-10-02-500-801-A . ........233 ........... Sep 15/09
09-10-02-500-801-A . ........234 ........... Sep 15/09
09-10-02-500-801-A . ........235 ........... Sep 15/09
Pages revised or added by current revision are indicated by an asterisk (*). Pages deleted by the current
revision are indicated by (Del)*. Pages deleted by the previous revision are indicated by (Del).
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

Page LEP-1
Rev.00 - SEP 15/09
HARD COPY IS UNCONTROLLED. ONCE PRINTED, THIS PAGE MUST NOT BE RETAINED FOR FUTURE REFERENCE.
BEFORE USING, MAKE SURE THIS HARDCOPY IS THE LATEST ISSUE.
CHAPTER
SECTION
SUBJECT
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
CHAPTER
SECTION
SUBJECT
PAGE
DATE
09-10-02-500-801-A .. ........236 ........... Sep 15/09

09-10-02-500-802-A .. ........201 ........... Sep 15/09
09-10-02-500-802-A .. ........202 ........... Sep 15/09
09-10-02-500-802-A .. ........203 ........... Sep 15/09
09-10-02-500-802-A .. ........204 ........... Sep 15/09
09-10-02-500-802-A .. ........205 ........... Sep 15/09
09-10-02-500-802-A .. ........206 ........... Sep 15/09
09-10-02-500-802-A .. ........207 ........... Sep 15/09
09-10-02-500-802-A .. ........208 ........... Sep 15/09
09-10-02-500-802-A .. ........209 ........... Sep 15/09
09-10-02-500-802-A .. ........210 ........... Sep 15/09
09-10-02-500-802-A .. ........211 ........... Sep 15/09
09-10-02-500-802-A .. ........212 ........... Sep 15/09
09-10-02-500-802-A .. ........213 ........... Sep 15/09
09-10-02-500-802-A .. ........214 ........... Sep 15/09
09-10-02-500-802-A .. ........215 ........... Sep 15/09
09-10-02-500-802-A .. ........216 ........... Sep 15/09
09-10-02-500-802-A .. ........217 ........... Sep 15/09
09-10-02-500-802-A .. ........218 ........... Sep 15/09
09-10-02-500-802-A .. ........219 ........... Sep 15/09
09-10-02-500-802-A .. ........220 ........... Sep 15/09
09-10-02-500-802-A .. ........221 ........... Sep 15/09
09-10-02-500-802-A .. ........222 ........... Sep 15/09
09-10-02-500-802-A .. ........223 ........... Sep 15/09
09-10-02-500-802-A .. ........224 ........... Sep 15/09
09-10-02-500-802-A .. ........225 ........... Sep 15/09
09-10-02-500-802-A .. ........226 ........... Sep 15/09
09-10-02-500-802-A .. ........227 ........... Sep 15/09
09-10-02-500-802-A .. ........228 ........... Sep 15/09
09-10-02-500-802-A .. ........229 ........... Sep 15/09
09-10-02-500-802-A .. ........230 ........... Sep 15/09
09-10-02-500-802-A .. ........231 ........... Sep 15/09
09-10-02-500-802-A .. ........232 ........... Sep 15/09
09-10-02-500-802-A .. ........233 ........... Sep 15/09
09-10-02-500-802-A .. ........234 ........... Sep 15/09
09-10-02-500-802-A .. ........235 ........... Sep 15/09
09-10-02-500-802-A .. ........236 ........... Sep 15/09
09-10-02-500-802-A .. ........237 ........... Sep 15/09
09-10-02-500-802-A .. ........238 ........... Sep 15/09
09-10-02-500-802-A .. ........239 ........... Sep 15/09
09-10-02-500-802-A .. ........240 ........... Sep 15/09
09-20-01-500-801-A .. ........201 ........... Sep 15/09
09-20-01-500-801-A .. ........202 ........... Sep 15/09
09-20-01-500-801-A .. ........203 ........... Sep 15/09
09-20-01-500-801-A .. ........204 ........... Sep 15/09
CHAPTER
SECTION
SUBJECT
PAGE
DATE
09-20-01-500-801-A . ........205 ........... Sep 15/09

09-20-01-500-801-A . ........206 ........... Sep 15/09
10-10-01-500-801-A . ........201 ........... Sep 15/09
10-10-01-500-801-A . ........202 ........... Sep 15/09
10-10-01-500-801-A . ........203 ........... Sep 15/09
10-10-01-500-801-A . ........204 ........... Sep 15/09
10-10-01-500-801-A . ........205 ........... Sep 15/09
10-10-01-500-801-A . ........206 ........... Sep 15/09
10-10-01-500-801-A . ........207 ........... Sep 15/09
10-10-01-500-801-A . ........208 ........... Sep 15/09
10-10-01-500-801-A . ........209 ........... Sep 15/09
10-10-01-500-801-A . ........210 ........... Sep 15/09
10-10-01-500-801-A . ........211 ........... Sep 15/09
10-10-01-500-801-A . ........212 ........... Sep 15/09
10-10-01-500-801-A . ........213 ........... Sep 15/09
10-10-01-500-801-A . ........214 ........... Sep 15/09
10-10-01-500-801-A . ........215 ........... Sep 15/09
10-10-01-500-801-A . ........216 Blank .. Sep 15/09
10-10-01-500-802-A . ........201 ........... Sep 15/09
10-10-01-500-802-A . ........202 ........... Sep 15/09
10-10-01-500-802-A . ........203 ........... Sep 15/09
10-10-01-500-802-A . ........204 Blank ...Sep 15/09
10-20-01-500-801-A . ........201 ........... Sep 15/09
10-20-01-500-801-A . ........202 ........... Sep 15/09
10-30-01-500-801-A . ........201 ........... Sep 15/09
10-30-01-500-801-A . ........202 ........... Sep 15/09
10-30-01-500-801-A . ........203 ........... Sep 15/09
10-30-01-500-801-A . ........204 ........... Sep 15/09
10-30-01-500-801-A . ........205 ........... Sep 15/09
10-30-01-500-801-A . ........206 ........... Sep 15/09
10-30-01-500-801-A . ........207 ........... Sep 15/09
10-30-01-500-801-A . ........208 ........... Sep 15/09
10-30-01-500-801-A . ........209 ........... Sep 15/09
10-30-01-500-801-A . ........210 ........... Sep 15/09
10-30-01-500-801-A . ........211 ........... Sep 15/09
10-30-01-500-801-A . ........212 ........... Sep 15/09
10-30-01-500-801-A . ........213 ........... Sep 15/09
10-30-01-500-801-A . ........214 Blank ...Sep 15/09
10-30-01-500-802-A . ........201 ........... Sep 15/09
10-30-01-500-802-A . ........202 ........... Sep 15/09
10-30-01-500-802-A . ........203 ........... Sep 15/09
10-30-01-500-802-A . ........204 ........... Sep 15/09
10-30-01-500-802-A . ........205 ........... Sep 15/09
10-30-01-500-802-A . ........206 ........... Sep 15/09
10-30-01-500-802-A . ........207 ........... Sep 15/09
EFFECTIVITY: ALL

Page LEP-2
Rev.00 - SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
PAGE
DATE
10-30-01-500-802-A .. ........208 ........... Sep 15/09

10-30-01-500-802-A .. ........209 ........... Sep 15/09
10-30-01-500-802-A .. ........210 ........... Sep 15/09
10-30-01-500-802-A .. ........211 ........... Sep 15/09
10-30-01-500-802-A .. ........212 ........... Sep 15/09
10-30-01-500-802-A .. ........213 ........... Sep 15/09
10-30-01-500-802-A .. ........214 ........... Sep 15/09
10-30-01-500-802-A .. ........215 ........... Sep 15/09
10-30-01-500-802-A .. ........216 ........... Sep 15/09
10-30-01-500-802-A .. ........217 ........... Sep 15/09
10-30-01-500-802-A .. ........218 ........... Sep 15/09
10-30-01-500-802-A .. ........219 ........... Sep 15/09
10-30-01-500-802-A .. ........220 Blank ...Sep 15/09
12-11-01-650-801-A .. ........301 ........... Sep 15/09
12-11-01-650-801-A .. ........302 ........... Sep 15/09
12-11-01-650-801-A .. ........303 ........... Sep 15/09
12-11-01-650-801-A .. ........304 ........... Sep 15/09
12-11-01-650-801-A .. ........305 ........... Sep 15/09
12-11-01-650-801-A .. ........306 ........... Sep 15/09
12-11-01-650-801-A .. ........307 ........... Sep 15/09
12-11-01-650-801-A .. ........308 ........... Sep 15/09
12-11-01-650-801-A .. ........309 ........... Sep 15/09
12-11-01-650-801-A .. ........310 ........... Sep 15/09
12-11-01-650-801-A .. ........311 ........... Sep 15/09
12-11-01-650-801-A .. ........312 ........... Sep 15/09
12-11-01-650-801-A .. ........313 ........... Sep 15/09
12-11-01-650-801-A .. ........314 ........... Sep 15/09
12-11-01-650-801-A .. ........315 ........... Sep 15/09
12-11-01-650-801-A .. ........316 Blank ...Sep 15/09
12-11-01-650-802-A .. ........301 ........... Sep 15/09
12-11-01-650-802-A .. ........302 ........... Sep 15/09
12-11-01-650-802-A .. ........303 ........... Sep 15/09
12-11-01-650-802-A .. ........304 ........... Sep 15/09
12-11-03-650-801-A .. ........301 ........... Sep 15/09
12-11-03-650-801-A .. ........302 ........... Sep 15/09
12-11-03-650-801-A .. ........303 ........... Sep 15/09
12-11-03-650-801-A .. ........304 ........... Sep 15/09
12-11-03-650-801-A .. ........305 ........... Sep 15/09
12-11-03-650-801-A .. ........306 Blank ...Sep 15/09
12-11-05-680-801-A .. ........301 ........... Sep 15/09
12-11-05-680-801-A .. ........302 ........... Sep 15/09
12-11-05-680-801-A .. ........303 ........... Sep 15/09
12-11-05-680-801-A .. ........304 ........... Sep 15/09
12-11-05-680-801-A .. ........305 ........... Sep 15/09
12-11-05-680-801-A .. ........306 ........... Sep 15/09
CHAPTER
SECTION
SUBJECT
PAGE
DATE
12-11-05-680-801-A.. ........307 ........... Sep 15/09

12-11-05-680-801-A.. ........308 ........... Sep 15/09
12-11-07-200-801-B.. ........301 ........... Sep 15/09
12-11-07-200-801-B.. ........302 ........... Sep 15/09
12-11-07-200-801-B.. ........303 ........... Sep 15/09
12-11-07-200-801-B.. ........304 ........... Sep 15/09
12-11-07-200-801-B.. ........305 ........... Sep 15/09
12-11-07-200-801-B.. ........306 ........... Sep 15/09
12-11-07-200-801-B.. ........307 ........... Sep 15/09
12-11-07-200-801-B.. ........308 ........... Sep 15/09
12-11-07-200-801-B.. ........309 ........... Sep 15/09
12-11-07-200-801-B.. ........310 ........... Sep 15/09
12-11-07-200-801-B.. ........311 ........... Sep 15/09
12-11-07-200-801-B.. ........312 ........... Sep 15/09
12-11-07-200-801-B.. ........313 ........... Sep 15/09
12-11-07-200-801-B.. ........314 ........... Sep 15/09
12-11-07-200-801-B.. ........315 ........... Sep 15/09
12-11-07-200-801-B.. ........316 ........... Sep 15/09
12-11-07-200-801-B.. ........317 ........... Sep 15/09
12-11-07-200-801-B.. ........318 ........... Sep 15/09
12-11-07-200-801-B.. ........319 ........... Sep 15/09
12-11-07-200-801-B.. ........320 ........... Sep 15/09
12-11-07-200-801-B.. ........321 ........... Sep 15/09
12-11-07-200-801-B.. ........322 ........... Sep 15/09
12-11-07-200-801-B.. ........323 ........... Sep 15/09
12-11-07-200-801-B.. ........324 ........... Sep 15/09
12-11-07-200-801-B.. ........325 ........... Sep 15/09
12-11-07-200-801-B.. ........326 ........... Sep 15/09
12-12-01-200-801-A . ........301 ........... Sep 15/09
12-12-01-200-801-A . ........302 ........... Sep 15/09
12-12-01-200-801-A . ........303 ........... Sep 15/09
12-12-01-200-801-A . ........304 ........... Sep 15/09
12-12-01-200-801-A . ........305 ........... Sep 15/09
12-12-01-200-801-A . ........306 ........... Sep 15/09
12-12-01-200-801-A . ........307 ........... Sep 15/09
12-12-01-200-801-A . ........308 ........... Sep 15/09
12-12-01-200-801-A . ........309 ........... Sep 15/09
12-12-01-200-801-A . ........310 Blank ...Sep 15/09
12-12-01-600-801-A . ........301 ........... Sep 15/09
12-12-01-600-801-A . ........302 ........... Sep 15/09
12-12-01-600-801-A . ........303 ........... Sep 15/09
12-12-01-600-801-A . ........304 ........... Sep 15/09
12-12-01-600-801-A . ........305 ........... Sep 15/09
12-12-01-600-801-A . ........306 ........... Sep 15/09
12-12-01-600-801-A . ........307 ........... Sep 15/09
EFFECTIVITY: ALL

Page LEP-3
Rev.00 - SEP 15/09
CHAPTER
SECTION
SUBJECT
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
CHAPTER
SECTION
SUBJECT
PAGE
DATE
12-12-01-600-801-A .. ........308 ........... Sep 15/09

12-12-01-600-802-A .. ........301 ........... Sep 15/09
12-12-01-600-802-A .. ........302 ........... Sep 15/09
12-12-01-600-802-A .. ........303 ........... Sep 15/09
12-12-01-600-802-A .. ........304 ........... Sep 15/09
12-12-01-600-802-A .. ........305 ........... Sep 15/09
12-12-01-600-802-A .. ........306 ........... Sep 15/09
12-12-01-600-802-A .. ........307 ........... Sep 15/09
12-12-01-600-802-A .. ........308 ........... Sep 15/09
12-12-01-600-802-A .. ........309 ........... Sep 15/09
12-12-01-600-802-A .. ........310 ........... Sep 15/09
12-12-01-600-802-A .. ........311 ........... Sep 15/09
12-12-01-600-802-A .. ........312 ........... Sep 15/09
12-12-01-600-802-A .. ........313 ........... Sep 15/09
12-12-01-600-802-A .. ........314 ........... Sep 15/09
12-12-01-600-802-A .. ........315 ........... Sep 15/09
12-12-01-600-802-A .. ........316 ........... Sep 15/09
12-12-05-610-801-A .. ........301 ........... Sep 15/09
12-12-05-610-801-A .. ........302 ........... Sep 15/09
12-12-05-610-801-A .. ........303 ........... Sep 15/09
12-12-05-610-801-A .. ........304 ........... Sep 15/09
12-12-05-610-801-A .. ........305 ........... Sep 15/09
12-12-05-610-801-A .. ........306 ........... Sep 15/09
12-12-05-610-801-A .. ........307 ........... Sep 15/09
12-12-05-610-801-A .. ........308 ........... Sep 15/09
12-12-08-600-802-A .. ........301 ........... Sep 15/09
12-12-08-600-802-A .. ........302 ........... Sep 15/09
12-12-08-600-802-A .. ........303 ........... Sep 15/09
12-12-08-600-802-A .. ........304 ........... Sep 15/09
12-12-08-600-802-A .. ........305 ........... Sep 15/09
12-12-08-600-802-A .. ........306 ........... Sep 15/09
12-12-08-600-802-A .. ........307 ........... Sep 15/09
12-12-08-600-802-A .. ........308 ........... Sep 15/09
12-12-11-600-801-A .. ........301 ........... Sep 15/09
12-12-11-600-801-A .. ........302 ........... Sep 15/09
12-12-11-600-801-A .. ........303 ........... Sep 15/09
12-12-11-600-801-A .. ........304 ........... Sep 15/09
12-12-11-600-801-A .. ........305 ........... Sep 15/09
12-12-11-600-801-A .. ........306 ........... Sep 15/09
12-13-01-200-801-A .. ........301 ........... Sep 15/09
12-13-01-200-801-A .. ........302 ........... Sep 15/09
12-13-01-200-801-A .. ........303 ........... Sep 15/09
12-13-01-200-801-A .. ........304 ........... Sep 15/09
12-13-01-200-802-A .. ........301 ........... Sep 15/09
12-13-01-200-802-A .. ........302 ........... Sep 15/09
CHAPTER
SECTION
SUBJECT
PAGE
DATE
12-13-01-200-802-A . ........303 ........... Sep 15/09

12-13-01-200-802-A . ........304 ........... Sep 15/09
12-13-01-612-801-A . ........301 ........... Sep 15/09
12-13-01-612-801-A . ........302 ........... Sep 15/09
12-13-01-612-801-A . ........303 ........... Sep 15/09
12-13-01-612-801-A . ........304 Blank ...Sep 15/09
12-13-05-200-801-A . ........301 ........... Sep 15/09
12-13-05-200-801-A . ........302 ........... Sep 15/09
12-13-05-200-801-A . ........303 ........... Sep 15/09
12-13-05-200-801-A . ........304 Blank ...Sep 15/09
12-13-05-612-801-A . ........301 ........... Sep 15/09
12-13-05-612-801-A . ........302 ........... Sep 15/09
12-13-05-612-801-A . ........303 ........... Sep 15/09
12-13-05-612-801-A . ........304 ........... Sep 15/09
12-13-09-210-801-A . ........601 ........... Sep 15/09
12-13-09-210-801-A . ........602 ........... Sep 15/09
12-13-09-210-801-A . ........603 ........... Sep 15/09
12-13-09-210-801-A . ........604 ........... Sep 15/09
12-14-01-613-801-A . ........301 ........... Sep 15/09
12-14-01-613-801-A . ........302 ........... Sep 15/09
12-14-01-613-801-A . ........303 ........... Sep 15/09
12-14-01-613-801-A . ........304 ........... Sep 15/09
12-14-01-613-801-A . ........305 ........... Sep 15/09
12-14-01-613-801-A . ........306 ........... Sep 15/09
12-14-05-600-801-A . ........301 ........... Sep 15/09
12-14-05-600-801-A . ........302 ........... Sep 15/09
12-14-05-600-801-A . ........303 ........... Sep 15/09
12-14-05-600-801-A . ........304 ........... Sep 15/09
12-15-01-200-801-A . ........301 ........... Sep 15/09
12-15-01-200-801-A . ........302 ........... Sep 15/09
12-15-01-200-801-A . ........303 ........... Sep 15/09
12-15-01-200-801-A . ........304 ........... Sep 15/09
12-15-01-200-801-A . ........305 ........... Sep 15/09
12-15-01-200-801-A . ........306 ........... Sep 15/09
12-15-01-600-801-A . ........301 ........... Sep 15/09
12-15-01-600-801-A . ........302 ........... Sep 15/09
12-15-01-600-801-A . ........303 ........... Sep 15/09
12-15-01-600-801-A . ........304 ........... Sep 15/09
12-15-03-200-801-A . ........301 ........... Sep 15/09
12-15-03-200-801-A . ........302 ........... Sep 15/09
12-15-03-200-801-A . ........303 ........... Sep 15/09
12-15-03-200-801-A . ........304 ........... Sep 15/09
12-15-03-200-801-A . ........305 ........... Sep 15/09
12-15-03-200-801-A . ........306 ........... Sep 15/09
12-15-03-600-801-A . ........301 ........... Sep 15/09
EFFECTIVITY: ALL

Page LEP-4
Rev.00 - SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
PAGE
DATE
12-15-03-600-801-A .. ........302 ........... Sep 15/09

12-15-03-600-801-A .. ........303 ........... Sep 15/09
12-15-03-600-801-A .. ........304 ........... Sep 15/09
12-15-05-200-801-A .. ........301 ........... Sep 15/09
12-15-05-200-801-A .. ........302 ........... Sep 15/09
12-15-05-200-801-A .. ........303 ........... Sep 15/09
12-15-05-200-801-A .. ........304 ........... Sep 15/09
12-15-05-200-801-A .. ........305 ........... Sep 15/09
12-15-05-200-801-A .. ........306 ........... Sep 15/09
12-15-05-200-801-A .. ........307 ........... Sep 15/09
12-15-05-200-801-A .. ........308 Blank ...Sep 15/09
12-15-06-614-801-A .. ........301 ........... Sep 15/09
12-15-06-614-801-A .. ........302 ........... Sep 15/09
12-15-06-614-801-A .. ........303 ........... Sep 15/09
12-15-06-614-801-A .. ........304 ........... Sep 15/09
12-15-06-614-801-A .. ........305 ........... Sep 15/09
12-15-06-614-801-A .. ........306 Blank ...Sep 15/09
12-22-01-100-801-A .. ........301 ........... Sep 15/09
12-22-01-100-801-A .. ........302 ........... Sep 15/09
12-22-01-100-801-A .. ........303 ........... Sep 15/09
12-22-01-100-801-A .. ........304 ........... Sep 15/09
12-22-01-100-801-A .. ........305 ........... Sep 15/09
12-22-01-100-801-A .. ........306 ........... Sep 15/09
12-22-01-100-801-A .. ........307 ........... Sep 15/09
12-22-01-100-801-A .. ........308 ........... Sep 15/09
12-22-01-100-801-A .. ........309 ........... Sep 15/09
12-22-01-100-801-A .. ........310 ........... Sep 15/09
12-22-01-100-801-A .. ........311 ........... Sep 15/09
12-22-01-100-801-A .. ........312 Blank .. Sep 15/09
12-22-01-100-807-A .. ........301 ........... Sep 15/09
12-22-01-100-807-A .. ........302 ........... Sep 15/09
12-22-01-100-807-A .. ........303 ........... Sep 15/09
12-22-01-100-807-A .. ........304 ........... Sep 15/09
12-22-01-100-807-A .. ........305 ........... Sep 15/09
12-22-01-100-807-A .. ........306 ........... Sep 15/09
12-22-01-100-807-A .. ........307 ........... Sep 15/09
12-22-01-100-807-A .. ........308 ........... Sep 15/09
12-22-01-100-807-A .. ........309 ........... Sep 15/09
12-22-01-100-807-A .. ........310 ........... Sep 15/09
12-22-01-100-807-A .. ........311 ........... Sep 15/09
12-22-01-100-807-A .. ........312 ........... Sep 15/09
12-22-01-100-807-A .. ........313 ........... Sep 15/09
12-22-01-100-807-A .. ........314 ........... Sep 15/09
12-22-01-100-807-A .. ........315 ........... Sep 15/09
12-22-01-100-807-A .. ........316 ........... Sep 15/09
CHAPTER
SECTION
SUBJECT
PAGE
DATE
12-22-01-100-807-A . ........317 ........... Sep 15/09

12-22-01-100-807-A . .......318 Blank ... Sep 15/09
20-00-00-910-801-A . ........201 ........... Sep 15/09
20-00-00-910-801-A . ........202 ........... Sep 15/09
20-00-00-910-801-A . ........203 ........... Sep 15/09
20-00-00-910-801-A . ........204 ........... Sep 15/09
20-00-00-910-801-A . ........205 ........... Sep 15/09
20-00-00-910-801-A . ........206 ........... Sep 15/09
20-00-00-910-801-A . ........207 ........... Sep 15/09
20-00-00-910-801-A . ........208 ........... Sep 15/09
20-00-00-910-801-A . ........209 ........... Sep 15/09
20-00-00-910-801-A . ........210 ........... Sep 15/09
20-00-00-910-801-A . ........211 ........... Sep 15/09
20-00-00-910-801-A . ........212 ........... Sep 15/09
20-00-00-910-801-A . ........213 ........... Sep 15/09
20-00-00-910-801-A . ........214 ........... Sep 15/09
20-40-02-910-801-A . ........201 ........... Sep 15/09
20-40-02-910-801-A . ........202 ........... Sep 15/09
20-40-02-910-801-A . ........203 ........... Sep 15/09
20-40-02-910-801-A . ........204 ........... Sep 15/09
20-40-02-910-801-A . ........205 ........... Sep 15/09
20-40-02-910-801-A . .......206 Blank ....Sep 15/09
24-41-02-860-801-A . ........201 ........... Sep 15/09
24-41-02-860-801-A . ........202 ........... Sep 15/09
24-41-02-860-801-A . ........203 ........... Sep 15/09
24-41-02-860-801-A . ........204 ........... Sep 15/09
24-41-02-860-802-A . ........201 ........... Sep 15/09
24-41-02-860-802-A . ........202 ........... Sep 15/09
24-41-02-860-802-A . ........203 ........... Sep 15/09
24-41-02-860-802-A . .......204 Blank ... Sep 15/09
24-42-02-860-801-A . ........201 ........... Sep 15/09
24-42-02-860-801-A . ........202 ........... Sep 15/09
24-42-02-860-801-A . ........203 ........... Sep 15/09
24-42-02-860-801-A . ........204 ........... Sep 15/09
24-42-02-860-801-A . ........205 ........... Sep 15/09
24-42-02-860-801-A . ........206 ........... Sep 15/09
24-42-02-860-801-A . ........207 ........... Sep 15/09
24-42-02-860-801-A . ........208 ........... Sep 15/09
24-42-02-860-801-A . ........209 ........... Sep 15/09
24-42-02-860-801-A . ........210 Blank ...Sep 15/09
24-42-02-860-802-A . ........201 ........... Sep 15/09
24-42-02-860-802-A . ........202 ........... Sep 15/09
24-42-02-860-802-A . ........203 ........... Sep 15/09
24-42-02-860-802-A . ........204 ........... Sep 15/09
32-00-05-000-801-A . ........401 ........... Sep 15/09
EFFECTIVITY: ALL

Page LEP-5
Rev.00 - SEP 15/09
CHAPTER
SECTION
SUBJECT
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
CHAPTER
SECTION
SUBJECT
PAGE
DATE
32-00-05-000-801-A .. ........402 ........... Sep 15/09

32-00-05-400-801-A .. ........403 ........... Sep 15/09
32-00-05-400-801-A .. ........404 ........... Sep 15/09
32-00-05-400-801-A .. ........405 ........... Sep 15/09
32-00-05-400-801-A .. ........406 ........... Sep 15/09
32-00-05-400-801-A .. ........407 ........... Sep 15/09
32-00-05-400-801-A .. ........408 ........... Sep 15/09
35-10-00-210-801-A .. ........601 ........... Sep 15/09
35-10-00-210-801-A .. ........602 ........... Sep 15/09
35-10-00-210-801-A .. ........603 ........... Sep 15/09
35-10-00-210-801-A .. ........604 ........... Sep 15/09
35-10-00-210-801-A .. ........605 ........... Sep 15/09
35-10-00-210-801-A .. ........606 ........... Sep 15/09
35-10-00-210-801-A .. ........607 ........... Sep 15/09
35-10-00-210-801-A .. ........608 ........... Sep 15/09
35-10-00-210-801-A .. ........609 ........... Sep 15/09
35-10-00-210-801-A .. ........610 Blank .. Sep 15/09
49-10-00-910-801-A .. ........201 ........... Sep 15/09
49-10-00-910-801-A .. ........202 ........... Sep 15/09
49-10-00-910-801-A .. ........203 ........... Sep 15/09
49-10-00-910-801-A .. ........204 ........... Sep 15/09
49-10-00-910-801-A .. ........205 ........... Sep 15/09
49-10-00-910-801-A .. ........206 ........... Sep 15/09
49-10-00-910-801-A .. ........207 ........... Sep 15/09
49-10-00-910-801-A .. ........208 Blank .. Sep 15/09
49-10-00-910-802-A .. ........201 ........... Sep 15/09
49-10-00-910-802-A .. ........202 ........... Sep 15/09
49-10-00-910-802-A .. ........203 ........... Sep 15/09
49-10-00-910-802-A .. ........204 Blank ...Sep 15/09
APPENDIX
GSE TOC ..................... ..TOC-1 .......... Sep 15/09
GSE TOC ..................... ..TOC-2 .......... Sep 15/09
GSE TOC ..................... ..TOC-3 .......... Sep 15/09
GSE TOC ........................TOC-4. Blank. Sep 15/09
GSE 011 ................... .............. 201....... Sep 15/09
GSE 011 ................... .............. 202....... Sep 15/09
GSE 020................... .............. 201....... Sep 15/09
GSE 020................... .............. 202....... Sep 15/09
GSE 022................... .............. 201....... Sep 15/09
GSE 022................... .............. 202....... Sep 15/09
GSE 022................... .............. 203........ Sep 15/09
GSE 022................... .............. 204........ Sep 15/09
GSE 023................... .............. 201........ Sep 15/09
GSE 023................... .............. 202........ Sep 15/09
CHAPTER
SECTION
SUBJECT
PAGE
DATE
GSE 024 ................... .............. 201 ........ Sep 15/09

GSE 024 ................... .............. 202 ........ Sep 15/09
GSE 025 ........................ .........201 ....... Sep 15/09
GSE 025 ........................ .........202 ....... Sep 15/09
GSE 025 ........................ .........203 ....... Sep 15/09
GSE 025 ........................ .........204........ Sep 15/09
GSE 027 ................... .............. 201 ........ Sep 15/09
GSE 027 ................... .............. 202 ........ Sep 15/09
GSE 028 ........................ .........201 ....... Sep 15/09
GSE 028 ........................ .........202 ....... Sep 15/09
GSE 039 ................... .............. 201 ....... Sep 15/09
GSE 039 ................... .............. 202 ....... Sep 15/09
GSE 043 ................... .............. 201 ........ Sep 15/09
GSE 043 ................... .............. 202 ........ Sep 15/09
GSE 044 ................... .............. 201 ........ Sep 15/09
GSE 044 ................... .............. 202 ........ Sep 15/09
GSE 044 ................... .............. 203 ........ Sep 15/09
GSE 044 ................... .............. 204BlankSep 15/09
GSE 045 ................... .............. 201 ........ Sep 15/09
GSE 045 ................... .............. 202 ........ Sep 15/09
GSE 045 ................... .............. 203 ....... Sep 15/09
GSE 045 ................... .............. 204BlankSep 15/09
GSE 049 ................... .............. 201 ........ Sep 15/09
GSE 049 ................... .............. 202 ........ Sep 15/09
GSE 050 ................... .............. 201 ........ Sep 15/09
GSE 050 ................... .............. 202 ........ Sep 15/09
GSE 051 ................... .............. 201 ........ Sep 15/09
GSE 051 ................... .............. 202 ........ Sep 15/09
GSE 052 ................... .............. 201 ........ Sep 15/09
GSE 052 ................... .............. 202 ........ Sep 15/09
GSE 052 ................... .............. 203 ........ Sep 15/09
GSE 052 ................... .............. 204 ........ Sep 15/09
GSE 057 ................... .............. 201 ........ Sep 15/09
GSE 057 ................... .............. 202 ........ Sep 15/09
GSE 059 ................... .............. 201 ........ Sep 15/09
GSE 059 ................... .............. 202 ........ Sep 15/09
GSE 070 ................... .............. 201 ........ Sep 15/09
GSE 070 ................... .............. 202 ........ Sep 15/09
GSE 070 ................... .............. 203 ........ Sep 15/09
GSE 070 ................... .............. 204 ........ Sep 15/09
GSE 080 ................... .............. 201 ........ Sep 15/09
GSE 080 ................... .............. 202 ........ Sep 15/09
GSE 080 ................... .............. 203 ........ Sep 15/09
GSE 080 ................... .............. 204 ........ Sep 15/09
GSE 080 ................... .............. 205 ........ Sep 15/09
EFFECTIVITY: ALL

Page LEP-6
Rev.00 - SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
PAGE
DATE
GSE 080................... .............. 206........ Sep 15/09

GSE 080................... .............. 207........ Sep 15/09
GSE 080................... .............. 208........ Sep 15/09
GSE 080................... .............. 209........ Sep 15/09
GSE 080................... .............. 210........ Sep 15/09
GSE 080................... .............. 211........ Sep 15/09
GSE 080................... .............. 212........ Sep 15/09
GSE 083................... .............. 201........ Sep 15/09
GSE 083................... .............. 202........ Sep 15/09
GSE 096................... .............. 201........ Sep 15/09
GSE 096................... .............. 202........ Sep 15/09
GSE 099................... .............. 201........ Sep 15/09
GSE 099................... .............. 202........ Sep 15/09
GSE 100................... .............. 201........ Sep 15/09
GSE 100................... .............. 202........ Sep 15/09
GSE 114 ................... .............. 201........ Sep 15/09
GSE 114 ................... .............. 202........ Sep 15/09
GSE 189................... .............. 201........ Sep 15/09
GSE 189................... .............. 202........ Sep 15/09
GSE 197................... .............. 201........ Sep 15/09
GSE 197................... .............. 202........ Sep 15/09
GSE 200................... .............. 201........ Sep 15/09
GSE 200................... .............. 202........ Sep 15/09
GSE 200................... .............. 203........ Sep 15/09
GSE 200................... .............. 204BlankSep 15/09
GSE 212................... .............. 201........ Sep 15/09
GSE 212................... .............. 202........ Sep 15/09
GSE 212................... .............. 203........ Sep 15/09
GSE 212................... .............. 204........ Sep 15/09
GSE 248................... .............. 201........ Sep 15/09
GSE 248................... .............. 202........ Sep 15/09
GSE 249................... .............. 201........ Sep 15/09
GSE 249................... .............. 202........ Sep 15/09
GSE 275................... .............. 201........ Sep 15/09
GSE 275................... .............. 202........ Sep 15/09
GSE 277................... .............. 201........ Sep 15/09
GSE 277................... .............. 202........ Sep 15/09
GSE 287................... .............. 201........ Sep 15/09
GSE 287................... .............. 202........ Sep 15/09
GSE 287................... .............. 203........ Sep 15/09
GSE 287................... .............. 204........ Sep 15/09
GSE 303................... .............. 201........ Sep 15/09
GSE 303................... .............. 202........ Sep 15/09
GSE 422................... .............. 201........ Sep 15/09
GSE 422................... .............. 202........ Sep 15/09
CHAPTER
SECTION
SUBJECT
PAGE
DATE
GSE 422 ................... .............. 203 ........ Sep 15/09

GSE 422 ................... .............. 204BlankSep 15/09
GSE 423 ................... .............. 201 ........ Sep 15/09
GSE 423 ................... .............. 202 ........ Sep 15/09
GSE 423 ................... .............. 203 ........ Sep 15/09
GSE 423 ................... .............. 204BlankSep 15/09
GSE 447 ................... .............. 201 ........ Sep 15/09
GSE 447 ................... .............. 202 ........ Sep 15/09
CPA.............................. .. CON-1 ...........Sep 15/09
CPA.............................. .. CON-2 ...........Sep 15/09
CPA.............................. .. CON-3 ...........Sep 15/09
CPA.............................. .. CON-4 ...........Sep 15/09
CPA.............................. .. CON-5 ...........Sep 15/09
CPA.............................. .. CON-6 Blank .Sep 15/09
EFFECTIVITY: ALL

Page LEP-7/8
Rev.00 - SEP 15/09
CHAPTER
SECTION
SUBJECT
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
EFFECTIVITY: ALL

Page LEP-8
Rev.00 - SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
THIS MANUAL IS APPLICABLE TO ALL LINEAGE 1000

EXECUTIVE JETS IN OPERATION.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
GHSH List of Effective Aircraft

Page LEA-1/2
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
INTRODUCTION
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
GHSH INTRODUCTION
1. General
A. This handbook is intended to assist ground handling and servicing
personnel that are not familiar with the Embraer Lineage 1000 aircraft.
The Embraer Lineage 1000 Aircraft Maintenance Manual contains
detailed maintenance or inspection information.
B. The source of all information in this manual is, basically, the
information in the publications listed below:
(1) Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
(2) Illustrated Tool and Equipment Manual (ITEM).
(3) Consumable Products Catalog (CPC).
C. In case of conflict between this manual and the AMM, ITEM and / or
CPC, the AMM, ITEM and / or CPC shall take precedence.
2. The improvement of methods and development of new techniques
by the operators are contributions to be included in this manual. If you
have suggestions or need any assistance regarding maintenance
technical publications, please contact us at:
contact.center@embraer.com - For contributions/request for
assistance regarding technical subjects related to Maintenance
Technical Publications, GSE, Service Bulletins, AIPC and
SRM I;
distrib@embraer.com.br - For assistance regarding purchase
and distribution of manuals;
cdrom.support@embraer.com.br - For assistance regarding
Digital Technical Publications contained in electronic media.
3. It is vital that the operators commit themselves to keeping this
manual update by strictly inserting the revised pages in the proper
locations according to the last revision of manual available in the
FlyEmbraer site.
4. The GHSH is composed by (Figure 1):
A. The front matter:
(1) Front Page
Shows the manufacturer's masthead, identification of the
manual, the initial issue date, and revision number and date.
(2) Customer Comment Form
(3) List of Effective Aircraft
Provides a cross-reference tabulation of Aircraft Commercial
Designation, Customer Aircraft Number, and Manufacturer
Serial Number.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
INTRODUCTION
Page INTRO-1
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
(4) List of Effective Pages:
Lists all chapters and their list of effective pages with the latest
issue dates.
NOTE: Pages revised or added by the current revision are
indicated by an asterisk (*).
Pages deleted by the current revision are indicated
by del *. Pages deleted by the previous revision are
indicated by del.
(5) Title of Introduction
(6) Introduction
B. GHSH Procedures
The GHSH procedures section is composed by:
(1) Procedures Title Page
(2) Table of Contents
(3) GHSH Procedures
(a) The GHSH procedures are organized into chapters:
Table 1 GHSH Chapters
Chapter Number
9
10
12
20
24
32
35
49
Chapter Title
Towing & Taxing
Parking and Mooring, Storage &
Return to Service
Servicing
Standard Practices-Airframe
Electrical Power
Landing Gear
Oxygen
Airborne Auxiliary Power
(b) PDF Page Identification and Numbering

The GHSH task numbering is shown in the top of the body
page and in the skirting board page, and is composed as
follows:
1. Top of Body Page
GHSH TASK 12-11-01-650-801-A
Elements 1, 2, and 3 comprise the equipment
identifier. The fourth element is the three-digit function
code, which defines the maintenance function being
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
INTRODUCTION
Page INTRO-2
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
performed by tasks. The fifth element is a three-digit

number used to create unique numbers for all tasks,
which are similarly numbered through the first four
elements. Tasks are numbered from 801 through 999.
The sixth element is an alphabetic identifier (task)
used to uniquely identify differences in configuration,
methods / techniques, variations of standard practices
applications, etc.
2. Skirting Board Page
The task numbering shown in the skirting board page
shows the body page numbering followed by the page
block numbering, that is used to inform the type of
procedure to be executed.
12-11-01-650-801-A/300
The table below lists the pageblocks and their
respective names:
Table 2 - GHSH PageBlocks
PageBlock Name
System Description Section
Component Location
Maintenance Practices
Servicing
Removal/Installation
Adjustment
Inspection
Cleaning
Repairs
PageBlocks
000
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
C. GHSH Appendixes
(1) Appendix Title Page
(2) GSE (Ground Support Equipments) Title Page
(3) TOC GSE
(4) GSE (Ground Support Equipments)
(a) The GSE Appendix is composed of the GSE's referenced
in the GHSH tasks. The GSE Appendix is arranged in GSE
number increasing order. For information about other GSE's
used in the Lineage 1000, please check the Illustrated Tool
and Equipment Manual (ITEM).
(5) Consumable Products Title Page
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
INTRODUCTION
Page INTRO-3
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
(6) Consumable Products

(a) The Consumable Products Appendix is composed of a
table which lists all the consumable products referenced in the
GHSH tasks. The Consumable Products Appendix is arranged
in part number alphabetical order. The Consumable Products
Appendix provides the following information about
consumables:
1. PART NUMBER Column
This column provides the product part number and/or trade
name. When the product does not have a part number, its
specification is repeated in this column.
2. SPECIFICATION Column
This column gives the specification with which the material
must comply. A simple dash in this column denotes that the
product does not meet any specification or that only the
product referred to in this catalog shall be used.
3. DESIGNATION Column
This column presents a brief description of the material.
4. SUPPLIER Column
This column lists the names of the most usual suppliers of
the material.
5. SHELF LIFE Column
This column gives the period of time (in months) between
the fabrication date and the last date when the conditions for
use of the product are still assured, providing the material is
packed and stored as specified.
6. DANGER CLASS Column
This column gives the product danger class according to the
International Air Transportation Association (IATA) Dangerous Goods Regulations.
7. STORAGE CODE Column
This column lists codes referring to the conditions that
assure the proper preservation of the consumable products
during their storage period.
NOTE: The information from the manufacturer/supplier
shall always prevail over the one herein.
The table Storage Conditions gives the codes associated
with the conditions under which each product must be
stored. This table presents the following requirements:
a. Temperature
This column gives the proper ambient temperature,
both in Celsius and Fahrenheit degrees, to store a
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
INTRODUCTION
Page INTRO-4
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
product. It may give a range of temperature (4 to 38C,

for example) or the maximum allowable temperature
(25C (maximum), for example).
b. Away From
This column gives the products/conditions from which
the item should stay away in order to guarantee its
adequate preservation. The following table gives the
storage conditions.
Table 3 - Storage Code
Storage
Code
Temperature
01
4 to 38C (39 to
100F)
02
25C (MAX.)(77F
(MAX))
04
4 to 38C (39 to
100F)
07
4 to 38C (39 to
100F)
08
4 to 38C (39 to
100F)
09
25C (MAX) (77F

(MAX))
10
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
4 to 38C (39 to
100F)
Away From
Fuel, Ozone and/or spark

generating
devices
Moisture, Dust, Oil, Grease,
Direct Sunlight, Fluorescent
Light, Air in Circulation.
Sources of heat, Ozone
and/or spark generating
devices, Oxidants, Dust, Oil,
Fuel, Water, Direct Sunlight,
Air in Circulation.
Sources of heat, Spark
generating
devices,
Oxidants,
Dust,
Direct
Sunlight.
generating
devices,
Oxidants, Oxygen cylinders.
generating
devices,
Oxidants, Corrosive acid,
Direct sunlight.
Sources of heat, Dust, Oil,

Grease, Direct sunlight.
Sources of heat, Dust, Oil,

Grease, Direct sunlight.
INTRODUCTION
Page INTRO-5
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
Storage
Code
11
Temperature
25C (MAX) (77F

(MAX))
12
4 to 38C (39 to
100F)
13
4 to 38C (39 to
100F)
14
4 to 38C (39 to
100F)
15
4 to 38C (39 to
100F)
16
17
50
99
Away From

devices, Dust, Vibrations,
Magnetic fields, Air in
circulation.
generating
devices,
Oxidants, Corrosive base,
Direct sunlight.

generating
devices,
Oxidants, Direct sunlight.
generating
devices,
Oxidants, Direct sunlight.
Electrostatic fields, Magnetic

fields, Dust, Direct sunlight.
According to local regulatory authorities and

manufacturer.
25C (MAX)(77F
Electrostatic fields, Magnetic
(MAX))
fields, Dust, Direct sunlight.
According to local manufacturer/supplier.
devices, Dust, Vibrations,
4 to 38C (39 to
Magnetic fields, Corrosive
100F)
acid and base, Oxidants,
Flammable
liquids,
Explosives.
The figure 1 shows the GHSH manual structure.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
INTRODUCTION
Page INTRO-6
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
EMB190 ECJ
GROUND HANDLING
AND
SERVICING HANDBOOK
GHSH3800
15 SEPTEMBER 2009
Copyright 2008 by EMBRAER Empresa Brasileira de Aeronutica S.A. All rights reserved. This document
shall not be copied or reproduced, whether in whole or in part, in any form or by any means without the express
written authorization of Embraer. The information, technical data, designs and drawings disclosed in this docu
ment are proprietary information of Embraer or third parties and shall not be used or disclosed to any third party
without permission of Embraer.

LIST OF EFFECTIVE AIRCRAFT
INTRODUCTION TITLE
INTRODUCTION
PROCEDURES TITLE PAGE
PROCEDURES TABLE OF CONTENTS
PROCEDURES
APPENDIX TITLE PAGE
GROUND SUPPORT EQUIPMENT APPENDIX
TITLE PAGE
GSE APPENDIX TABLE OF CONTENTS

GROUND SUPPORT EQUIPMENTS
CONSUMABLE PRODUCTS APPENDIX
TITLE PAGE
EM170GHSH000001A.DGN
GHSH Manual Structure

Figure 1
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
INTRODUCTION
Page INTRO-7
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
D. Revisions
(1) Revisions to the GHSH are issued for the whole manual.
(2) A list of effective pages is provided for the whole manual.
The pages that are revised, added, or deleted by the current
revision will be identified on the list of effective pages by an
asterisk.
(3) When texts or art in illustrations are revised, a black bar will
appear in the page left-side margin, beside the revised, added,
or deleted material. For PDF files, a bar beside the page
number or the section title and the printing date indicates that
neither the text nor the illustration has been changed, but the
material has been relocated to a different page or a totally new
page has been added.
E. Tools, Equipment and Auxiliary Items
(1) Aircraft Zones (Figure 2)
The GHSH procedures may refer to a zone to give the
references necessary for the identification of the service
areas or components. The figure 2 illustrates the zones
location.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
INTRODUCTION
Page INTRO-8
SEP 15/09
EMB 190 ECJ
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
Aircraft Zones
Figure 2
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
INTRODUCTION
Page INTRO-9
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
(2) Aircraft Dimension and Areas (Figure 3)

The principal dimensions and areas for the fuselage, wing
surface, horizontal tail surface, vertical tail surface and
powerplant are presented in order to help the operations in
a new airport or hangar. The figure 3 illustrates the aircraft
dimensions and areas.
(3) Consumable Materials
The consumable material used in the GHSH procedures
are describe in the Consumable Appendix, localized in the
end of the manual.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
INTRODUCTION
Page INTRO-10
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
Aircraft Dimension and Areas

Figure 3 - Sheet 1
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
INTRODUCTION
Page INTRO-11
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
Aircraft Dimension and Areas

Figure 3 - Sheet 2
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
INTRODUCTION
Page INTRO-12
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
(4) Circuit Breakers (Figure 4) (Figure 5) (Figure 6)

The circuit breakers used in the GHSH procedures appear
in the follow way:
"IRS 1 PWR 1-LHCBP (DC ESS BUS 1 NAV)"
where:
(a) IRS 1 PWR 1 identifies the designation;
(b) LHCBP identifies the location of the circuit breaker. On the
example, the circuit breaker is located in left (LH) circuit
breaker panel (CBP).
(c) (DC ESS BUS 1 NAV) identifies the bus.
The figure 4, figure 5, and figure 6 shows the circuit breaker
panels location on the aircraft.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
INTRODUCTION
Page INTRO-13
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
A
ZONES
123
124
EICC
EICC CBP
RH CBP
LH CBP
C
Circuit Breakers Location
Figure 4
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
INTRODUCTION
Page INTRO-14
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
ZONES
147
148
B
C
D
A
AUX. FUEL
CBP
AUX. FUEL CKT

BKR/RELAY
CTRL BOX
RICC CBP
RICC
LICC CBP
LICC
REMOTE
CB PANEL

Figure 5
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
INTRODUCTION
Page INTRO-15
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
ZONE
252
A
AICC
AICC CBP
B
Figure 6
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
INTRODUCTION
Page INTRO-16
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
PROCEDURES
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
GHSH PROCEDURES - TABLE OF CONTENTS
SUBJECT
CHAPTER
SECTION
SUBJECT
TASK NUMBER
PAGE
Towing & Taxing

Towing with Towbar
Maintenance Practices................... 09-10-01-500-801-A
201
Towbarless Towing
201
Pushback Maintenance
Practices......................................... 09-10-02-500-802-A
201
Aircraft Taxiing
Maintenance Practices.................... 09-20-01-500-801-A
201
Parking, Mooring, Storage &

Return to Service
Aircraft Normal Parking
201
Aircraft Normal Parking in

Cold Weather Condition
Maintenance Practices ................... 10-10-01-500-802-A
201
Aircraft Mooring
201
Aircraft Return to Service

(Normal Parking)
201
______________________________________________________________________
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
GHSH Procedures - Table of Contents
Page TOC-1
Rev.00 - SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
SUBJECT
CHAPTER
SECTION
SUBJECT
TASK NUMBER
Aircraft Return to Service

(Normal Parking in Cold
Weather Condition)
PAGE
201
Servicing
Fuel Tank
Pressure Refueling.......................... 12-11-01-650-801-A
301
Fuel Tank
Pressure Defueling.......................... 12-11-01-650-802-A
301
Fuel Tank
Gravity Refueling............................. 12-11-03-650-801-A
301
Fuel Tank
Water Draining................................. 12-11-05-680-801-A
301
Fuel Magnetic Level

Check............................................... 12-11-07-200-801-B
301
Hydraulic Reservoir Level

Check............................................... 12-12-01-200-801-A
301
Hydraulic Reservoir
Servicing........................................... 12-12-01-600-801-A
301
Hydraulic Reservoir
Servicing (Routine Check)... 12-12-01-600-802-A
301
Emergency/Parking Brake
Accumulator Servicing..................... 12-12-05-610-801-A
301
Main-Landing-Gear Shimmy
Damper Servicing. 12-12-08-600-802-A
301
______________________________________________________________________
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
Page TOC-2
Rev.00 - SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
SUBJECT
CHAPTER
SECTION
SUBJECT
TASK NUMBER
PAGE
Hydraulic System Ecology

Bottle Servicing........................... 12-12-11-600-801-A
301
Engine Oil Level

MFD Check.................................... 12-13-01-200-801-A
301
Engine Oil Level

Engine Check................................. 12-13-01-200-802-A
301
Engine Oil Filling......................... 12-13-01-612-801-A
301
APU Oil level Check..................... 12-13-05-200-801-A
301
APU Oil Filling............................... 12-13-05-612-801-A
301
Integrated Drive Generator

Oil Level Check..12-13-09-210-801-A
601
Potable Water System

Filling................................................. 12-14-01-613-801-A
301
Waste Tank Servicing.................... 12-14-05-600-801-A
301
Main-Landing-Gear Tire
Pressure Check.. 12-15-01-200-801-A
301
Main-Landing-Gear Tire
Servicing............................................. 12-15-01-600-801-A
301
Nose-Landing-Gear Tire
Pressure Check.. 12-15-03-200-801-A
301
Nose-Landing-Gear Tire
Servicing.............................................. 12-15-03-600-801-A
301
______________________________________________________________________
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
Page TOC-3
Rev.00 - SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
SUBJECT
CHAPTER
SECTION
SUBJECT
TASK NUMBER
PAGE
Hydraulic System Accumulator

Pressure Charge Check.....12-15-05-200-801-A
301
Cockpit Oxygen Cylinder

Charging.......................................... 12-15-06-614-801-A
301
External Aircraft Cleaning............. 12-22-01-100-801-A
301
Cockpit Cleaning........................... 12-22-01-100-807-A
301
Standard Practices-Airframe
Aircraft Maintenance Safety Procedures
Standard Procedures... 20-00-00-910-801-A
201
Static Grounding Standard

Practices............................................ 20-40-02-910-801-A
201
Electrical Power
Connection of the external
DC power supply to the aircraft
Aircraft / System Configuration.......... 24-41-02-860-801-A
201
Disconnection of the external

DC power supply to the aircraft
201
Connection of the external

AC power supply to the aircraft
201
Disconnection of the external

AC power supply to the aircraft
201
______________________________________________________________________
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
Page TOC-4
Rev.00 - SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
SUBJECT
CHAPTER
SECTION
SUBJECT
TASK NUMBER
PAGE
Landing Gear
Landing-Gear Downlock
Safety-Pins Removal..... 32-00-05-000-801-A
401
Landing-Gear Downlock
Safety-Pins Installation... 32-00-05-000-801-A
401
Oxygen
Crew Oxygen System Pressure
General Visual Inspection.. 35-10-00-210-801-A
601
Airborne Auxiliary Power

Auxiliary Power Unit (APU)
Start.................................................. 49-10-00-910-801-A
201
Auxiliary Power Unit (APU)

Shutdown......................................... 49-10-00-910-802-A
201
______________________________________________________________________
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
Page TOC-5/6
Rev.00 - SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
GHSH TASK 09-10-01-500-801-A
1. Towing with Towbar - Maintenance Practices
A. General
(1) Aircraft towing is the usual procedure when it is necessary
to move the aircraft on the ground. Aircraft towing is not
applicable for the pushback procedure. For the pushback
procedure, refer to GHSH TASK 09-10-02-500-802-A/200.
(2) Towing with towbar is also permitted when:
(a) One tire (inboard or outboard) is completely flat on
one or on the two MLGs or/and;
(b) When one NLG tire is completely flat, and;
NOTE:
A minimum of one tire of each LG must

be in good condition and set with the
correct pressure, and;
(c) You obey the following conditions below:

Make sure that there are no passengers in the
aircraft.
The aircraft must be as light as possible to
decrease the loads applied to the LGS.
The maximum towing speed is 7 km/h (4 mph).
You shall not at any time exceed this speed.
Make sure that you replace the tires in good
condition that you used during towing procedure.
(3) Before the definition of the ground towing factors, it is
important to know if it is possible to tow the aircraft,
considering its total weight, the ground characteristics and
the wind speed. Depending on the ground characteristics
and wind speed at the moment, the graphics referred to
below have to be consulted for towing on the following
surfaces:
NOTE:
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
The wind speeds in the figures cover all critical

wind direction.
09-10-01-500-801-A/200
Page 201
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
Dry concrete, refer to Figure 202.
Wet concrete, refer to Figure 203.
Snow surface, refer to Figure 204.
Icy surface, refer to Figure 205.
(4) The Figure 201 shows the ground towing factors that are
most important in different conditions. You can find the
necessary towbar pull and the total traction wheel load with
these data: aircraft weight, pavement slope, coefficient of
friction, and engine idle trust. Example: aircraft gross weight
of 39000 kg (85980 lb) and two engines with flight idle
thrust.
For a pavement of dry concrete or asphalt with a 2% slope,
the total traction wheel load will be 3500 kg (7716 lb) and
the towbar pull will be 2800 kg (6173 lb).
B. Job Set-Up
WARNING:
MAKE SURE THAT THE AIRCRAFT IS IN A

SAFE CONDITION BEFORE YOU DO THE
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES. THIS IS TO
PREVENT INJURY TO PERSONS AND/OR
DAMAGE TO THE EQUIPMENT.
(1) Do the procedure to make the aircraft safe for maintenance

(GHSH TASK 20-00-00-910-801-A/200).
(2) Do the wing fuel transfer (AMM TASK 28-20-00-910-801A/200), if necessary.
NOTE:
CAUTION:
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
Make sure that the fuel asymmetry is in the

maximum 363 kg (800 lb).
DURING THE TOWING OPERATIONS, A
TECHNICIAN MUST STAY IN THE COCKPIT
TO SET THE EMERGENCY/PARKING BRAKE,
IF NECESSARY. AND ALL PERSON IN THE
COCKPIT MUST BE IN A SEAT AND THE
SEATBELT MUST BE FASTENED.
09-10-01-500-801-A/200
Page 202
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
CAUTION:
MAKE SURE THAT ALL ENGINE COWLS ARE

CLOSED AND LATCHED BEFORE YOU TOW
THE AIRPLANE. DAMAGE TO THE AIRPLANE
AND THE EQUIPMENT CAN OCCUR.
(3) If applicable, close all engine cowls in the sequence that

follows:
(a) Close the aft core cowl and the thrust reverser
(AMM TASK 78-30-01-910-802-A/200).
(b) Close the fan cowl (AMM TASK 71-11-00-910-802A/200).
(4) Close these doors:
(a) Forward and aft passenger doors (AMM SDS 5211-00/1 and AMM SDS 52-12-00/1).
(b) Forward and aft service doors (AMM SDS 52-4100/1 and AMM SDS 52-42-00/1).
(c) Forward and aft cargo doors (AMM SDS 52-31-00/1
and AMM SDS 52-32-00/1).
(5) Find the correct ground towing requirements on the chart to
use the correct tow tractor. Refer to Figure 201.
WARNING:
MAKE SURE THAT THE LANDING GEAR

SAFETY PINS ARE INSTALLED. THIS IS TO
PREVENT INJURIES TO PERSONS AND
DAMAGE TO MATERIAL.
(6) Make sure that the landing-gear downlock safety-pins are

correctly installed on the main and nose landing-gear units
(GHSH TASK 32-00-05-400-801-A/400).
(7) Make sure that the stow lock pin (GSE 189) is installed
(AMM TASK 24-23-08-480-801-A/400).
(8) Make sure that the MLG shock struts have sufficient
extension (AMM TASK 12-12-07-600-802-B/300).
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
09-10-01-500-801-A/200
Page 203
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
(9) Make sure that the NLG shock struts has sufficient
extension (AMM TASK 12-12-09-600-801-A/300).
(10) Make sure that the emergency/parking brake accumulator
is pressurized (GHSH TASK 12-12-05-610-801-A/300).
(11) Set the emergency/PARKING BRAKE handle (2) to parking
position (brakes on). Refer to Figure 207.
C. Towing with Towbar - Maintenance Practices
WARNING:
WHEN YOU TOW THE AIRCRAFT, ALL

PERSONS MUST BE A MINIMUM OF 3
METERS (10 FEET) FAR FROM THE
DANGEROUS AREAS AROUND THE TOWING
VEHICLE, TOWBAR, NOSE WHEEL, AND
MAIN WHEELS. THE AIRCRAFT CHANGES
POSITION DURING PUSHBACK AND TOWING
AND CAN RUN OVER PERSONS ON THE
GROUND. IF YOU DO NOT OBEY THIS
PRECAUTION, A FATAL ACCIDENT CAN
OCCUR.
CAUTION:
DO NOT TOW THE AIRCRAFT WITHOUT A

TOWBAR. ALTERNATIVE DEVICES CAN
CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE AIRCRAFT.
CAUTION:
REMOVE ALL TOOLS, EQUIPMENT, AND

MATERIALS FROM THE TOWING AREA.
MAKE SURE THAT THE AREA IS CLEAN.
(1) You must be far from the dangerous areas around the
towing vehicle, towbar, nose Wheel and main wheels. Refer
to Figure 212.
(2) Prepare the towing crew positions as follows:
(a) Before you tow the aircraft, make sure that you have
the towing crew that follows:
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
09-10-01-500-801-A/200
Page 204
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
1. One person in the cockpit to operate the brakes
ONLY when uncoupling of the towing vehicle or
aircraft occurs.
2. One person to operate the towing vehicle.
NOTE: For a safer procedure, Embraer
recommends the aid of 3 more persons,
as follows:
One person on the left wing tip and one
person on the right wing tip to monitor
sufficient clearance during turns;
One person behind the tail to monitor
sufficient clearance during the turns.
When you have the aid of these three
persons, the maximum towing speed is 7
km/h (4 mph. You shall not at any time
exceed this speed.
(3) Do the check of the fuel asymmetry between wings.
NOTE:
The maximum fuel asymmetry between wings is

363 kg (800 lb).
(4) Pull the lockpin (3) and put the towing lever (2) in the
released position. Refer to Figure 206.
(5) Set the steering switch on the RAMP PANEL to the
DISENGAGED position.
(6) Install the towbar assembly (GSE 080) (1) on the towing
attachment on the NLG. Refer to Figure 206.
CAUTION:
THE TOWING LEVER MUST BE IN THE

TOWING POSITION BEFORE YOU TOW THE
AIRCRAFT. IF YOU DO NOT OBEY THIS
PRECAUTION, DAMAGE TO THE LANDING
GEAR
COMPONENTS
OR
TOWING
EQUIPMENT CAN OCCUR.
(7) Pull the lockpin (3) and set the towing lever (2) to the towing
position. Refer to Figure 206.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
09-10-01-500-801-A/200
Page 205
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
(8) Install the other end of the towbar assembly (GSE 080) (1)
to the tow tractor. Refer to Figure 206.
(9) Remove the wheel chocks (GSE 070) from all tires.
(10)In the cockpit (zone 221), release the emergency/PARKING
BRAKE handle (2) (brakes off). Refer to Figure 207.
(11)Press the switch (2) to make sure that the towing-indication
light box (3) shows the green light on. Refer to Figure 208.
CAUTION:
DO NOT STEER THE NOSE LANDING GEAR

MORE THAN THE MAXIMUM ANGLE
PERMITTED THAT IS +/-170 DEGREES. IF
THE STEERING ANGLE IS MORE THAN +/170 DEGREES, DAMAGE TO THE STEERING
SYSTEM CAN OCCUR.
(12)Make sure that all steps above are obeyed. Then do the
towing as follows:
(a) During the towing operation, use the aircraft
emergency/parking brake only when the uncoupling of
the towbar, towing vehicle or aircraft occurs.
(b) If during the towing procedure, the aircraft
emergency/parking brake is applied, independent of
the speed, do a check of the integrity of the fuse pin of
the towbar (GSE 080). If the fuse pin is broken, refer
to procedure (AMM TASK 05-50-25-200-801-A/600).
(c) Tow the aircraft slowly straight ahead before you try to
turn.
(d) During the towing procedure, carefully monitor the
zero reference (1) on the NLG. Refer to Figure 211.
(e) When the zero reference is aligned with the red stripe
painted on NLG rear (2), it indicates that the steering
angle is near the maximum angle permitted that is
(+/-) 170 degrees. Refer to Figure 209.
NOTE:
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
Avoid the towing operation when the

zero reference is aligned with the edge of
the red stripe on the NLG (+/-) 140
degrees.
09-10-01-500-801-A/200
Page 206
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
You can use the mooring point (3) as a
reference to see when the NLG steering
angle is near the maximum permitted.
Refer to Figure 211.
(f) Complete the aircraft towing in a straight line for a
minimum of 3 m (10 ft).
NOTE:
The objective of this step is to:

Align the steering as close as possible to
the zero degree position and in the range of
76 (maximum angle for steering
engagement).
Prevent unnecessary loads on the NLG
axle.
Prevent unnecessary wear of the NLG
tires.
(g) Make sure that the steering range of 170 degrees is

not exceeded. Refer to Figure 209. If this range is
exceeded, the torque link pin (3) breaks up the
overtravel target (2) of the overtravel sensor (1). Refer
to Figure 210.
D. Job Close-Up
(1) With the aircraft in maintenance condition, do as follows:
(a) Set the emergency/PARKING BRAKE handle (1) to
the parking position (brakes on). Refer to Figure 207.
(b) Press the switch (2) to make sure that the towingindication light box (1) shows the red light on. Refer to
Figure 208.
(c) Install the wheel chocks (GSE 070) around all tires.
(d) Remove the (GSE 080) from the tow tractor.
(e) If the nose wheels are not in the zero-degree position,
align them with zero-degree reference in the NLG.
(f) Pull the lockpin (3) and set the towbar lever (2) to the
released position. Refer to Figure 206.
(g) Remove the other end of the towbar assembly (GSE
080) (1) from the towing attachment on the NLG.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
09-10-01-500-801-A/200
Page 207
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
(2) Put the aircraft back to its initial condition (AMM TASK 3200-00-860-802-A/200).
(3) Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from
the work area.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
09-10-01-500-801-A/200
Page 208
SEP 15/09
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
1000
(2204)
3000
(6614)
ET
5
.4
.5
=0.05
=0.2
=0
=0
.7
=0
4000
5000
6000
7000 0
(8818) (11023) (13227) (15432)
ICE
SNO
NS
AI
CH
D
HAR
OW
ET
SN
DR
Y
AS CO
W P N
ET HAL CR
AS T ETE
PH
=0 OR
.8
TOTAL TRACTION WHEEL kg (lb)

(DRAWBAR PULL)
2000
(4409)
STRAIGHTLINE TOW
UNUSUAL BREAKAWAY
CONDITIONS NOT SHOWN
COEFFICIENTS OF
FRICTION ( ) ARE
ESTIMATED FOR
RUBBERTIRED TOW
VEHICLES
NOTES:
1000
(2204)
2000
(4409)
3000
(6614)
4000
(8818)
5000
(11023)
TOWBAR PULL kg (lb)
AL
T
NUMBER OF
ENGINES
BACKING AGAINST
IDLE THRUST
GROUND TOWING REQUIREMENTS
kg
(lb
3
PERCENT SLOPE (%)
4)
25
21 5)
T 0 (1 6 8 4 )
H
G 55000 (112436)
EI
0 0 (1 1 2 7
W
53 00 080 7)
S
0 (1 1
S
51 00 036 8)
O
0 1 0
R
49 00 ( 992 )
G
( 99
0
T
47 000 947 )
AF
45 00 ( 390
R
0
30 0 (9 80)
C
4
R
00 59
AI
41 0 (8 571)
00 1
39 0 (8 62)
00 71
37 0 (7 53)
00 27
35 0 (7 43)
00 683
3
3 0(
4)
93
00
31 0 (63
00
29
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
Ground Towing Requirements Maintenance Practices

Figure 201
09-10-01-500-801-A/200
Page 209
SEP 15/09
REFERENCE LINE
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
EMBRAER 190 ECJ
MAXIMUM WIND ALLOWED FOR TOWING

ON DRY CONCRETE SURFACE
66
65
118.5
64
116.7
63
114.8
62
113.0
61
111.1
60
109.3
59
107.4
58
105.6
57
103.7
56
101.9
55
100.0
54
AIRCRAFT WEIGHT
51960 kg (114552.1 lb)
50000 kg (110231.0 lb)
48000 kg (105821.8 lb)

46000 kg (101412.5 lb)
98.2
53
96.3
52
44000 kg (97003.3 lb)
94.5
51
42000 kg (92594.1 lb)
88.9
87.0
85.2
50
40000 kg (88184.8 lb)
49
38000 kg (83775.6 lb)
48
47
36000 kg (79366.3 lb)
46
83.3
45
81.5
44
79.6
43
77.8
42
75.9
41
74.1
40
72.2
39
70.2
38
68.5
37
66.7
36
64.8
35
63.0
34
61.1
33
59.3
32
57.4
31
55.6
30
34000 kg (74957.0 lb)

32000 kg (70547.8 lb)
30000 kg (66138.6 lb)
28000 kg (61729.4 lb)
26000 kg (57320.1 lb)
24000 kg (52910.8 lb)
22000 kg (48501.6 lb)
10
15
20
25
30
35
CG POSITION % MAC
95.6
90.7
WIND VELOCITY kt
WIND VELOCITY km/h
122.2
120.4
Maximum Wind allowed for Towing on Dry Concrete

Figure 202
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
09-10-01-500-801-A/200
Page 210
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
EMBRAER 190 ECJ

ON WET CONCRETE SURFACE
66
122.2
120.4
65
118.5
64
116.7
63
114.8
62
113.0
61
111.1
60
109.3
59
107.4
58
105.6
57
103.7
56
101.9
55
100.0
54
98.2
53
96.3
52
87.0
85.2
83.3
50000 kg (110231.0 lb)
50
49
48000 kg (105821.8 lb)
48
47
46000 kg (101412.5 lb)
46
44000 kg (97003.3 lb)
45
81.5
44
42000 kg (92594.1 lb)
79.6
43
40000 kg (88184.8 lb)
77.8
42
38000 kg (83775.6 lb)
75.9
41
74.1
40
72.2
39
34000 kg (74957.0 lb)
70.2
38
32000 kg (70547.8 lb)
68.5
37
66.7
36
64.8
35
63.0
34
61.1
33
59.3
32
57.4
31
55.6
30
53.7
29
36000 kg (79366.3 lb)
30000 kg (66138.6 lb)

28000 kg (61729.4 lb)
26000 kg (57320.1 lb)
24000 kg (52910.8 lb)
22000 kg (48501.6 lb)
10
15
20
25
30
35
CG POSITION % MAC
88.9
WIND VELOCITY kt
WIND VELOCITY km/h
90.7
51960 kg (114552.1 lb)
51
94.5
95.6
AIRCRAFT WEIGHT
Maximum Wind allowed for Towing on Wet Concrete

Figure 203
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
09-10-01-500-801-A/200
Page 211
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
EMBRAER 190 ECJ

ON SNOW SURFACE
66
122.2
120.4
65
118.5
64
116.7
63
62
114.8
113.0
61
111.1
60
109.3
59
107.4
58
105.6
57
103.7
56
101.9
55
100.0
54
98.2
53
52
94.5
51
95.6
50
90.7
49
87.0
85.2
83.3
81.5
79.6
48
47
46
AIRCRAFT WEIGHT
45
44
51960 kg (114552.1 lb)
43
77.8
42
75.9
41
74.1
40
72.2
39
70.2
38
68.5
37
66.7
36
50000 kg (110231.0 lb)

48000 kg (105821.8 lb)
46000 kg (101412.5 lb)
44000 kg (97003.3 lb)
42000 kg (92594.1 lb)
40000 kg (88184.8 lb)
38000 kg (83775.6 lb)
64.8
35
63.0
34
36000 kg (79366.3 lb)
61.1
33
34000 kg (74957.0 lb)
32
32000 kg (70547.8 lb)
59.3
57.4
31
55.6
30
53.7
29
51.9
28
50.0
27
48.2
26
46.3
25
30000 kg (66138.6 lb)

28000 kg (61729.4 lb)
26000 kg (57320.1 lb)
24000 kg (52910.8 lb)
22000 kg (48501.6 lb)
0
10
15
20
25
30
35
CG POSITION % MAC
88.9
WIND VELOCITY kt
WIND VELOCITY km/h
96.3
Maximum Wind allowed for Towing on Snow Surface

Figure 204
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
09-10-01-500-801-A/200
Page 212
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
EMBRAER 190 ECJ
68.5
37
66.7
36
64.8
35
63.0
34
61.1
33
59.3
32
57.4
31
55.6
30
53.7
29
51.9
28
50.0
27
48.2
46.3
44.4
WIND VELOCITY kt
WIND VELOCITY km/h

ON ICY SURFACE
AIRCRAFT WEIGHT
26
51960 kg (114552.1 lb)
25
50000 kg (110231.0 lb)
24
42.6
23
40.7
22
38.9
21
37.0
20
48000 kg (105821.8 lb)

46000 kg (101412.5 lb)
44000 kg (97003.3 lb)
42000 kg (92594.1 lb)
40000 kg (88184.8 lb)
38000 kg (83775.6 lb)
36000 kg (79366.3 lb)
35.2
19
33.3
18
31.5
17
29.6
16
27.8
15
34000 kg (74957.0 lb)

32000 kg (70547.8 lb)
30000 kg (66138.6 lb)
28000 kg (61729.4 lb)
26000 kg (57320.1 lb)
24000 kg (52910.8 lb)
25.9
14
24.1
13
0
10
15
20
25
30
35
CG POSITION % MAC
22000 kg (48501.6 lb)
Maximum Wind allowed for Towing on Icy Surface

Figure 205
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
09-10-01-500-801-A/200
Page 213
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
A
ZONE
711
3. LOCKPIN
1. TOWBAR ASSY (GSE080)

SHEAR PIN (REF.)
2. TOWING
LEVER
Towing with Towbar Maintenance Practices

Figure 206
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
09-10-01-500-801-A/200
Page 214
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
1. EMERGENCY/PARKING BRAKE
HANDLE
A
Steering Disarming External-Switch Component Location
Figure 207
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
09-10-01-500-801-A/200
Page 215
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
A
ZONE
711
1. TOWING INDICATION
LIGHTBOX
B
GREEN LIGHT (REF.)
RED LIGHT (REF.)
LIGHTBOX
2. SWITCH
C
Steering Disarming External-Switch Component Location
Figure 208
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
09-10-01-500-801-A/200
Page 216
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
170
170
Maximum Steering Angle Maintenance Practices

Figure 209
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
09-10-01-500-801-A/200
Page 217
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
B
170
170
ZONE
711
1. OVERTRAVEL
SENSOR
2. OVERTRAVEL
TARGET
3. TORQUE
LINK PIN
170
Overtravel Sensor Component Location

Figure 210
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
09-10-01-500-801-A/200
Page 218
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
C
B
ZONE
711
3. MOORING
POINT
A
1. ZERO
REFERENCE
40
30
20
10
10
150
140
130
120
110
100
2. RED STRIPE
Red Stripe Painted on NLG rear Component Location

Figure 211
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
09-10-01-500-801-A/200
Page 219
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
1
TOWING/PUSHBACK
DANGEROUS AREAS
MAINTAIN A MINIMUM OF 3 METERS (10 FEET) FAR FROM THE DANGEROUS AREAS AROUND
THE TOWING VEHICLE, TOWBAR, NOSE WHEEL, AND MAIN WHEELS WHILE THE AIRPLANE
IS MOVING.
TOWING/PUSHBACK
DANGEROUS AREAS
Dangerous Areas for Towing and Pushback Maintenance Practices

Figure 212
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
09-10-01-500-801-A/200
Page 220
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
GHSH TASK 09-10-02-500-801-A
1. Towbarless Towing - Maintenance Practices
A. General
(1) Aircraft towing is the usual procedure when it is necessary
to move the aircraft on the ground, without passengers and
flight crew members on board.
(2) This task gives the procedure to use a tug vehicle without a
towbar to tow the aircraft. For the procedure to tow the
aircraft with a towbar, refer to GHSH TASK 09-10-01-500801-A/200.
(3) When you use the Lektro (GSE 200) tug vehicle, obey these
recommendations:
(a)
For a safer towing operation, only approved personnel

must operate the tug vehicle (GSE 200).
NOTE: Because the tug vehicle uses the rear wheels
to steer, the operator must know the effect of
this on the operation of the unit and be
prepared to obey special precautions to
prevent accidents.
(b)
(c)
To do this task, you must know all data supplied in

ITEM GSE 200 Manufacturers Operating Manual.
The maximum speed permitted for towing with GSE
200 is 10 km/h (6.3 mph), if the limitations that follow
are obeyed:
1. The ground must be dry or wet concrete or asphalt;
2. For a ground with ice or snow, the maximum speed
permitted is 7 km/h (4.4 mph), if the towing vehicle
does not have antiskid system.
(4) When you use the towbarless towing vehicle (GSE 422),
obey these recommendations:
(a)
For a safer towing operation, only approved personnel

must operate the towbarless towing vehicle (GSE
422).
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
09-10-02-500-801-A/200
Page 201
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
(b)
(c)
(d)
To do this task, you must know all data supplied in the

towbarless towing vehicle (GSE 422) Manufacturers
Operating Manual.
Make sure that the towbarless towing vehicle has all
settings correctly adjusted for the aircraft. Refer to the
Manufacturers Operating Manual for more data.
422 is 30 km/h (18.8 mph), if the limitations that follow
are obeyed:
1. The ground must be dry or wet concrete or
asphalt;
2. For a ground with ice or snow, the maximum
speed permitted is 7 km/h (4.4 mph), if the towing
vehicle does not have antiskid system.
(5) EFFECTIVITY: ANAC, FAA AND TCCA CERTIFIED ACFT

When you use the towbarless towing vehicle (GSE 423),
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
For a safer towing operation, only formally trained and

qualified personnel must operate the towbarless
towing vehicle (GSE 423).
To do this task, you must know all the contents of the
Operating Manual.
Make sure that all settings of the towbarless towing
vehicle GSE 423 are correctly adjusted for the aircraft.
Refer to the Manufacturers Operating Manual for
more instructions.
423 is 7 km/h (4.4 mph).
B. Job Set-Up
SUBTASK 860-001-A
EFFECTIVITY: ANAC, FAA AND TCCA CERTIFIED ACFT
(1) If you use (GSE 423), go to SUBTASK 860-003-A. For the
other towbarless vehicles certified by Embraer, go to
SUBTASK 860-002-A.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
09-10-02-500-801-A/200
Page 202
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
SUBTASK 860-002-A
(2) Prepare the aircraft for the towing procedure as follows (For
the other towbarless vehicles certified by Embraer):
(a) Before the aircraft pushback, make sure that you
have the pushback crew that follows:
1. One person in the cockpit to operate the
steering system and the brakes;
2. One person to operate the towbarless vehicle;
NOTE:
For a safer procedure, Embraer

recommends the aid of 4 more
persons, as follows: one under each
wingtip and one at the tail.
One person at the left wing tip and
one person at the right wing tip to
monitor sufficient clearance during
turns;
One person behind the tail to
monitor sufficient clearance during
turns.
NOTE:
The towing supervisor is in control of

the towing operation and must have
visual and radio communication with
all the towing and flight crewmembers
at all times. You can use light wands
to give signals in low visibility.
(3) Do the check of the fuel asymmetry between wings. Do the

wing fuel transfer (AMM TASK 28-20-00-910-801-A/200), if
necessary.
NOTE: The maximum fuel asymmetry between wings is
363 kg (800 lb).
(4) Make sure that these steps are obeyed:
NOTE: Before you tow the aircraft, make sure that the tug
vehicle is in good condition for operation. Refer to
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
09-10-02-500-801-A/200
Page 203
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
the Manufacturers Operating Manual for more
data.
WARNING:
MAKE SURE THAT THE LANDING

GEAR SAFETY PINS ARE INSTALLED.
THIS IS TO PREVENT INJURIES TO
PERSONS
AND
DAMAGE
TO
MATERIAL.
(a) Make sure that the landing-gear downlock safety

pins are correctly installed to the main and nose
landing gears (GHSH TASK 32-00-05-400-801A/400).
CAUTION:
MAKE SURE THAT ALL ENGINE

COWLS ARE CLOSED AND LATCHED
BEFORE YOU TOW THE AIRPLANE.
DAMAGE TO THE AIRPLANE AND THE
(b) If applicable, close all engine cowls in the sequence

that follows:
1. Close the thrust reverser (AMM TASK 78-30-01910-802-A/200).
2. Close the fan cowl (AMM TASK 71-11-00-910802-A/200).
(c) Make sure that these doors are closed:
1. Forward and aft passenger doors (AMM SDS 5211-00/1 and AMM SDS 52-12-00/1).
2. Forward and aft service doors (AMM SDS 52-4100/1 and AMM SDS 52-42-00/1).
3. Forward and aft cargo doors (AMM SDS 52-3100/1 and AMM SDS 52-32-00/1).
(d) Make sure that the emergency/parking brake
accumulator is pressurized (GHSH TASK 12-12-05610-801-A/300) on the MFD (1). Refer to
Figure 202.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
09-10-02-500-801-A/200
Page 204
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
(e) Set the emergency/parking brake handle (2) to
parking position (brakes on).
(f) On the main panel, make sure that the
emergency/parking brake light (1) is ON. Refer to
Figure 203.
(g) Make sure that the red light in the towing indicationlight box (3) is on. Refer to Figure 201.
(h) Set the external steering disengagement switch (1)
to the DISENGAGED position. Refer to Figure 201.
(i) Make sure that the red light in the towing indicationlight box (3) is on. Refer to Figure 201.
CAUTION:
REMOVE ALL TOOLS, EQUIPMENT,

AND MATERIALS FROM THE TOWING
AREA. MAKE SURE THAT THE AREA IS
CLEAN.
(j) Make sure that all ground equipment is removed

from the areas adjacent to the aircraft.
(k) Make sure that all external services are
disconnected from the aircraft.
(l) Make sure that the grounding wire is disconnected
from the aircraft.
(m) Make sure that the tires are in serviceable
condition. If necessary, do a check and pressurize
the tires. Refer to GHSH TASK 12-15-01/301 for the
main wheel tires and GHSH TASK 12-15-03/301 for
the nose wheel tires.
SUBTASK 860-003-A
(5) Prepare the aircraft for the towing procedure as follows
(Using GSE 423):
(a)
Before the aircraft pushback, make sure that you have

the pushback crew that follows:
1. One person in the cockpit to operate the steering
system and the brakes;
2. One person to operate the towbarless vehicle by
remote control;
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
09-10-02-500-801-A/200
Page 205
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
For a safer procedure, Embraer
one under each wingtip and one at the
tail.
Make sure that GSE 070 are installed at all wheels.
Make sure that the emergency/parking brake
accumulator is pressurized (GHSH TASK 12-12-05610-801-A/300) on the MFD (1). Refer to Figure 202.
NOTE:
(b)
(c)
NOTE: Before you start the towing procedure, it is

necessary to energize the aircraft to make sure the
emergency/parking
brake
accumulator
is
pressurized.
(d)
Set the emergency/parking brake handle (2) to parking

position (brakes on). On the main panel, make sure
that the EMERG/PRKG BRAKE light (1) is on. Refer to
Figure 202 and Figure 203.
CAUTION:
(e)
(f)
(g)

Make sure that all ground equipment is removed from

the areas adjacent to the aircraft.
Make sure that all external services are disconnected
from the aircraft.
Make sure that the grounding wire is disconnected
from the aircraft.
WARNING:
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
WHEN YOU PUSH BACK THE AIRCRAFT,

ALL PERSONS MUST BE FAR FROM THE
DANGEROUS AREAS AROUND THE
TOWING VEHICLE CRADLE, NOSE
WHEELS AND MAIN WHEELS. THE
AIRCRAFT CHANGES POSITION DURING
PUSHBACK AND CAN RUN OVER
PERSON ON THE GROUND. IF YOU DO
NOT OBEY THIS PRECAUTION, A FATAL
ACCIDENT CAN OCCUR.
09-10-02-500-801-A/200
Page 206
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
(h)
Make sure that all external doors and panels are

closed and correctly installed, but not access door
(ramp panel).
SUBTASK 860-004-A
(6) To tow the aircraft with a Lektro (GSE 200) towbarless
vehicle, do SUBTASK 020-001-A.
(7) To tow the aircraft with the towbarless towing vehicle (GSE
422), do SUBTASK 020-002-A.
To tow the aircraft with the towbarless towing vehicle (GSE
423), do SUBTASK 020-003-A.
C. Towing Procedure - Maintenance Practices
SUBTASK 020-001-A
CAUTION:

TO SET THE EMERGENCY/PARKING
BRAKE, IF NECESSARY. AND ALL PERSON
IN THE COCKPIT MUST BE IN A SEAT AND
THE SEATBELT MUST BE FASTENED.
(1) This procedure is applicable to the Lektro (GSE 200)

towbarless vehicle. Refer to Figure 204, Sheet 1.
(2) To go near the aircraft, do as follows:
(a)
Move the tug vehicle, at a slow speed, in the (aligned

in the direction in which the tire points) (1). Refer to
Figure 204, Sheet 2.
NOTE: Slow speed is approximately 4 to 5 km/h (2.5
to 3 mph).
(b)
Stop the tug vehicle 1 m (3 ft) away from the wheel of

the aircraft.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
09-10-02-500-801-A/200
Page 207
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
Lower the nose wheel cradle to 5 cm (2 in) above the

ground.
Slowly move the tug vehicle again until the cradle
stops at 5 cm (2 in) away from the edge of the nose
wheel tire.
Lower the nose wheel cradle until it touches the
ground.
Slightly lift the cradle until it does not touch the ground.
Slowly move the tug vehicle again until the cradle
lightly touches the nose wheel tire.
Apply the parking brake to the tug vehicle.
(3) To dock the aircraft, do as follows:

(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
Make sure that the tug vehicle is in the correct

position.
Make sure that the red light in the towing indicationlight box (3) is on. Refer to Figure 201.
Attach the strut strap to the winch strap.
Unwind sufficient winch strap until you can attach the
strut strap to the NLG strut.
NOTE: Do not unwind to a point where the winch
starts to wind the strap again.
CAUTION:
DO NOT CONTACT THE SHINY OLEO

SURFACE WITH ANY METAL STRAP
FITTINGS. THIS IS TO PREVENT DAMAGE
TO THE EQUIPMENT.
CAUTION:
DO NOT INSTALL THE STRUT STRAP

AROUND THE WHEEL ASSEMBLY THE
STRUT STRAP CAN CAUSE DAMAGE TO
THE
COMPONENTS
DURING
THE
WINCHING AND TOWING OPERATION.
(e)
Put the strut strap around the nose wheel strut

counterclockwise.
NOTE: Before you winch or tow the aircraft, make
sure that the strap is not twisted or in a
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
09-10-02-500-801-A/200
Page 208
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
position where it can cause damage to the
nose wheel assembly.
(f)
Adjust the protective sleeve to the center of the strut

strap.
NOTE: Make sure that only the protective sleeve
touches the aircraft.
(g)
Attach the other end of the strut strap attachment to

the winch strap hook.
NOTE: Make sure that the hook safety latch is
correctly attached and that it operates
correctly.
(h)
(i)
Slowly winch (2) the winch strap. Stop when the winch
strap is tight and parallel to the ground. Refer to
Release the emergency/parking brake of the aircraft.
NOTE: If installed, remove the wheel chocks from
the MLG wheels.
(j)
Winch the aircraft (3) to the cradle. Refer to

NOTE: Make sure that the nose wheels stay aligned
with the center of the cradle.
(k)
(l)
Winch the aircraft fully to the cradle until the nose

wheel tires touch the rear gate or stop switch.
Lift the nose-wheel cradle (4) assembly sufficiently to
let it be away from ground obstacles when you tow the
aircraft. Refer to Figure 204, Sheet 2.
NOTE: During the lift operation, monitor the tension
on the winch strap. Extend or retract the
winch strap, as necessary, to keep the
correct tension on the nose wheel.
(4) To tow the aircraft, do as follows:

EFFECTIVITY: ALL
09-10-02-500-801-A/200
Page 209
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
CAUTION:
(a)

MORE
THAN
THE
MAXIMUM
ANGLE
PERMITTED THAT IS +/-170 DEGREES. IF THE
STEERING
ANGLE
IS
MORE
THAN
+/- 170 DEGREES, DAMAGE TO THE
STEERING SYSTEM CAN OCCUR.
Release the brake of the tug vehicle and start to tow

the aircraft. Do the steps that follow:
NOTE: Braking of aircraft during the towing
operation is not permitted unless in
emergency conditions.
1. If the aircraft emergency/parking brake is applied
during the towing procedure with the vehicle
connected to the aircraft, independently of the
vehicle speed, refer to AMM TASK 05-50-25-200801-A/600.
2. During the towing procedure, carefully monitor the
zero reference (1) on the NLG. Refer to
Figure 209.
3. When the zero reference aligns with the red stripe
(2) painted on the rear of the NLG Figure 209, it
shows that the steering angle is near the
maximum permitted angle of (+/-) 170 degrees.
NOTE:
Do not do the towing operation when

the zero reference aligns with the edge
of the red stripe on the NLG (+/-) 140
degrees.
You can use the mooring point (3) as
a reference to see when the NLG
steering angle is near the maximum
permitted value. Refer to Figure 209.
4. Tow the aircraft slowly and in a straight line before

you try to turn.
5. Complete the aircraft pushback in a straight line
for a minimum of 3 m (10 ft).
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
09-10-02-500-801-A/200
Page 210
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
NOTE:
The function of this step is to:

Align the steering as close as
possible to the zero-degree position
and in the range of 76 (maximum
angle for steering engagement).
Prevent loads on the NLG axle that
are not necessary.
Prevent wear of the NLG tires.
6. Make sure that the steering range is not more

than 170 degrees. Refer to Figure 207. If the
range is more than 170 degrees, the torque link
pin breaks the overtravel target of the overtravel
sensor. Refer to Figure 208.
NOTE:
Do not stop the aircraft in a turn if it is

not necessary.
When you move the aircraft, always
use gradual acceleration and brake
application.
Do not start turns at high speed.
During slippery conditions, reduce
speed and anticipate slower braking
reaction.
7. When the aircraft is in the correct position, stop

the aircraft with the tug vehicle.
(5) To undock the aircraft from the tug vehicle, do as follows:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
Set the emergency/parking brake handle to the

parking position (brakes on).
Lower the nose wheel cradle until the cradle is on the
ground.
Unwind sufficient winch strap to remove the strut strap
from the NLG.
Open the strap hook and remove the strut strap from
the NLG.
Unwind the remaining winch strap.
Slowly move the tug vehicle away from the aircraft
nose wheel until the cradle pulls from under the nose
wheel tire.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
09-10-02-500-801-A/200
Page 211
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
(g)
(h)
Lift the nose wheel cradle.

Remove the tug vehicle.
SUBTASK 020-002-A
(6) This procedure is applicable to the towbarless towing
vehicle (GSE 422).
CAUTION:

TO SET THE EMERGENCY/PARKING
BRAKE, IF NECESSARY. AND ALL PERSON
IN THE COCKPIT MUST BE IN A SEAT AND
THE SEATBELT MUST BE FASTENED.

(a) When the tug vehicle is 10 m (33 ft) away from the
aircraft, it must move at a slow speed in the direction of
the aircraft nose wheel (aligned in the direction in which
the tire points).
NOTE:
Slow speed is approximately 4 to 5 km/h

(2.5 to 3 mph).
(b) Stop the tug vehicle approximately 5 m (16 ft) from the
nose landing gear. The tug vehicle must be in front of
and aligned with the aircraft nose wheel.
NOTE:
Make sure that the tug vehicle is correctly

aligned with the aircraft nose landing gear
before you engage and dock the aircraft.
Refer to Figure 205, Sheet 1.
(c) Lower the cradle to the ground.

NOTE:
Make sure that the CRADLE DOWN

indication light on the tug vehicle is on.
(d) Select the correct aircraft wheel size in the tug vehicle.
(e) Open the gate of the tug.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
09-10-02-500-801-A/200
Page 212
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
NOTE:
When the gate fully opens, an indication

light on the tug comes on.
When the gate is open and the cradle fully
lowered, a warning light on the tug vehicle
also comes on.
(f) Remove the nose-landing-gear wheel chocks from the

aircraft.
NOTE:
Make sure that the main wheels of the

aircraft are chocked before you remove the
chocks from the nose wheels.
(8) To dock the aircraft, do as follows (Refer to Figure 205,

Sheet 2):
NOTE:
(a)
A person must be in position to monitor the

connection of the tractor to the aircraft. This
person must have authority to stop the tractor
when he/she thinks that damage could occur to
the aircraft.
Drive the tug vehicle forward (1) to engage and dock

with the nose wheel of the aircraft. Refer to Figure
205, Sheet 2.
NOTE:
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
An indication light on the tug vehicle comes

on when the nose wheel is fully engaged.
The indication light, on the tug vehicle, only
comes on when the nose wheel and cradle
are in the correct position.
Severe misalignment can prevent the
correct cradle engagement to the tire
assembly.
Do not apply the parking brake to the tug
vehicle.
Be careful with ground objects when you
move the tug with the cradle lowered.
Make sure that the Douglas approved
personnel correctly adjusted all speed
settings of the hydraulically controlled
mechanisms of the towbarless towing for the
09-10-02-500-801-A/200
Page 213
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
Embraer 190 ECJ aircraft. Refer to the
Manufacturers Operating Manual for more
data.
(b) Close the gate (2) and (3) of the tug vehicle. Refer
to Figure 205, Sheet 2.
NOTE:
Apply the footbrake to stop the vehicle until

the gate closes approximately 45 (half
way). Then release the footbrake to let the
tug vehicle move. This will correct a possible
misalignment.
An indication light comes on, on the tug
vehicle, when the gate is closed and the
cradle locking bars touch the aircraft nose
wheels.
Look at the screen of the closed circuit
television when you close and lock the gate
assembly.
(c) Apply the handbrake when the gate and cradle

locking bars are closed.
(d) Make sure that you removed all equipment from the
aircraft and release the aircraft brakes.
(e) Lift the cradle (4). Refer to Figure 205, Sheet 2.
NOTE:
An indication light comes on, on the tug

vehicle, when the cradle is fully lifted.
(f) Remove the chocks from the main wheels.

WARNING: DO NOT APPLY THE AIRCRAFT BRAKES
WHEN AIRCRAFT IS BEING TOWED WITH
A TOWBARLESS TOW VEHICLE. IF
BRAKES ARE APPLIED, DAMAGE WILL
OCCUR TO THE NOSE LANDING GEAR,
TOWING VEHICLE AND MAINTENANCE
PERSONNEL CAN BE INJURED.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
09-10-02-500-801-A/200
Page 214
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
DO NOT STEER THE NOSE LANDING
GEAR MORE THAN THE MAXIMUM ANGLE
THE STEERING ANGLE IS MORE THAN +/170
DEGREES,
DAMAGE
TO
THE
CAUTION:
(a)
Set the cabin to the normal position, release the

brakes of the tug vehicle and start to tow.
NOTE:
(b)
You must apply the handbrake when the

tractor is in neutral gear or when it stops.
Do the steps that follow:

NOTE:
1.
Braking of aircraft during the towing

emergency conditions.
If the aircraft emergency/parking brake is applied

during the towing procedure with the vehicle
connected to the aircraft, independently of the
vehicle speed, refer to AMM TASK 05-50-25-200801-A/600.
CAUTION:
2.
3.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
DURING THE TOWING OPERATION,

GEAR MORE THAN 140 DEGREES. IF
YOU
DO,
THE
TOWBARLESS
VEHICLE CABIN CAN HIT THE
FUSELAGE AND CAUSE DAMAGE TO
THE AIRCRAFT.
During the towing procedure, carefully monitor the

zero reference on the NLG. Refer to Figure 209.
When the zero reference aligns with the red stripe
painted on the rear of the NLG, it shows that the
steering angle is near the maximum permitted
angle of (+/-) 170 degrees. Refer to Figure 208.
09-10-02-500-801-A/200
Page 215
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
NOTE:
4.
5.
Do not do the towing operation when the

zero reference aligns with the edge of the
red stripe on the NLG (+/-) 140 degrees.
You can use the mooring point as a
angle is near the maximum permitted value.
Refer to Figure 207 and Figure 209.
Tow the aircraft slowly and in a straight line before

you try to turn.
Complete the aircraft pushback in a straight line
NOTE:
6.
The function of this step is to:

possible to the zero-degree position
and in the range of 76 (maximum
angle for steering engagement).
Prevent loads on the NLG axle that
are not necessary.
Prevent wear of the NLG tires.
Make sure that the steering range is not more

than 170 degrees. Refer to Figure 207. If the
sensor. Refer to Figure 208.
NOTE: Do not stop the aircraft in a turn if it is not
necessary.
When you move the aircraft, always use
gradual
acceleration
and
brake
application.
During slippery conditions, reduce speed
and anticipate slower braking reaction.
7.
When the aircraft is in the correct position, stop

EFFECTIVITY: ALL
09-10-02-500-801-A/200
Page 216
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
(a) Apply the handbrake of the tug vehicle.
(b) Lower the cradle.
NOTE: An indication light comes on, on the tug vehicle,
when the cradle is fully lowered.
(c)
Apply the brakes to the aircraft.
(d) Release the handbrake of the tug vehicle and open the
gate.
NOTE: When the gate fully opens, an indication light
comes on. When the gate is open and the
cradle fully lowered, other warning light also
comes on.
(e) Slowly move the tug vehicle away from the aircraft
nose wheel until the cradle pulls from under the nose
wheel tire.
(f) When the tug vehicle is far from the aircraft, close the
gate.
NOTE: When the cradle locking bars are closed, an
indication light comes on, on the tug vehicle.
(g) Lift the cradle.
NOTE: An indication light comes on, on the tug vehicle,
when the cradle is fully lifted.
(h) If the nose wheels are not in the zero-degree position,
align them with the zero-degree reference on the NLG.
SUBTASK 020-003-A
vehicle GSE 423, which is a fork-shaped tractor with three
wheels. Refer to Figure 206, Sheet 1.
NOTE: Only one person is necessary to operate the towing
vehicle.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
09-10-02-500-801-A/200
Page 217
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
For a safer towing operation, only qualified
personnel must operate the towing vehicle.
(12) The towing vehicle must be in good condition for the
pushback operation.
NOTE: Obey the manufacturers instructions when you do
maintenance work on the towing vehicle.
Make sure that the fixed rollers (1) and the
adjustable friction rollers (2) are in good condition.
Make sure that the swivel castor (front wheel) (3) of
the towing vehicle moves freely. Refer to Figure 206,
Sheet 1.
(13) You operate the towing vehicle with a radio-controlled
handset from the ground.
NOTE: Before you operate the towing vehicle, make sure
that the radio-controlled handset is the correct one
for the towing vehicle model.
The person on the ground gives instructions to the
person in the cockpit to help him control the aircraft.
(14) Before you attach the vehicle towbarless towing vehicle to
the left main landing gear, make sure that:
NOTE: This towbarless towing vehicle is usually attached
to the left main landing gear. This is to prevent
interference with other ramp activities.
The engine at the side GSE 423 is connected must
not be started before GSE 423 is removed.
(a) The left flaps are set in the 0-degree, 1-degree, or 2degree position.
NOTE: It is recommended that you set the flap to the 0degree position.
(b) The steering system is ENGAGED.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
09-10-02-500-801-A/200
Page 218
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
NOTE: The steering system must be ENGAGED during
the whole procedure.
(c) The No. 1 and No. 2 hydraulic systems are on.
(d) The tires of the nose and main landing gears are
correctly inflated.
(15) To go near the aircraft and attach the towbarless vehicle,
do as follows.
(a) Move the towing vehicle from the rear of the aircraft, at
a slow speed, in the direction of the aircraft main wheel.
A slow speed is approximately 4 to 5 km/h
(2.5 to 3 mph).
(b) When the towing vehicle is near the main landing gear,
correctly adjust the opening for the fixed rollers.
(c) Before you attach the towing vehicle to the main
landing gear, align the fixed rollers of the towing vehicle
with the main landing gear tires. It is important to
correctly align the main landing gear tires with the fixed
rollers. Refer to Figure 206, Sheet 3.
(d) Move the towing vehicle toward the main landing as
shown in the sequence of Figure 206, Sheet 4:
Attach the towing vehicle to the main landing gear
from the rear of the aircraft (1).
Move the towing vehicle towards (3) the main landing
gear with the opening of the fixed rollers already
adjusted to the aircraft model. Refer to Figure 206,
Sheet 4.
When the fixed roller is correctly aligned (2) with the
main landing gear tires, close (3) the adjustable
friction roller (2). It is important to correctly align the
main landing gear tires with the fixed rollers. Refer to
Figure 206, Sheet 1 and Figure 206, Sheet 4.
When the aircraft tires are correctly attached to the
towing vehicle, the aircraft (4) can be moved. Refer to
(16) Attach the headset (GSE 011) to the ramp panel of the
aircraft.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
09-10-02-500-801-A/200
Page 219
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
(17) Go to a position in front of the aircraft, in the limits
(distances and angles) shown in Figure 206, Sheet 5.
(18) Make sure that the brakes (pedals and parking) are not
applied.
(19) Make sure that the STEER OFF status message in not
shown in the EICAS.
NOTE: Make sure that the red light on the towing indicationlight box (3) is on. Refer to Figure 201.
(20) The manufacturer of the towbarless towing vehicle GSE
423 suggests the terminology that follows. Use this
terminology for standard communication. Refer to for an
example.
Cockpit: Ready for towing

Ground: Brakes Off
Ground: Brakes Off
Ground: Central Left,
Ground: Left (Right, Right)
Ground: Back off Steady Towing complete Set Parking
Brakes
Cockpit: Brakes set
Ground: Power Push removed.
Left, left the person in the cockpit applies the left tiller.
Continues to apply more left tiller until the aircraft
dispatcher says:
Steady - which means hold the tiller in the current
position (Right, right means to move the tiller to the right
until the aircraft dispatcher says Steady).
Back off means to reduce the tiller input.
Central means to set the tiller to a central position.
Stop, stop, stop means to stop the aircraft.
(21) Move the aircraft in the correct direction, as necessary.

NOTE: You can use the terminology given in this manual
or you can choose a different terminology.
Braking of aircraft during towbarless towing
operation with GSE 423 is not permitted unless in
emergency conditions. The towing vehicle has a fail-
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
09-10-02-500-801-A/200
Page 220
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
safe system. There is no risk of damage to the
aircraft or to the towing vehicle.
If you must do a turn during the airplane pushback
operation, you must do this with an aircraft Nose
Wheel Steering limit of +/- 45 for 90 turns and +/30 for S turns.
(a) After the towing operation is complete, the person in
the cockpit to will set the parking brakes.
(b) After the person in the cockpit tells you that the brakes
are set, open the rollers of the towing vehicle and
command it to move away from the aircraft.
D. Job Close-Up
(1) Put the aircraft back to its initial condition (AMM MPP 32-0000/201).
(2) Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted material from
the work area.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
09-10-02-500-801-A/200
Page 221
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
A
ZONE
711
B
ZONE
125
C
LIGHTBOX
1. STEERING
SWITCH
RED LIGHT
(REF.)
STEERING
AC GPU
GROUND
SERVICE SW
LIGHTBOX
2. SWITCH
IN USE
D
I
S
E
N
G
RAMP
INPH
CKPT
CALL
MIC/PHONE
E
N
G
A
G
E
RAMP PANEL
(REF.)
GREEN LIGHT
(REF.)
Steering Disarming External Switch Component Location

Figure 201
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
09-10-02-500-801-A/200
Page 222
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
A
1. MFD
BRAKES
EMER
ACCU
PSI
600
S
Y
S
2
S
Y
S
1 600
A
Emergency/Parking Brake Accumulator Component Location
Figure 202
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
09-10-02-500-801-A/200
Page 223
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
GROUND PROXIMITY TERRAIN INHIBIT/

EMERGENCY PARKING BRAKE CONTROL PANEL (REF.)
LIGHT
HANDLE
B
Emergency/Parking Brake Component Location
Figure 203
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
09-10-02-500-801-A/200
Page 224
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
C
B
ZONE
711
A
SNAP HOOK
WINCH STRAP
STRUT STRAP
REAR DECK COVER

FRONT DECK COVER
HEADLIGHT
CRADLE
STEER WHEEL
SIDE COMPARTMENTS
COVER
RUNNING/ PARK LIGHT
DRIVE WHEEL
FOR REFERENCE ONLY TUG VEHICLE DETAILS MAY CHANGE ACCORDING

TO CUSTUMERS ORDER.
WINCH STRAP & HOOK
Towbarless Procedure Maintenance Practices

Figure 204 Sheet 1
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
09-10-02-500-801-A/200
Page 225
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
APPROACH TO AIRCRAFT
ATTACH STRUT AND

WINCH STRAP TO
AIRCRAFT
LIFT AND TRANSPORT
WINCH AIRCRAFT
ONTO CRADLE

Figure 204 Sheet 2
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
09-10-02-500-801-A/200
Page 226
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK

Figure 205 Sheet 1
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
09-10-02-500-801-A/200
Page 227
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
CLOSE THE GATE
LIFT AND TRANSPORT
AIRCRAFT DOCKED

Figure 205 Sheet 2
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
09-10-02-500-801-A/200
Page 228
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
1. FIXED ROLLER
2. ADJUSTABLE
FRICTION ROLLER
3. SWIVEL CASTOR
(FRONT WHEEL)

Figure 206 Sheet 1
09-10-02-500-801-A/200
Page 229
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
190
A
Figure 206 Sheet 2
09-10-02-500-801-A/200
Page 230
SEP 15/09
VERIFY THAT THE ROLLERS OF THE POWERPUSH UNIT ARE IN CENTRIC AND
PARALLEL POSITION TO THE MAIN LANDING GEAR WHEELS.
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK

Figure 206 Sheet 3
09-10-02-500-801-A/200
Page 231
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK

Figure 206 Sheet 4
09-10-02-500-801-A/200
Page 232
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
45
12 m
(39 ft 4 in.)
KEEP WITHIN THE GRAY AREA
PILOTS EYE POSITION

3.91 m
(12 ft 10 in.)
1.80 m
(5 ft 10 in.)
REF. GROUND (BOW)

12 m
(39 ft 4 in.)

Figure 206 Sheet 5
09-10-02-500-801-A/200
Page 233
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
170
170
Maximum Steering Angle Maintenance Practices

Figure 207
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
09-10-02-500-801-A/200
Page 234
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
B
170
170
ZONE
711
1. OVERTRAVEL
SENSOR
2. OVERTRAVEL
TARGET
3. TORQUE
LINK PIN
170
B
Overtravel Sensor Component Location
Figure 208
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
09-10-02-500-801-A/200
Page 235
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
C
B
ZONE
711
3. MOORING
POINT
A
1. ZERO
REFERENCE
40
30
20
10
10
150
140
130
120
110
100
2. RED STRIPE
Red Stripe Painted on NLG rear Component Location

Figure 209
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
09-10-02-500-801-A/200
Page 236
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
GHSH TASK 09-10-02-500-802-A
1. Pushback - Maintenance Practices
A. General
(1) The aircraft pushback is the usual procedure to move the
aircraft away from the terminal gate before flight, with the
passengers and flight crew members on board and to push
an aircraft back with the ground towing crew only.
(2) This task gives the procedure to use a tug vehicle without a
towbar to push the aircraft back. For the procedure to push
the aircraft back with a towbar, refer to AMM TASK 09-1001-500-802-A/200.
(3) When you use the Lektro (GSE 200) tug vehicle, obey these
recommendations:
(a)

qualified personnel must operate the tug vehicle
GSE 200.
NOTE: Because the tug vehicle uses the rear wheels
to steer, the operator must be aware of how
this affects the handling of the unit and be
prepared to take special precautions to
prevent accidents.
(b)
(c)

ITEM GSE 200 Manufacturers Operating Manual.
The maximum speed permitted for pushback with
GSE 200 is 10 km/h (6,3 mph), provided that the
following limitations are observed:
1. The ground condition must be dry or wet concrete
or asphalt;
2. For a ground condition with ice or snow, the
maximum speed permitted is 7 km/h (4.4 mph),
except if the towing vehicle has anti-skid system;
(4) When you use the towbarless towing vehicle (GSE 422),
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
09-10-02-500-802-A/200
Page 201
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)

towing vehicle GSE 422.
Operating Manual.
more instructions.
The maximum speed permitted for pushback with GSE
422 is 30 km/h (18.8 mph), provided that the following
limitations are observed:
1. The ground condition must be dry, wet concrete or
asphalt;
2. For a ground condition with ice or snow, the
maximum speed permitted is 7 km/h (4.4 mph),
except if the towing vehicle has anti-skid system;

When you use the towbarless towing vehicle (GSE 423),
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)

towing vehicle GSE 423.
Operating Manual.
more instructions.
423 is 7 km/h (4.4 mph).
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
09-10-02-500-802-A/200
Page 202
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
SUBTASK 860-001-A
B. Job Set-Up
(1) If you use GSE 423, go to SUBTASK 860-003-A. For the
other towbarless vehicles certified by Embraer, go to
SUBTASK 860-002-A.
SUBTASK 860-002-A
(2) Prepare the aircraft for the pushback procedure as follows:
(a) Before the aircraft pushback, make sure that you have
1. One person in the cockpit to operate the brakes;
2. One person to operate the towing vehicle;
NOTE: For
a
safer
procedure,
Embraer
recommends the aid of 4 more persons, as
follows:
One towing supervisor to control the
towing operation;
One person on the left wing tip and one
person on the right wing tip to monitor
sufficient clearance during the turns;
One person behind the tail to monitor
sufficient clearance during the turns.
NOTE: The towing supervisor is in control of the
towing operation and must have visual and
radio communication with all the towing
and flight crewmembers at all times. You
can use light wands to give signals in low
visibility.
(b) Make sure that GSE 189 was removed from the RAT
(AMM TASK 24-23-08-080-801-A/400).
(c) Make sure that the landing-gear downlock safety-pins
are removed from the NLG and MLG (GHSH TASK 3200-05-000-801-A/400).
(d) Make sure that GSE 070 are installed in all wheels.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
09-10-02-500-802-A/200
Page 203
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
(e) Make sure that the emergency/parking brake

accumulator is pressurized (GHSH TASK 12-12-05610-801-A/300) on MFD (1).
necessary to energize the aircraft to make sure
the emergency/parking brake accumulator is
pressurized.
(f)
Set the emergency/parking brake handle (2) to parking

position (brakes on). On the main panel, make sure that
the EMERG/PRKG BRAKE light (1) is on. Refer to
Figure 203.
(g) Make sure that the towing-indication light box (3) shows
the red light on. Refer to Figure 201.
(h) Open access door to get access to the ramp panel.
(i) Set the steering switch (1) to the DISENGAGED
position. On the EICAS display, make sure that the
STEER OFF status message comes into view. Refer to
Figure 201.
CAUTION:

(j)
Make sure that all ground equipment is removed from

areas adjacent to the aircraft.
(k) Make sure that all external services are disconnected
from the aircraft.
(l) Make sure that the grounding wire is disconnected from
the aircraft.
CAUTION:
EFFECTIVITY: ALL

DANGEROUS
AREAS
AROUND
THE
TOWING
VEHICLE
CRADLE,
NOSE
PUSHBACK
AND
CAN
RUN
OVER
PERSONS ON THE GROUND. IF YOU DO
09-10-02-500-802-A/200
Page 204
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK

ACCIDENT CAN OCCUR.
(m) Make sure that all external doors and panels are closed
and correctly installed, except access door (ramp
panel). Refer to Figure 201.
(n) Make sure that the tug vehicle driver can speak with the
cockpit crew through the headset and service
interphone.
SUBTASK 860-003-A
(3) Prepare the aircraft for the pushback procedure as follows:
(a) Before the aircraft pushback, make sure that you have
1.
One person in the cockpit to operate the steering

system and the brakes;
2. One person to operate the towbarless vehicle by
remote control;
NOTE: For
a
safer
procedure,
Embraer
one under each wingtip and one on the tail.
(b) Make sure that GSE 189 was removed from the RAT
(AMM TASK 24-23-08-080-801-A/400).
(c) Make sure that the landing-gear downlock safety-pins
are removed from the NLG and MLG (GHSH TASK 3200-05-000-801-A/400).
(d) Make sure that GSE 070 are installed in all wheels.
(e) Make sure that the emergency/parking brake
accumulator is pressurized (GHSH TASK 12-12-05-610801-A/300) on MFD (1). Refer to Figure 201.
necessary to energize the aircraft to make sure
the emergency/parking brake accumulator is
pressurized.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
09-10-02-500-802-A/200
Page 205
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
(f) Set the emergency/parking brake handle (2) to parking

position (brakes on). On the main panel, make sure that
the EMERG/PRKG BRAKE light (1) is ON.
CAUTION:

(g) Make sure that all ground equipment is removed from

areas adjacent to the aircraft.
(h) Make sure that all external services are disconnected
from the aircraft.
(i) Make sure that the grounding wire is disconnected from
the aircraft.
WARNING:
(j)

DANGEROUS AREAS AROUND THE
TOWING
VEHICLE
CRADLE,
NOSE
PUSHBACK AND CAN RUN OVER
PERSONS ON THE GROUND. IF YOU DO
ACCIDENT CAN OCCUR.
Make sure that all external doors and panels are closed
and correctly installed, except access door (ramp
panel). Refer to Figure 201.
SUBTASK 860-004-A
(4) To push the aircraft back with the use of a Lektro (GSE 200)
towbarless vehicle, do SUBTASK 020-001-A.
(5) To push the aircraft back with the use of a towbarless
towing
vehicle
(GSE
422),
do
subtask
SUBTASK 020-002-A.
To push the aircraft back with the use of a towbarless
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
09-10-02-500-802-A/200
Page 206
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
towing
vehicle
(GSE
SUBTASK 020-003-A.
423),
do
subtask
C. Pushback Procedure - Maintenance Practices

SUBTASK 020-001-A
(1) This procedure is applicable to the Lektro (GSE 200)
towbarless vehicle. Refer to Figure 204, Sheet 2.
(a)
Move the tug vehicle at a slow speed to the direction

of the aircraft nose Wheel (aligned with the direction
that the tire points).
NOTE: Slow speed is approximately 4 to 5 km/h
(2.5 to 3 mph).
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
Stop the tug vehicle 1 m (3 ft) away from the aircraft

wheel.
Lower the nose wheel cradle to 5 cm (2 in) above the
ground.
Slowly move the tug vehicle again so that the cradle
stops 5 cm (2 in) away from the edge of the nose
wheel tire.
Lower the nose wheel cradle so that it touches the
ground.
Lift the cradle slightly so that it just does not touch the
ground.
Slowly move the tug vehicle again so that the cradle
lightly touches the nose wheel tire.
Apply the parking brake to the tug vehicle.
(3) To dock the aircraft, do as follows:

(a)
(b)
(c)
Make sure that the tug vehicle is correctly positioned

(1). Refer to Figure 204, Sheet 2.
Make sure that the towing-indication light box (3)
shows the red light ON. Refer to Figure 201.
Attach the strut strap to the winch strap.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
09-10-02-500-802-A/200
Page 207
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
(d)
Unwind sufficient winch strap so that you can install

the strut strap to the NLG strut.
NOTE: Do not unwind the strut strap to a point

where the winch starts to rewind the strap.
CAUTION: DO NOT CONTACT THE SHINY OLEO
SURFACE WITH ANY METAL STRAP
FITTINGS. THIS IS TO PREVENT DAMAGE
TO THE EQUIPMENT.
CAUTION:
(e)
DO NOT INSTALL THE STRUT STRAP

AROUND THE WHEEL ASSEMBLY THE
STRUT STRAP CAN CAUSE DAMAGE TO
THE
COMPONENTS
DURING
THE
WINCHING AND TOWING OPERATION.
Put the strut strap around the nose wheel strut

counterclockwise.
NOTE: Make sure that the strap is not twisted or in a
position where it can cause damage to any
part of the nose wheel assembly during the
winching and towing operation.
(f)
Adjust the protective sleeve to the center of the strut

strap.
NOTE: Make sure that only the protective sleeve
touches the aircraft.
(g)
Attach the other end of the strut strap attachment to

the winch strap hook.
NOTE: Make sure that the hook safety latch is
correctly attached and that it operates
correctly.
(h)
(i)
Slowly winch the winch strap (2). Stop when the winch
strap is tight and parallel to the ground. Refer to
Release the emergency/parking brake of the aircraft.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
09-10-02-500-802-A/200
Page 208
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
NOTE: Remove the wheel chocks from the MLG

wheels if necessary.
(j)
Winch the aircraft onto the cradle.

NOTE: Make sure that the nose wheels stay in the
center of the cradle.
(k)
(l)
Winch the aircraft fully onto the cradle (3) until the
nose wheel tires touches the rear gate or stop switch.
Lift the nose-wheel cradle (4) assembly sufficiently to
let it clear from ground obstacles during towing. Refer
NOTE: During the lift operation, monitor the tension
on the winch strap. Extend or retract the
winch strap, as necessary, to keep the
correct tension on the nose wheel.

CAUTION:
(a)

MORE
THAN
THE
MAXIMUM
ANGLE
PERMITTED THAT IS +/-170 DEGREES. IF THE
STEERING
ANGLE
IS
MORE
THAN
+/- 170 DEGREES, DAMAGE TO THE
Release the brake of the tug vehicle and start the

aircraft towing. Make sure that you obey the steps that
follow:
1. Slowly tow the aircraft in a straight line before you
try to turn.
2. Complete the aircraft pushback in a straight line
NOTE: The objective of this step is to:
Align the steering as close as possible to
the zero degree position and in the range
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
09-10-02-500-802-A/200
Page 209
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
of 76 degrees (maximum angle for steering

engagement).
Prevent abrupt motion when the steering is
engaged (undesirable for passengers and
crew).
Prevent unnecessary loads on the NLG
axle.
Prevent unnecessary wear of the NLG
tires.
3. Make sure that the steering range is not more
than 170 degrees. Refer to Figure 213. If this
pin (3) breaks the overtravel target (2) of the
overtravel sensor (1). Refer to Figure 223.
NOTE:
Control the towing speed only with the

tug vehicle speed-indicator.
Do not stop the aircraft in a turn if it is
not necessary.
When you tow the aircraft, always
increase the speed and brake
gradually.
During slippery conditions, decrease
the speed and anticipate slower
braking reaction.
Braking of aircraft during the pushback
emergency situations.
4. If the aircraft emergency/parking brake is applied

(independently of the vehicle speed) during the
towing procedure with the vehicle docked to the
aircraft, do a check of the NLG and its adjacent
structure for possible damage. Refer to AMM
TASK 05-50-25-200-801-A/600.
5. When the aircraft is in the correct position, stop
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
09-10-02-500-802-A/200
Page 210
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
Set the emergency/parking brake handle to the

parking position (brakes on). On the main panel, make
sure that the brake on light is on.
Lower the nose wheel cradle until the cradle is on the
ground.
Unwind sufficient winch strap to remove the strut strap
from the NLG.
Open the strap hook and remove the strut strap from
the NLG.
Unwind the remaining winch strap.
Slowly back the tug vehicle away from the aircraft
nose wheel until the cradle is pulled from under the
nose wheel tire.
Lift the nose wheel cradle.
Remove the tug vehicle.
SUBTASK 020-002-A
vehicle (GSE 422).
(a) When you come 10 m (33 ft) away from the aircraft,
move the tug vehicle at a slow speed to the direction of
the aircraft nose wheel (aligned with the direction the
tire is pointing).
NOTE:
Slow speed is approximately 4 to 5 km/h

(2.5 to 3 mph).
(b) Stop the tug vehicle approximately 5 m (16 ft) away

from the nose landing gear and position the tug vehicle
in front of and aligned with the aircraft nose wheel.
NOTE:
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
Make sure that the tug vehicle is correctly

aligned with the aircraft nose landing gear
before you engage and dock the aircraft. To
do this, the two bands (one up the engine
cover (Sight Line) and the other on the gate
(Sight Antenna)) and the yellow-painted
mooring point of the nose landing gear must
be aligned. Refer to Figure 205, Sheet 1.
09-10-02-500-802-A/200
Page 211
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
(c) Lower the cradle to the ground.

Make sure that the CRADLE DOWN
indication light on the tug vehicle is on.
(d) Select the correct aircraft wheel size in the tug vehicle.
(e) Open the gate of the tug.
NOTE:
NOTE:
An indication light comes on in the tug when

the gate is fully open.
A warning light also comes on in the tug
vehicle when the gate is open and the cradle
fully lowered.
(f) Remove the nose-landing-gear wheel chocks from the

aircraft.
NOTE:
Make sure that the main wheels of the

aircraft are chocked before you remove the
chocks from the nose wheels.
(8) To capture the aircraft do as follows (Refer to Figure 205,

Sheet 2):
NOTE:
(a)
A person has to be in a position to monitor the

connection of tractor to the aircraft. This person
must have authority to stop the tractor when
he/she thinks that damage can occur to the
aircraft.
Drive the tug vehicle forward (1) to engage and dock

with the nose wheel of the aircraft.
NOTE:
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
Be careful with ground objects when you

move the tug with the cradle lowered.
An indication light comes on in the tug
vehicle when the nose wheel is fully
engaged.
The indication light only comes on in the
tug vehicle when the nose wheel and
cradle are correctly positioned.
09-10-02-500-802-A/200
Page 212
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
Severe misalignment can prevent the

correct cradle engagement to the tire
assembly.
Do not apply the parking brake to the tug
vehicle.
(b) Close the gate (2) and (3) of the tug vehicle. Refer
NOTE: Apply the footbrake to stop the vehicle
until the gate closes approximately 45
(half way). Then release the footbrake to
let the tug vehicle move. This will adjust a
possible misalignment.
An indication light comes on in the tug
vehicle when the gate is closed and the
cradle locking bars touch the aircraft nose
wheels.
Look at the screen of the closed circuit
television when you close and lock the
gate assembly.
(c) Apply the handbrake when the gate and cradle
locking bars are closed.
(d) Make sure that you remove all equipment from the
aircraft and release the aircraft brakes.
(e) Lift the cradle (4). Refer to Figure 205, Sheet 2.
NOTE: An indication light comes on in the tug
vehicle when the cradle is fully lifted.
(f) Remove the chocks from the main wheels.
(9) To push the aircraft back, do as follows:
WARNING:
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
DO NOT APPLY THE AIRCRAFT BRAKES

WHEN AIRCRAFT IS BEING TOWED WITH
A TOWBARLESS TOW VEHICLE. IF
BRAKES ARE APPLIED, DAMAGE WILL
OCCUR TO THE NOSE LANDING GEAR,
TOWING VEHICLE AND MAINTENANCE
PERSONNEL CAN BE INJURED.
09-10-02-500-802-A/200
Page 213
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
CAUTION:
DURING THE TOWING OPERATION, DO

NOT STEER THE NOSE LANDING GEAR
MORE THAN 140 DEGREES. IF YOU DO,
THE TOWBARLESS VEHICLE CABIN CAN
HIT THE FUSELAGE AND CAUSE DAMAGE
TO THE AIRCRAFT.
CAUTION:

GEAR MORE THAN THE MAXIMUM ANGLE
THE STEERING ANGLE IS MORE THAN +/170
DEGREES,
DAMAGE
TO
THE
(a)
Set the cabin to the normal position. Release the

brakes of the tug vehicle and start to tow.
NOTE:
(b)
You must apply the handbrake when the

tractor is in neutral gear or when it stops.
Do the steps that follow:

NOTE:
1.
2.
3.
If the aircraft emergency/parking brake is applied

(independently of the vehicle speed) during the
towing procedure, refer to AMM TASK 05-50-25200-801-A/600.
During the towing procedure, carefully monitor the
zero reference on the NLG. Refer to Figure 215.
When the zero reference is aligned with the red
stripe painted on the NLG rear, it indicates that
the steering angle is near the maximum permitted
angle, that is (+/-) 170 degrees. Refer to Figure
215.
NOTE:
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
Braking of aircraft during the pushback

Avoid the towing operation when the zero

reference is aligned with the edge of the
red stripe on the NLG (+/-) 140 degrees.
09-10-02-500-802-A/200
Page 214
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
You can use the mooring point as a

angle is near the maximum permitted.
4.
5.
Slowly tow the aircraft in a straight line before you

try to turn.
Complete the aircraft pushback in a straight line
NOTE:
6.
The objective of this step is to:

possible to the zero degree position
and in the range of 76 degrees
(maximum
angle
for
steering
engagement).
Prevent abrupt motion when the
steering is engaged (undesirable for
passengers and crew).
Prevent unnecessary loads on the
NLG axle.
Prevent unnecessary wear of the
NLG tires.
Make sure that the steering range is not more

than 170 degrees. Refer to Figure 213. If this
sensor, refer to Figure 214.
NOTE: Control the towing speed only with the
tug vehicle speed-indicator.
Do not stop the aircraft in a turn if it is not
necessary.
When you move the aircraft, always
increase the speed and brake gradually.
During slippery conditions, decrease
speed and anticipate slower braking
reaction.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
09-10-02-500-802-A/200
Page 215
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
NOTE: Braking of aircraft during the pushback

7.
8.
If the aircraft brakes are applied (independently of

the vehicle speed) during the towing procedure,
do a check of the NLG and its adjacent structure
for possible damage. Refer to AMM TASK 05-5025-200-801-A/600.
When the aircraft is in the correct position, stop

(a) Apply the handbrake of the tug vehicle.
(b) Lower the cradle.
NOTE: An indication light comes on, in the tug vehicle,
when the cradle is fully lowered.
(c) Apply the brakes to the aircraft.
(d) Release the handbrake of the tug vehicle and open the
gate.
NOTE: An indication light comes on when the gate is
fully open. A different warning light comes on
when the gate is open and the cradle fully
lowered.
(e) Slowly back the tug vehicle away in a straight line from
the aircraft nose wheel until the cradle is pulled from
under the nose wheel tire.
(f) When the tug vehicle is far from the aircraft, close the
gate.
NOTE: An indication light comes on in the tug vehicle
when the cradle locking bars are closed.
(g) Lift the cradle.
NOTE: An indication light comes on in the tug vehicle
when the cradle is fully lifted.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
09-10-02-500-802-A/200
Page 216
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
(h) If the nose wheels are not in the zero-degree position,

align them with the zero-degree reference on the NLG.
SUBTASK 020-003-A
vehicle GSE 423, which is a fork-shaped tractor with three
wheels. Refer to Figure 206.
NOTE: Only one person is necessary to operate the towing
vehicle.
For a safer towing operation, only qualified
personnel must operate the towing vehicle.
(12) The towing vehicle must be in good condition for the
pushback operation.
NOTE: Obey the manufacturers instructions when you do
maintenance work on the towing vehicle.
Make sure that the fixed rollers (1) and the
adjustable friction rollers (2) are in good condition.
Make sure that the swivel castor (front wheel) (3) of
the towing vehicle moves freely. Refer to
Figure 206.
(13) You operate the towing vehicle with a radio-controlled
handset from the ground.
NOTE: Before you operate the towing vehicle, make sure
that the radio-controlled handset is the correct one
for the towing vehicle model.
The person on the ground gives instructions to the
person in the cockpit to help him control the
aircraft.
If the pilot orders an emergency evacuation and the
towing vehicle is still connected to the aircraft, the
aircraft dispatcher must stop the vehicle.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
09-10-02-500-802-A/200
Page 217
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
When the pilot orders an emergency evacuation, if

applicable,
the
aircraft dispatcher
should
disconnect the towbarless towing vehicle from the
aircraft.
The aircraft dispatcher must use standard hand
signals to tell the pilot to apply the aircraft parking
brake, if the interphone does not operate.
If the pilot decides to stop the pushback operation,
he must give the aircraft dispatcher an order to
stop the aircraft.
The aircraft dispatcher must stop the aircraft as
soon as possible and tell the pilot to use the
parking brake.
(14) Before you attach the vehicle towbarless towing vehicle to
the left main landing gear, make sure that:
NOTE: This towbarless towing vehicle is usually attached to
the left main landing gear. This is to prevent
interference with other ramp activities.
(a) The safety pins are removed from the nose and main
landing gear.
(b) The left flaps are set in the 0, 1 or 2 position.
NOTE: It is recommended that you set the flap to the
0-degree position.
(c)
The steering system is ENGAGED.

NOTE: The steering system must be ENGAGED during
the whole procedure.
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
The No. 1 and No. 2 hydraulic systems are ON.

The inspection windows are closed.
The nacelles are closed.
The tires of the nose and main landing gears are
correctly inflated.
NOTE: The engine at the side GSE 423 is connected
must not be started before GSE 423 is
removed.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
09-10-02-500-802-A/200
Page 218
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
(15) To go near the aircraft and attach the towbarless vehicle,

do as follows:
(a) Move the towing vehicle from the rear of the aircraft, at
a slow speed, in the direction of the aircraft main wheel.
A slow speed is approximately 4 to 5 km/h
(2.5 to 3 mph).
(b) When the towing vehicle is near the main landing gear,
adjust the correct opening for the fixed rollers. Refer to
Figure 207.
(c) Before you attach the towing vehicle to the main
landing gear, align the fixed rollers of the towing vehicle
with the main landing gear tires, refer to Figure 209. It is
important to correctly align the main landing gear tires
with the fixed rollers, refer to Figure 209.
(d) Move the towing vehicle toward the main landing as
shown in the sequence of Figure 209:
Attach the towing vehicle to the main landing gear
from the rear of the aircraft Figure 209. Refer to
Figure 209.
Move the towing vehicle towards the main landing
gear with the opening of the fixed rollers already
adjusted to the aircraft model Figure 209.
When the fixed roller is correctly aligned with the main
landing gear tires, close the adjustable friction roller
Figure 209. It is important to correctly align the main
landing gear tires with the fixed rollers. Refer to
Figure 208.
When the aircraft tires are correctly attached to the
towing vehicle, it is ready to move the aircraft
Figure 209.
NOTE: Braking of aircraft during the pushback
operation is not permitted unless in emergency
situations.
(16) Attach the headset GSE 011 to the ramp panel of the
aircraft.
(17) Go to a position in front of the aircraft, within the limits
(distances and angles) shown in Figure 210.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
09-10-02-500-802-A/200
Page 219
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
(18) Make sure that the brakes (pedals and parking) are not
applied.
(19) Make sure that the status message STEER OFF is not
shown in the EICAS.
NOTE: Make sure that the red light in the towing indicationlight box (3). is ON. Refer to Figure 201.
(20) The terminology that follows is the suggestion of the
manufacturer of the towbarless towing vehicle GSE 423.
Use this terminology for standard communication. Refer to
Figure 211 for an example.
Cockpit: Ready for pushback

Ground: Brakes Off
Ground: Brakes Off
Ground: Central Left,
Ground: Left (Right, Right)
Ground: Back off Steady Towing complete Set Parking
Brakes
Cockpit: Brakes set
Ground: Power Push removed.
Left, left the person in the cockpit applies the left tiller.
Continues to apply more left tiller until the aircraft
dispatcher says:
Steady - which means hold the tiller in the current
position (Right, right means to move the tiller to the right
until the aircraft dispatcher says Steady).
Back off means to reduce the tiller input.
Central means to set the tiller to a central position.
Stop, stop, stop means to stop the aircraft.
(21) Move the aircraft as shown in Figure 212, Sheet 1 and

(a) Move the aircraft in the correct direction require (1) and
(2).
NOTE: You can use the terminology given in this
manual or you can choose a different
terminology.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
09-10-02-500-802-A/200
Page 220
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
Braking of aircraft during towbarless towing

operation with GSE 423 is not permitted
unless in emergency conditions. The towing
vehicle has a fail-safe system. There is no risk
of damage to the aircraft or to the towing
vehicle.
If you must do a turn during the airplane
pushback operation, you must do this with an
aircraft Nose Wheel Steering limit of +/- 45
for 90 turns and +/- 30 for S turns.
(b) After the pushback operation is complete, the person in
the cockpit to will set the parking brakes (3).
(c) After the person in the cockpit tells you that the brakes
are set, open the rollers of the towing vehicle and
command it to move away from the aircraft (4).
(22) Disconnect headset GSE 011 and go to the front of the
aircraft (5) and (6). Refer to Figure 212, Sheet 1.
(a) Stay in a place where the person in the cockpit can see.
Wait until the aircraft starts to taxi (7) and (8). Refer to
(23) When the aircraft is away from obstacles, command the
towing vehicle to make it come to you. Then go to the
towing vehicle (9) and (10). Refer to Figure 212, Sheet 2.
(24) When you are near the towing vehicle, command it to stop
(11) and drive it away from the aircraft (12). Refer to
D. Job Close-Up
(1) If you use GSE 423, do the step (4) and (5). For the other
towbarless vehicles certified by Embraer, do from step (2) to
(5).
(2) Set the external steering disengagement switch to the
ENGAGED position. On the EICAS display, make sure that
the STEER OFF status message goes out of view. Refer to
Figure 201.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
09-10-02-500-802-A/200
Page 221
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
(3) Make sure that the towing-indication light box shows the red
light on. Refer to Figure 201.
(4) Put the aircraft back to its initial condition (AMM MPP 32-0000/201).
(5) Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted material from
the work area.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
09-10-02-500-802-A/200
Page 222
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
A
ZONE
711
B
ZONE
125
C
LIGHTBOX
1. STEERING
SWITCH
RED LIGHT
(REF.)
STEERING
AC GPU
GROUND
SERVICE SW
LIGHTBOX
2. SWITCH
IN USE
D
I
S
E
N
G
RAMP
INPH
CKPT
CALL
MIC/PHONE
E
N
G
A
G
E
RAMP PANEL
(REF.)
GREEN LIGHT
(REF.)
Steering Disarming External Switch Component Location

Figure 201
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
09-10-02-500-802-A/200
Page 223
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
A
1. MFD
BRAKES
EMER
ACCU
PSI
600
S
Y
S
2
S
Y
S
1 600
A
Emergency/Parking Brake Accumulator Component Location
Figure 202
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
09-10-02-500-802-A/200
Page 224
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
GROUND PROXIMITY TERRAIN INHIBIT/

EMERGENCY PARKING BRAKE CONTROL PANEL (REF.)
LIGHT
HANDLE
B
Emergency/Parking Brake Component Location
Figure 203
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
09-10-02-500-802-A/200
Page 225
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
C
B
ZONE
711
A
SNAP HOOK
WINCH STRAP
STRUT STRAP
REAR DECK COVER

FRONT DECK COVER
HEADLIGHT
CRADLE
STEER WHEEL
SIDE COMPARTMENTS
COVER
RUNNING/ PARK LIGHT
DRIVE WHEEL
FOR REFERENCE ONLY TUG VEHICLE DETAILS MAY CHANGE ACCORDING

TO CUSTUMERS ORDER.
WINCH STRAP & HOOK

Figure 204 Sheet 1
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
09-10-02-500-802-A/200
Page 226
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
ATTACH STRUT AND

WINCH STRAP TO
AIRCRAFT
LIFT AND TRANSPORT
WINCH AIRCRAFT
ONTO CRADLE

Figure 204 Sheet 2
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
09-10-02-500-802-A/200
Page 227
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK

Figure 205 Sheet 1
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
09-10-02-500-802-A/200
Page 228
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
CLOSE THE GATE
LIFT AND TRANSPORT
AIRCRAFT DOCKED

Figure 205 Sheet 2
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
09-10-02-500-802-A/200
Page 229
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
1. FIXED ROLLER
2. ADJUSTABLE
FRICTION ROLLER
3. SWIVEL CASTOR
(FRONT WHEEL)

Figure 206
09-10-02-500-802-A/200
Page 230
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
190
A
Figure 207
09-10-02-500-802-A/200
Page 231
SEP 15/09
VERIFY THAT THE ROLLERS OF THE POWERPUSH UNIT ARE IN CENTRIC AND
PARALLEL POSITION TO THE MAIN LANDING GEAR WHEELS.
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK

Figure 208
09-10-02-500-802-A/200
Page 232
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK

Figure 209
09-10-02-500-802-A/200
Page 233
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
45
12 m
(39 ft 4 in.)
KEEP WITHIN THE GRAY AREA
PILOTS EYE POSITION

3.91 m
(12 ft 10 in.)
1.80 m
(5 ft 10 in.)
REF. GROUND (BOW)

12 m
(39 ft 4 in.)

Figure 210
09-10-02-500-802-A/200
Page 234
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
PUSHBACK
COMPLETE
POWER PUSH
REMOVED.
STAND BY.
SET PARK
BRAKE
CENTRAL
START AND FINISH EVERY

MANEUVER IN A STRAIGHT LINE.
PARK BRAKE SET
STEADY
LEFT, LEFT
COMMUNICATIONS
COCKPIT
READY FOR PUSHBACK
GROUND
BRAKES OFF
CENTRAL
LEFT, LEFT
RIGHT, RIGHT
BACK OFF
STEADY
PUSHBACK COMPLETE
SET PARK BRAKES
COCKPIT
BRAKES SET
GROUND
POWER PUSH REMOVED
BRAKE OFF.
CENTRAL.
START AND FINISH EVERY MANEUVER IN A STRAIGHT LINE.
READY FOR
PUSHBACK

Figure 211
09-10-02-500-802-A/200
Page 235
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK

Figure 212 Sheet 1
09-10-02-500-802-A/200
Page 236
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
10
11
12

Figure 212 Sheet 2
09-10-02-500-802-A/200
Page 237
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
170
170
Maximum Steering Angle - Maintenance Practice

Figure 213
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
09-10-02-500-802-A/200
Page 238
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
B
170
170
ZONE
711
1. OVERTRAVEL
SENSOR
2. OVERTRAVEL
TARGET
3. TORQUE
LINK PIN
170
B
Overtravel Sensor - Component Location
Figure 214
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
09-10-02-500-802-A/200
Page 239
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
ZONE
711
3. MOORING
POINT
A
1. ZERO
REFERENCE
40
30
20
10
10
150
140
130
120
110
100
2. RED STRIPE
Red Stripe Painted on NLG Rear - Component Location

Figure 215
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
09-10-02-500-802-A/200
Page 240
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
GHSH TASK 09-20-01-500-801-A
1. Aircraft Taxiing - Maintenance Practices
A. General
(1) This task gives the instructions to taxi the aircraft.
(2) During the aircraft taxiing, one or two engines can be on.
Refer to AMM TASK 71-00-01-910-801-B/200.
B. Job Set-Up
WARNING:


(GHSH TASK 20-00-00-910-801-A/200).
(2) Do the wing fuel transfer AMM TASK 28-20-00-910-801A/200, if necessary.
NOTE:
CAUTION:
Make sure that the fuel asymmetry is in the

maximum 363 kg (800 lb).
THE AREAS FOR TAXIING MUST BE FREE OF
OBSTACLES AND HAVE THE NECESSARY
SPACE FOR THE MANEUVERS.
(3) See if the area is clear for taxiing.

WARNING:
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
MAKE SURE THAT THE DOWNLOCK PINS

ARE INSTALLED IN EACH LANDING GEAR.
WITHOUT THE DOWNLOCK PINS, THE
LANDING GEAR CAN RETRACT AND CAUSE
INJURIES TO PERSONS AND/OR DAMAGE
TO THE EQUIPMENT.
09-20-01-500-801-A/200
Page 201
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
(4) Make sure that the landing-gear downlock safety-pins are
correctly installed on the main and nose landing gears
(GHSH TASK 32-00-05-400-801-A/400).
CAUTION:
DO NOT USE THE BRAKES CONTINUOUSLY

TO KEEP THE NECESSARY TAXI SPEED. IF
YOU DO NOT GIVE THE BRAKES SUFFICIENT
TIME TO COOL, THEY CAN BECOME TOO
HOT. THIS CAN CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE
BRAKES OR THE MELTING OF A WHEELTHERMAL-FUSE PLUG AND CONSEQUENT
DECREASE IN THE TIRE INFLATION
PRESSURE.
(5) Make sure that brakes are in serviceable conditions (AMM

TASK 32-41-00-710-801-A/500 and AMM TASK 32-49-11210-801-A/600).
CAUTION:
DO NOT TAXI THE AIRCRAFT WITH THE

SHOCK STRUTS OF THE MAIN LANDING
GEAR FULLY COMPRESSED. DAMAGE TO
THE SHOCK STRUTS CAN OCCUR.
(6) Make sure that the main landing gear shock strut have
sufficient extension (AMM TASK 12-12-07-600-802-B/300).
(7) Make sure that the NLG steering system in serviceable
conditions (AMM TASK 32-52-00-720-801-A/500 and AMM
TASK 32-53-07-710-801-A/500).
CAUTION:
DO NOT OPERATE THE LANDING LIGHTS

DURING THE TAXIING PROCEDURE.
(8) If necessary, on the external lights panel (1), set the taxiing
light switches (2) to ON. Refer to Figure 201.
C. Taxing - Maintenance Practices
(1) Always do turns with the largest radius the available space
lets you use.
(2) Taxi the aircraft at a speed applicable to ramp operations.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
09-20-01-500-801-A/200
Page 202
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
D. Job Close-Up
(1) Shut down the engine(s). Refer to AMM TASK 71-00-01910-806-A/200.
(2) Install the GSE 070.
(3) Set the emergency/parking brake.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
09-20-01-500-801-A/200
Page 203
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
C
B
ZONES
5151
6151
ZONE
711
EXTERNAL LIGHTS
NAV
STROBE
RED BCN
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
LOGO
TAXI
NOSE
ON
OFF
INSP
SIDE
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
LANDING
LEFT
2. TAXI LIGHTS
SWITCHES
NOSE
RIGHT
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
NOSELANDINGGEAR
TAXILIGHT
1. EXTERNAL
LIGHTS PANEL
WINGROOT
TAXILIGHT
C
Taxi Lights Switches Location
Figure 201
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
09-20-01-500-801-A/200
Page 204
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
R5
R6
R3
R6.44 m
21ft 2 in
76
70
65
60
55
50
45
40
35
R14.07m
46ft 2 in
R4
R2
R1
NOTE:
DATA PRESENTED IS BASED ON THEORETICAL CALCULATIONS.
ACTUAL OPERATING DATA MAY BE GREATER THAN SHOWN SINCE
TIRE SLIPPAGE IS NOT CONSIDERED IN THESE CALCULATIONS.
35
40
45
50
55
60
65
70
76
NOSE
NOSE GEAR
R1
R2
87 ft
24.16 m 79 ft 3 in
79 ft 5 in 21.58 m 70 ft 10 in
73 ft 10 in 19.64 m 64 ft 5 in
69 ft 7 in 18.14 m 59 ft 6 in
66 ft 5 in 16.98 m 55 ft 9 in
63 ft 11 in 16.07 m 52 ft 9 in
63 ft
15.36 m 50 ft 5 in
60 ft 8 in 14.82 m 48 ft 7 in
59 ft 5 in 14.36 m 47 ft 1 in
26.53 m
24.21 m
22.50 m
21.22 m
20.24 m
19.49 m
18.91 m
18.48 m
18.12 m
OUTBOARD GEAR INBOARD GEAR

R3
R4
76 ft 5 in 16.08 m 52 ft 9 in
65 ft 9 in 12.82 m 42 ft 1 in
57 ft
10.18 m 35 ft 5 in
49 ft 9 in
7.96 m 26 ft 1 in
43 ft 6 in
6.05 m 19 ft 10 in
37 ft 11 in 4.35 m 14 ft 3 in
32 ft 11 in 2.82 m 9 ft 3 in
1.41 m 4 ft 8 in
28 ft 3 in
7 in
0.17 m
23 ft 1 in
23.28 m
20.03 m
17.38 m
15.17 m
13.25 m
11.56 m
10.03 m
8.62 m
7.04 m
RIGHT WINGLET
R5
112 ft 8 in
102 ft 2 in
93 ft 7 in
86 ft 5 in
80 ft 3 in
74 ft 9 in
69 ft 10 in
34.35 m
31.13 m
28.52 m
26.33 m
24.45 m
22.79 m
21.30 m
19.93 m
18.39 m
65 ft 5 in
60 ft 4 in
RIGHT TAILTIP
R6
31.50 m
28.91 m
26.90 m
25.32 m
24.02 m
22.95 m
22.05 m
21.29 m
20.51 m
103 ft 4 in
94 ft 10 in
88 ft 3 in
83 ft 1 in
78 ft 10 in
75 ft 4 in
72 ft 4 in
69 ft 10 in
67 ft 3 in
STEERING
STEEL
Turning Radii No slip Angle Maintenance Practices

Figure 202
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
09-20-01-500-801-A/200
Page 205
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
R5
R6
21.40 m
70ft 3 in
(RUNWAY MINIMUM WIDTH)
R6.44 m
21 ft 1 in
76
R1
R14. 07 m
46 ft 2 in
R3
R14.36 m
47 ft 1 in
NOTE:
ACTUAL OPERATING DATA MAY BE GREATER THAN VALUES SHOWN
SINCE TIRE SLIPPAGE IS NOT CONSIDERED IN THESE CALCULATIONS.
76
NOSE
R1
NOSE GEAR
R2
18.12 m 59 ft 5 in 14.36 m 47 ft 1 in
OUTBOARD GEAR
R3
7.04 m
23 ft 1 in
INBOARD GEAR
R4
0.17 m
7 in
RIGHT WINGLET
R5
18.39 m 60 ft 4 in
RIGHT TAILTIP
R6
20.51 m 67 ft 3 in
THEORETICAL CENTER OF TURN FOR MINIMUN RADIUS.

SHOWS CONTINUOUS TURNING WITH ENGINE THRUST AS REQUIRED.
NO DIFFERENTIAL BRAKING.
STEERING
STEEL
Minimum Turning Radii Maintenance Practices

Figure 203
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
09-20-01-500-801-A/200
Page 206
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
GHSH TASK 10-10-01-500-801-A
1. Aircraft Normal Parking - Maintenance Practices
A. General
(1) This task gives the procedure for aircraft normal parking.
(2) Normal parking includes overnight parking.
(3) Make sure that there is a minimum distance between the
parked aircraft to permit their movement.
B. Job Set-Up
WARNING:


(GHSH TASK 20-00-00-910-801-A/200).
(2) Make sure that the landing-gear control lever is in the down
position. Release the emergency/parking brake.
WARNING: MAKE SURE THAT THE DOWNLOCK PINS ARE
INSTALLED IN EACH LANDING GEAR. WITHOUT
THE DOWNLOCK PINS, THE LANDING GEAR
CAN RETRACT AND CAUSE INJURIES TO
PERSONS
AND/OR
DAMAGE
TO
THE
EQUIPMENT.
(3) Make sure that the landing gear downlock safety pins are
(GHSH TASK 32-00-05-400-801-A/400).
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
10-10-01-500-801-A/200
Page 201
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
WARNING: BE SURE TO CORRECTLY INSTALL THE RAT
STOW LOCK PIN. IF THE RAT STOW LOCK PIN
IS NOT CORRECTLY INSTALLED, AND THE RAT
ACCIDENTALLY RECEIVES AN AUTOMATIC OR
MANUAL DEPLOY COMMAND, THE RAT WILL
EXTEND AND POSSIBLY CAUSE INJURY TO
PERSONS AND DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT.
(4) Make sure that the RAT stow lock pin GSE 189 is correct
installed (AMM TASK 24-23-08-480-801-A/400).
(5) Tow (GHSH TASK 09-10-01-500-801-A/200) or taxi (GHSH
TASK 09-20-01-500-801-A/200) the aircraft into the position
specified for parking.
NOTE:
Before you park the aircraft, move it in a straight

line for approximately three meters. This will
remove all torsional stresses applied to the
landing gear components and tires during a turn.
(6) Set the emergency/parking brake to the PARKING position.

NOTE: To prevent freezing of the brakes, do not apply the
parking brakes in cold-weather conditions.
(7) Retract the flaps if they are extended.
C. Normal Parking - Maintenance Practices
(1) Put the GSE 070 against the nose and main landing gear
wheels.
(2) Moor the aircraft (refer to GHSH TASK 10-20-01-500-801A/200) if the wind speed is more than specified in Figure
204.
NOTE:
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
The wind speeds in the figures cover all critical

wind direction.
10-10-01-500-801-A/200
Page 202
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
(3) Protection of engine air inlet:
(a) Prepare the correct solution for the type of soil. Then
clean the engine air inlet surface (CPM PART 1 TASK
51-27-01-910-001-A).
NOTE: Do not let solution get into the fan rotor
assembly.
Carefully dry the surface with a lint-free wiper
cloth to prevent formation of corrosion.
(b) Clean the engine air inlet surface with a lint-free wiper
cloth.
NOTE:
Carefully clean the surface with a lint-free

wiper cloth to prevent formation of corrosion.
(c) Polish the engine air inlet with X3500-18. Refer to the
manufacturers manual for more recommendation.
NOTE: Do not polish the engine air inlet outside the
hangar. This is to prevent damage caused by
sunlight and high temperatures.
If it is necessary to operate the engine after
you apply X3500-18, you must remove
X3500-18 before you operate the engine
(4) Install these covers on the aircraft:
GSE 197
GSE 083
GSE 020 (Use GSE 022 to install this cover)
GSE 023
GSE 024
GSE 025
GSE 212
GSE 277
GSE 303
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
10-10-01-500-801-A/200
Page 203
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
GSE 248
GSE 249
GSE 275
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
10-10-01-500-801-A/200
Page 204
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
B
ZONE
651
ZONE
551
ZONES
123/124
221/222
D
ZONE
711
ZONES
123/124
125/126
131/132
ZONES
731
741
INTEGRATED PITOT / STATIC /

AOA SENSOR COVER (GSE 020)
F
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
COVER
INSTALLATION / REMOVAL
(GSE 022)
E
1
USED TO REMOVE AND INSTALL THE SMART PROBE COVER.
Aircraft Normal Parking Maintenance Practices

Figure 201 Sheet 1
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
10-10-01-500-801-A/200
Page 205
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
ICE DETECTOR
COVER
(GSE 024)
TAT SENSOR
COVER
(GSE 025)
G
F
COVER WINGLET
(GSE 197)
B
2
USED TO PROTECT THE FLAP TRAILING EDGE.

Figure 201 Sheet 2
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
10-10-01-500-801-A/200
Page 206
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
H
H
H
H
TDR
ANTENNA
TCAS OMNIDIRECTIONAL
ANTENNA
DME
ANTENNA
COVERDME,
TCAS AND TRANSPONDER
ANTENNAS
(GSE 023)
WHEEL PROTECTION COVER

(GSE 083)
D
3
USED TO PROTECT THE NOSE WHEEL AND MAIN WHEEL AND BRAKE ASSEMBLIES WHEN
THE AIRCRAFT IS BEING WASHED OR HYDRAULIC SYSTEMS ARE BEING SERVICED.
DME
ANTENNA
TDR
ANTENNA

Figure 201 Sheet 3
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
10-10-01-500-801-A/200
Page 207
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
ZONES
416
426
ZONES
500
600
FAN COWL
VENTILATION COVER
(GSE 249)
THRUST REVERSER
EXHAUST COVER
(GSE 248)
EM170GHSH100008B.DGN
C
Aircraft Normal Parking Engine/Fuel Naca Covers
Figure 202 Sheet 1
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
10-10-01-500-801-A/200
Page 208
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
COVER FUEL NACA

(GSE 275)
F
Figure 202 Sheet 2
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
10-10-01-500-801-A/200
Page 209
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
ZONE
320
E
D
A
ZONES
310
351
APU COVER
SET COVER 01
(GSE 212)
GRILLE
COVER
(GSE 277)
F
B
Aircraft Normal Parking APU/Vertical STAB Naca Covers

Figure 203 Sheet 1
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
10-10-01-500-801-A/200
Page 210
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
APU COVER
SET COVER 02
(GSE 212)
KITAPU COVER
COVER 03
(GSE 212)
COVERVERT STAB
LEADING EDGE NACA
(GSE 303)
E
Figure 203 Sheet 2
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
10-10-01-500-801-A/200
Page 211
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
WIND VELOCITY FOR MOORING

AIRCRAFT PARKED ON DRY CONCRETE SURFACE
EMBRAER 190 ECJ
70
69
68
67
WEIGHT kgf
66
65
> 50000
64
48000
63
62
46000
61
44000
60
42000
59
40000
58
57
38000
WIND VELOCITY kt
56
36000
55
54
34000
53
52
32000
51
30000
50
49
28000
48
47
26000
46
24000
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
22000
37
36
35
0
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
CG POSITION % MAC
38
Aircraft Normal Parking Wind Velocity for Mooring

Figure 204 Sheet 1
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
10-10-01-500-801-A/200
Page 212
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
EMBRAER 190 ECJ

AIRCRAFT PARKED ON WET CONCRETE SURFACE
70
69
68
67
66
WEIGHT kgf
65
51960
64
63
50000
62
61
48000
60
59
46000
58
44000
57
WIND VELOCITY kt
56
42000
55
40000
54
38000
53
52
36000
51
34000
50
49
32000
48
30000
47
46
28000
45
26000
44
43
24000
42
41
40
38
37
22000
36
35
0
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
CG POSITION % MAC
39

Figure 204 Sheet 2
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
10-10-01-500-801-A/200
Page 213
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
EMBRAER 190 ECJ

AIRCRAFT PARKED ON SNOW SURFACE
65
64
63
62
61
WEIGHT kgf
60
59
58
51960
57
50000
56
55
48000
54
53
46000
52
44000
WIND VELOCITY kt
51
42000
50
49
40000
48
38000
47
36000
46
34000
45
32000
44
43
30000
42
41
28000
40
26000
39
24000
38
37
36
35
34
33
31
30
0
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
CG POSITION % MAC
22000
32

Figure 204 Sheet 3
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
10-10-01-500-801-A/200
Page 214
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
EMBRAER 190 ECJ

AIRCRAFT PARKED ON ICY SURFACE
45
44
43
42
WEIGHT kgf
41
51960
40
50000
39
48000
38
46000
37
44000
WIND VELOCITY kt
36
42000
35
40000
34
38000
33
36000
32
34000
31
32000
30
30000
29
28000
28
26000
27
24000
26
25
22000
23
22
0
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
CG POSITION % MAC
24

Figure 204 Sheet 4
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
10-10-01-500-801-A/200
Page 215/216
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
GHSH TASK 10-10-01-500-802-A
1. Aircraft Normal Parking in Cold Weather Condition Maintenance Practices
A. General
(1) This task gives the procedure to park the aircraft in cold
weather condition.
(2) A cold weather condition is when the aircraft is parked in an
ambient temperature lower than 0 C (32 F).
B. Job Set-Up
WARNING:


(GHSH TASK 20-00-00-910-801-A/200).
(2) Obey the procedures given in GHSH TASK 10-10-01-500801-A/200.
C. Aircraft Normal Parking in Cold Weather Condition Maintenance Practices
(1) Drain the potable water system (AMM MPP 12-14-01/301).
(2) Drain the waste tank (AMM TASK 12-14-05-600-801A/300).
(3) Make sure that all galley liquids are drained.
(4) Main Batteries parking procedure:
NOTE: If the aircraft is heated (external pneumatic heat
source) during the parking, there are no limitations
for time and temperature.
(a) Do a check of the Chart Allowed Ambient
Temperature versus Exposure Time given in
Figure 201. If the expected exposure time versus
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
10-10-01-500-802-A/200
Page 201
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
exposure temperature during parking is in the gray
area, remove the main batteries (AMM TASK 2436-01-000-801-A/400).
NOTE: The total time that starts to be counted
when the aircraft is powered off, is not
cumulative.
The total time the batteries can stay in the
aircraft must obey the time limit given for
the lowest temperature to which the
aircraft is exposed.
The values specified in this procedure are
only applicable if the aircraft doors and
accesses stay closed during the parking.
After removal, put the battery in a warm
location where the temperature is more
than 10 C (50 F).
(5) If the parking area has ice or snow, do the procedure that
follows:
(a) Remove snow, ice, and frost from the area.
(b) Put a mat or a layer of coarse sand or other
applicable material to prevent the freezing of the
tires to the ground.
(c) Make sure that the aircraft is headed into the wind.
(6) Close all doors and windows.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
10-10-01-500-802-A/200
Page 202
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
ALLOWED AMBIENT TEMPERATURE

VERSUS
EXPOSURE TIME
EXPOSURE TIME PARKING (HOURS)
16 OR
MORE
12
MAIN BATTERIES
PARKING PROCEDURE
8
6
4
NO ACTION
0
30
25
20
15
10
NOTES:
THE TOTAL TIME, THAT STARTS TO BE COUNTED WHEN THE AIRCRAFT IS POWERED OFF,
IS NOT ACCUMULATIVE.
THE TOTAL TIME THE BATTERIES CAN STAY IN THE AIRCRAFT MUST RESPECT THE TIME LIMIT GIVEN
FOR THE LOWEST TEMPERATURE TO WHICH THE AIRCRAFT IS EXPOSED.
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE (C)
Allowed Ambient Temperature versus Exposure Time

Figure 201
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
10-10-01-500-802-A/200
Page 203/204
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
GHSH TASK 10-20-01-500-801-A
1. Aircraft Mooring- Maintenance Practices
A. General
(1) This section gives the procedure to moor the aircraft.
(2) There is one tie-down ring installed on each primary brace
strut of the main landing gear.
(3) You must use the procedure to moor the aircraft when the
weather conditions are bad or unknown.
B. Job Set-Up
WARNING:


(GHSH TASK 20-00-00-910-801-A/200).
(2) Tow the aircraft to the parking area where there are tiedown anchors (GHSH TASK 09-10-01-500-801-A/200).
(3) Do the normal parking procedures (GHSH TASK 10-10-01500-801-A/200).
C. Mooring - Maintenance Practices
(1) Hold the aircraft in the parking area with nylon ropes.
(2) Attach the rope to the mooring hoisting point and attach the
anchor with a bowline knot.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
10-20-01-500-801-A/200
Page 201
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
A
ZONE
711
B
ZONES
731
741
2. MOORING POINT
1. MOORING POINT
MOORING
ATTACHMENT POINT
BOWLINE KNOT
Aircraft Mooring Maintenance Practices

Figure 201
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
10-20-01-500-801-A/200
Page 202
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
GHSH TASK 10-30-01-500-801-A
1. Aircraft Return to Service (Normal Parking) - Maintenance
Practices
A. General
(1) This task gives the procedure to do the aircraft return-toservice after normal parking.
B. Job Set-Up
WARNING:


(GHSH TASK 20-00-00-910-801-A/200).
(2) Make sure that the landing-gear control lever is in the down
position.
WARNING:
MAKE SURE THAT THE DOWNLOCK PINS ARE

INSTALLED IN EACH LANDING GEAR.
INJURIES TO PERSONS AND/OR DAMAGE TO
THE EQUIPMENT.
(3) Make sure that the landing gear downlock safety pins are
(GHSH TASK 32-00-05-400-801-A/400).
C. Aircraft Return-to-Service - Maintenance Practice
(1) General Procedures:
(a) Remove the GSE 070 against the nose and main
landing gear wheels.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
10-30-01-500-801-A/200
Page 201
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
(b) Remove these covers on the aircraft:
GSE 197
GSE 083
GSE 020 (Use GSE 022 to remove this cover)
GSE 023
GSE 024
GSE 025
GSE 212
GSE 277
GSE 303
GSE 248
GSE 249
GSE 275
(c) Release the emergency/parking brake.
(d) Tow (GHSH TASK 09-10-01-500-801-A/200) or taxi
(GHSH TASK 09-20-01-500-801-A/200) the aircraft
from the position specified for parking.
(2) EFFECTIVITY: ON ACFT WITH EMERGENCY LIGHT
POWER UNIT (ELPU) PN 3400-22
Emergency Lighting System
(a) Return to service procedure - Applicable to aircraft that
stay out-of-operation from 3 to 5 days:
NOTE: If you choose the cockpit EMER LT switch to
do the instructions that follow, you must use
it until the end of the procedure. You must
obey the same instructions for the FAP
Emergency ON/ARMED button option. The
temperature around the ELPU must not be
greater than +35C (95F).
1. Connect the external AC power supply to the
aircraft (GHSH TASK 24-42-02-860-801-A/200).
2. On the cockpit overhead panel, on the
PASSENGER SIGNS control panel or on the flight
attendant panel, set the cockpit EMER LT switch
to ON or the FAP Emergency ON/ARMED button
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
10-30-01-500-801-A/200
Page 202
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
to ON position. Refer to Figure 204 and
Figure 205.
3. After at least 70 seconds, set the cockpit EMER
LT switch to ARM or the FAP Emergency
ON/ARMED button to ARMED.
4. After approximately 10 minutes, set cockpit EMER
LT switch to ON or the FAP Emergency
ON/ARMED button to ON.
5. After a minimum of 70 seconds, set the cockpit
EMER LT switch to ARM or FAP Emergency
(b) Return to service procedure - Applicable to aircraft that
stay out-of-operation from 6 to 7 days:
do the instructions that follow, you must use
it until the end of the procedure. You must
obey the same instructions for the FAP
Emergency ON/ARMED button option. The
temperature around the ELPU must not be
greater than +35C (95F).
1. Connect the external AC power supply to the aircraft
(GHSH TASK 24-42-02-860-801-A/200).
attendant panel, set the cockpit EMER LT switch to
ON or the FAP Emergency ON/ARMED button to
ON position. Refer to Figure 204 and Figure 205.
3. After at least 70 seconds, set the cockpit EMER LT
switch to ARM or the FAP Emergency ON/ARMED
button to ARMED.
4. After approximately 10 minutes, do steps 2, 3, and 4
again for a minimum of five times.
(3) EFFECTIVITY: ON ACFT WITH EMERGENCY LIGHT
POWER UNIT (ELPU) PN 3400-22-10
Emergency Lighting System
(a)
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
Return to service procedure - Applicable to aircraft

that stay out-of-operation from 3 to 7 days:
10-30-01-500-801-A/200
Page 203
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
1. Connect the external AC power supply to the
aircraft (GHSH TASK 24-42-02-860-801A/200).
2. On the flight attendant panel, push the TEST
switch. Refer to Figure 205.
3. Do the quick charge of the emergency-lights
power units (AMM TASK 33-50-01-800-801A/200).
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
10-30-01-500-801-A/200
Page 204
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
B
ZONE
651
ZONE
551
ZONES
123/124
221/222
D
ZONE
711
ZONES
123/124
125/126
131/132
ZONES
731
741

F
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
COVER
(GSE 022)
E
1
Aircraft Normal Parking - Maintenance Practices

Figure 201 Sheet 1
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
10-30-01-500-801-A/200
Page 205
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
ICE DETECTOR
COVER
(GSE 024)
TAT SENSOR
COVER
(GSE 025)
G
F
COVER WINGLET
(GSE 197)
B
2

Figure 201 Sheet 2
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
10-30-01-500-801-A/200
Page 206
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
H
H
H
H
TDR
ANTENNA
ANTENNA
DME
ANTENNA
COVERDME,
ANTENNAS
(GSE 023)

(GSE 083)
D
3
DME
ANTENNA
TDR
ANTENNA

Figure 201 Sheet 3
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
10-30-01-500-801-A/200
Page 207
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
ZONES
416
426
ZONES
500
600
FAN COWL
VENTILATION COVER
(GSE 249)
THRUST REVERSER
EXHAUST COVER
(GSE 248)
C
Figure 202 Sheet 1
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
10-30-01-500-801-A/200
Page 208
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
COVER FUEL NACA

(GSE 275)
F
Figure 202 Sheet 2
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
10-30-01-500-801-A/200
Page 209
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
ZONE
320
E
D
A
ZONES
310
351
APU COVER
SET COVER 01
(GSE 212)
GRILLE
COVER
(GSE 277)
F
B

Figure 203 Sheet 1
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
10-30-01-500-801-A/200
Page 210
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
APU COVER
SET COVER 02
(GSE 212)
KITAPU COVER
COVER 03
(GSE 212)
COVERVERT STAB
LEADING EDGE NACA
(GSE 303)
E
Figure 203 Sheet 2
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
10-30-01-500-801-A/200
Page 211
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
2. PASSENGER
SIGNS PANEL
PASSENGER SIGNS
EMER LT
ARMED
1. EMERGENCY
LIGHT SWITCH
ATTND CALL
ON
STERILE
NO SMKG
FSTN BELTS
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
PASSENGER SIGNS Control Panel - Location

Figure 204
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
10-30-01-500-801-A/200
Page 212
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
A
ZONE
225
ZONE
251
A
1
MONUMENT ( REF.)
2. EMERGENCY
LIGHT SWITCH
EMERGENCY LIGHT
ON/
ARMED
TEST
1. FLIGHT
ATTENDANT
PANEL
B
TYPICAL
1
A MONUMENT CAN BE A LAVATORY, WARDROBE, OR WINDSCREEN.
Flight Attendant Panel Location

Figure 205
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
10-30-01-500-801-A/200
Page 213/214
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
GHSH TASK 10-30-01-500-802-A
1. Aircraft Return to Service (Normal Parking in Cold Weather
Condition) - Maintenance Practices
A. General
(1) This task gives the procedure to do the aircraft return-toservice after a cold weather condition.
B. Job Set-Up
WARNING:


(GHSH TASK 20-00-00-910-801-A/200).
(2) Remove ice, frost, slush, or snow from the aircraft surfaces
(AMM TASK 12-31-01-660-801-A/300).
C. Aircraft Return-to-Service (Normal Parking in Cold Weather
Condition) - Maintenance Practices
(1) Remove these covers on the aircraft:
GSE 197
GSE 083
GSE 020 (Use GSE 022 to remove this cover)
GSE 023
GSE 024
GSE 025
GSE 212
GSE 277
GSE 303
GSE 247
GSE 248
GSE 249
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
10-30-01-500-802-A/200
Page 201
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
GSE 275
(2) Do a check of the cargo doors for ice formation on the vent
flap and external handle. If there is ice formation, use a
heat gun (60 C (140 F)) to remove the ice. Refer to
Figure 201.
(3) Do a check of the APU oil level (GHSH TASK 12-13-05200-801-A/300).
(4) Do a check of the engine oil level (GHSH TASK 12-13-01200-801-A/300).
(5) Do a check of the IDG for oil (GHSH TASK 12-13-09-210801-A/600).
(6) Do a check of the hydraulic fluid level of the applicable
hydraulic system (GHSH TASK 12-12-01-200-801-A/300).
(7) Install the batteries (AMM TASK 24-36-01-400-801A/400), if necessary.
(8) Obey the fuel and lubricating oil temperature limitations
before the APU and engine start:
-40 C (-40 F) for fuel JET A

-45 C (-49 F) for fuel JET A-1
-40 C (-40 F) for oil MOBIL JET OIL II
-54 C (-65 F) for lubricant TURBO OIL 2389
(9) Do a pressure check of the MLG and NLG tire pressure

(GHSH TASK 12-15-01-200-801-A/300 and GHSH TASK
12-15-03-200-801-A/300).
(10)Do a check for ice formation in the forward fuselage
structure as follows:
(a) Remove the short drain valve (1) with Allen Wrench.
NOTE: If necessary, heat the short drain valve (1)
area to defreeze.
(b) Do a check for ice formation into the forward fuselage
structure with a stick.
Result:
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
10-30-01-500-802-A/200
Page 202
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
1. If ice formation is found, do the FIM TASK 38-1100-810-809-A.
(c) Install the short drain valve (1).
(11)Do a check of the oxygen cylinder pressure (GHSH TASK
35-10-00-210-801-A/600).
(12)Start the APU (GHSH TASK 09-10-00-910-801-A/200).
(13)In the cockpit, on the overhead panel, on the HYDRAULIC
control panel, set the SYS 1, 2, 3A, and 3B - ELEC PUMP
switches to ON.
(14)Operate the air conditioning packs (AMM TASK 21-00-00860-805-A/200).
(15)Hydraulic systems warm-up:
(a) Make sure that the nose wheel steering is ENGAGED.
(b) Set the MFD to the hydraulic synoptic page.
(c) Make sure that the oil temperature of the No. 1, No. 2,
and No. 3 hydraulic systems is higher than -10 C (14 F).
(d) After the oil temperature of the No. 1, No. 2, and No. 3
hydraulic systems is higher than -10 C (14 F), do as
follows:
1. Set the PTU switch to ON.
2. On the hydraulic synoptic page, make sure that the
PTU outline is green.
3. After 30 s, set the PTU switch to AUTO.
(16) Cycle the emergency/parking brake at least 3 times.
(17) Cycle the brake pedals at least 5 times.
(18) Cycle all flight controls (aileron, rudder, elevator,
horizontal stabilizer, and flap/slat) and do a check for free
operation.
(19) To prevent a misfire of the red beacon lights after a cold
soak, operate it as follows:
(a) Make sure that the electrical power is connected to
the aircraft (GHSH TASK24-42-02-860-801-A/200).
(b) On the maintenance panel in the cockpit, set the
red beacon switch to the Bright position. Refer to
Figure 206.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
10-30-01-500-802-A/200
Page 203
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
(c) On the External Lights control panel on the
overhead panel, set the RED BCN switch to
the ON position. Refer to Figure 207.
(d) After 15 minutes, on the maintenance
panel in the cockpit, turn the red beacon
switch to the Normal position. Refer to Figure
206.
EFFECTIVITY: ON ACFT WITH EMERGENCY LIGHT POWER UNIT
(ELPU) PN 3400-22
(20) Emergency Lighting System
(a) Return to service procedure - Applicable to aircraft
do the instructions that follow, you must use it until the
end of the procedure. You must obey the same
instructions for the FAP Emergency ON/ARMED
button option. The temperature around the ELPU must
not be greater than +35C (95F).
(GHSH TASK24-42-02-860-801-A/200).
ON or the FAP Emergency ON/ARMED button to ON
position. Refer to Figure 208 and Figure 209.
button to ARMED.
4. After approximately 10 minutes, set cockpit EMER
LT switch to ON or the FAP Emergency ON/ARMED
button to ON.
5. After a minimum of 70 seconds, set the cockpit
EMER LT switch to ARM or FAP Emergency
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
10-30-01-500-802-A/200
Page 204
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
(b) Return to service procedure - Applicable to aircraft
that stay out-of-operation from 6 to7 days:
do the instructions that follow, you must use it until the
end of the procedure. You must obey the same
instructions for the FAP Emergency ON/ARMED
button option. The temperature around the ELPU must
not be greater than +35C (95F).
(GHSH TASK 24-42-02-860-801-A/200).
ON or the FAP Emergency ON/ARMED button to ON
position. Refer to Figure 208 and Figure 209.
button to ARMED.
4. After approximately 10 minutes, do steps 2, 3, and 4
again for a minimum of five times.
EFFECTIVITY: ON ACFT WITH EMERGENCY LIGHT POWER UNIT
(ELPU) PN 3400-22-10
(21) Emergency Lighting System
(a) Return to service procedure - Applicable to aircraft
1. Connect the external AC power supply to
the aircraft (GHSH TASK 24-42-02-860-801A/200).
2. On the flight attendant panel, push the
TEST switch. Refer to Figure 214.
3. Do the quick charge of the emergency-lights
power units (AMM TASK 33-50-01-800-801A/200).
(22) Start the engines (AMM TASK 71-00-01-910-802-A/200).
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
10-30-01-500-802-A/200
Page 205
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
(23) Set the SYS 1, 2 and 3B - ELEC PUMP switches to
AUTO.
(24) Taxi the aircraft from the parking position (AMM TASK 0920-01-500-801-A/200).
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
10-30-01-500-802-A/200
Page 206
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
B
ZONE
651
ZONE
551
ZONES
123/124
221/222
D
ZONE
711
ZONES
123/124
125/126
131/132
ZONES
731
741

F
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
COVER
(GSE 022)
E
1

Figure 201 Sheet 1
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
10-30-01-500-802-A/200
Page 207
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
ICE DETECTOR
COVER
(GSE 024)
TAT SENSOR
COVER
(GSE 025)
G
F
COVER WINGLET
(GSE 197)
B
2

Figure 201 Sheet 2
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
10-30-01-500-802-A/200
Page 208
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
H
H
H
H
TDR
ANTENNA
ANTENNA
DME
ANTENNA
COVERDME,
ANTENNAS
(GSE 023)

(GSE 083)
D
3
DME
ANTENNA
TDR
ANTENNA

Figure 201 Sheet 3
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
10-30-01-500-802-A/200
Page 209
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
A
ZONES
822
823
EXTERNAL
HANDLE
VENT FLAP
HEAT GUN
HEAT THE LATCH MECHANISM REGION.
Aircraft Normal Parking Cargo Doors

Figure 202
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
10-30-01-500-802-A/200
Page 210
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
ZONES
416
426
ZONES
500
600
FAN COWL
VENTILATION COVER
(GSE 249)
THRUST REVERSER
EXHAUST COVER
(GSE 248)
C
Figure 203 Sheet 1
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
10-30-01-500-802-A/200
Page 211
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
COVER FUEL NACA

(GSE 275)
F
Figure 203 Sheet 2
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
10-30-01-500-802-A/200
Page 212
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
ZONE
320
E
D
A
ZONES
310
351
APU COVER
SET COVER 01
(GSE 212)
GRILLE
COVER
(GSE 277)
F
B

Figure 204 Sheet 1
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
10-30-01-500-802-A/200
Page 213
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
APU COVER
SET COVER 02
(GSE 212)
KITAPU COVER
COVER 03
(GSE 212)
COVERVERT STAB
LEADING EDGE NACA
(GSE 303)
E
Figure 204 Sheet 2
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
10-30-01-500-802-A/200
Page 214
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
A
ZONES
120
130
A
FUSELAGE SKIN
(REF.)
1. SHORT DRAIN
VALVE
VALVE RETAINER
(REF.)
FUSELAGE SKIN
(REF.)
Forward Fuselage Ice Formation Inspection/Check

Figure 205
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
10-30-01-500-802-A/200
Page 215
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
COPILOT SEAT
(REF.)
RH AFT
CONSOLE (REF.)
B
COCKPIT MAINTENANCE PANEL
A
EXTERNAL
LIGHTS
RED
BCN
NAV
ALL
BRT
NORM
STBY
NORM
B
Maintenance Panel - Maintenance Practices
Figure 206
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
10-30-01-500-802-A/200
Page 216
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
EXTERNAL LIGHTS
STROBE
NAV
RED BCN
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
LOGO
TAXI
NOSE
ON
OFF
2. RED BEACON SWITCH
INSP
SIDE
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
LANDING
NOSE
RIGHT
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
LEFT
1. EXTERNAL
LIGHTS PANEL
Red Beacon Light Switch - Maintenance Practices

Figure 207
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
10-30-01-500-802-A/200
Page 217
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
2. PASSENGER
SIGNS PANEL
PASSENGER SIGNS
EMER LT
ARMED
1. EMERGENCY
LIGHT SWITCH
ATTND CALL
ON
STERILE
NO SMKG
FSTN BELTS
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
PASSENGER SIGNS Control Panel - Location

Figure 208
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
10-30-01-500-802-A/200
Page 218
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
A
ZONE
225
ZONE
251
A
1
MONUMENT ( REF.)
2. EMERGENCY
LIGHT SWITCH
EMERGENCY LIGHT
ON/
ARMED
TEST
1. FLIGHT
ATTENDANT
PANEL
B
TYPICAL
1
A MONUMENT CAN BE A LAVATORY, WARDROBE, OR WINDSCREEN.
Flight Attendant Panel Location

Figure 209
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
10-30-01-500-802-A/200
Page 219/220
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
GHSH TASK 12-11-01-650-801-A
1. Fuel Tank - Pressure Refueling
A. General
(1) This task gives the procedures for the pressure refueling of
the aircraft in the auto and manual modes.
(2) The auto mode allows the complete system (WING and
AUX fuel tanks) to be pressure refueled.
(3) To do the pressure refueling in the auto mode up to
17400kg (38360lb), do the Topic C.
(4) To do the pressure refueling in the auto mode above
17400kg (38360lb), do the Topic D.
(5) The manual mode allows only the wing fuel tanks to be
pressure refueled.
(6) To do the pressure refueling in manual mode, do the Topic
E.
(7) List of fuels approved by Embraer:
Fuel JET A-1

Fuel JET A
Fuel JP-8
Chinese Number 3 Jet Fuel, for ANAC certified aircraft
only
(8) List of additive approved by Embraer:

DIETHYLENE GLYCOL MONOMETHYL ETHER
NOTE:
Obey the fluid manufactures specifications to find

the additive proportions for each fuel.
B. Job Set-Up
WARNING: MAKE SURE THAT THE AIRCRAFT IS IN A
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-11-01-650-801-A/300
Page 301
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
PREVENT INJURY TO PERSONS
AND/OR

(GHSH TASK 20-00-00-910-801-A/200).
WARNING: READ
THE
FUEL
SYSTEM
SAFETY
PRECAUTIONS TO PREVENT INJURY TO
PERSONS AND DAMAGE TO MATERIAL.
of the fuel system (AMM TASK 28-00-00-910-801-A/200).
(3) Do the bonding connections (GHSH TASK 20-40-02-910801-A/200).
NOTE: Make all bonding connections between the fuel
source, aircraft, and fuel nozzle (refer to the Local
Regulatory Authorities requirements).
(4) You must do the pressure refueling procedure using one of
these power supply:
External AC power supply (GHSH TASK 24-42-02-860801-A/200).
APU (GHSH TASK 49-10-00-910-801-A/200).
NOTE: If an external AC power source is not available, set
the POWER SELECTION switch to the BATTERY
position on the refueling/defueling control panel.
CAUTION:
DURING THE APU OPERATION, MAKE SURE

THAT THERE IS A TECHNICIAN NEAR THE
AIRCRAFT TO MONITOR THE APU. IF THERE
IS A FIRE IN THE APU OR AN EMERGENCY
CONDITION, THIS TECHNICIAN WILL DO THE
NECESSARY PROCEDURES. IF YOU DO NOT
OBEY THIS PRECAUTION, DAMAGE TO THE
(5) If you use the APU during the refueling procedure, do these
steps as follows:
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-11-01-650-801-A/300
Page 302
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
(a)
Obey the precautions for the operation of the APU on

the ground (AMM TASK 49-00-00-910-801-A/200).
(b)
If necessary, do the procedure to start the APU

(GHSH TASK 49-10-00-910-801-A/200), during the
pressure refueling.
NOTE: You can start the APU during the refueling, if
the start is either an initial start or a restart
after normal shutdown.
(c)
If necessary, do the procedure to shutdown the APU

(GHSH TASK 49-10-00-910-802- A/200), during the
pressure refueling.
NOTE: You can shutdown the APU during the
refueling procedure.
CAUTION:
(d)
DO NOT START THE APU DURING

REFUELING/DEFUELING PROCEDURES
AFTER AN AUTOMATIC SHUTDOWN OR
A FAILED START OF THE APU. IF YOU DO
NOT OBEY THIS PRECAUTION DAMAGE
TO THE EQUIPMENT CAN OCCUR.
If there is either a protective automatic shutdown or

failure to start condition on the APU, do one of these
two steps:
1. Complete the refueling procedure before you try to
start the APU again.
2. Stop the refueling procedure and disconnect the
fuel hose from the aircraft before you start the
APU again.
WARNING:
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
DO THIS STEP IF AN APU FIRE OCCURS

DURING THE REFUELING PROCEDURE.
IF
YOU
DO
NOT
OBEY
THIS
PRECAUTION, INJURY TO PERSONS AND
DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT CAN OCCUR.
12-11-01-650-801-A/300
Page 303
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
(e)
If an APU fire occurs, do the APU EMERGENCY

STOP procedures according to GHSH TASK 49-1000-910-802-A/200.
(6) On the FUEL/APU control panel, set these switches as

follows:
XFEED - OFF
DC PUMP- AUTO
AC PUMP 1 - AUTO
AC PUMP 2 AUTO
XFEED OVRD - OFF (latched out)
FUEL TRANSFER MODE - AUTO
ISOLATION - OFF (latched out)
NOTE: Make sure that there are no fuel transfers (Wing to
Wing Tanks) during all refuel procedure.
(7) On the MAINTENANCE PANEL, make sure that the GND

BALANCE switch is set to OFF position.
NOTE: Make sure that there are no fuel transfers (Auxiliary
to Wing Tanks) during all refuel procedure.
(8) Open the refuel door.
NOTE: The message SOV TEST WAIT may be displayed
in the repeater indicator for 12 seconds while the
auxiliary tank refuel valves are tested for correct
operation.
(9) Do a check of the aircraft leveling with the IRS (through
MCDU), as follows (Figure 302):
(a) Make sure that these circuit breakers are closed:
IRS 1 PWR 1-LHCBP (DC ESS BUS 1 NAV)
IRS 1 PWR 2-RHCBP (DC ESS BUS 2 NAV)
IRS 2 PWR 1-RHCBP (DC BUS 2 NAV)
IRS 2 PWR 2-LHCBP (DC BUS 1 NAV)
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-11-01-650-801-A/300
Page 304
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
(b) On MCDU 1, push the NAV key.

1. MCDU 1 shows the NAV INDEX page.
(c) On MCDU 1, push the LSK (POS SENSORS).
1. MCDU 1 shows the POS SENSORS page.
(d) On MCDU 1, push the LSK (IRS 1 STATUS) to see the
status of IRS 1.
1. MCDU 1 shows the IRS 1 STATUS page.
(e) On the IRS 1 STATUS page, do a check of the value
and inclination direction of the aircraft pitch (1) and roll
angle (2).
NOTE: When the pitch and roll values are positive,
the pitch and left wing are up.
When the pitch and roll values are negative,
the pitch and left wing are down.
(f)
Make sure that the pitch indication is from 2.0 to

0.5.
(g) Make sure that the roll indication is from 0.7 to 1.0.
C. Fuel Tank - Pressure Refueling (AUTO MODE) - Fuel Quantity

Up to 17400kg (38360lb) (Figure 301)
(1) Do the fuel-tank pressure refueling in the auto mode as follows:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
Make sure that the REFUELING switch is in the

CLOSE position.
Make sure that the LH and RH refueling indication
lights (3) are off.
Make sure that the defueling indication light (5) is off.
Set the REFUEL SELECTION switch to the AUTO
position.
Set the repeater indicator (4) to the necessary fuel
quantity.
Remove
the
cap
(2)
from
the
pressure
refueling/defueling adapter assembly (1).
WARNING:
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
MAKE SURE THAT THE REFUELING

ADAPTER IS IN GOOD CONDITION. A BAD
12-11-01-650-801-A/300
Page 305
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
CONNECTION OF THE FUEL NOZZLE CAN

CAUSE FUEL SPILLAGE, FIRE, INJURY TO
PERSONS AND DAMAGE TO THE
EQUIPMENT.
(g)
Make sure that the refueling adapter is in good

condition:
1. Do a check for missing or damaged lugs.
2. Do a check for signs of cracks and contamination.
(h)
(i)
Connect the fuel nozzle to the

Open the valve handle on the fuel nozzle.
WARNING:
pressure
DURING THE PRESSURE REFUELING

PROCEDURE, MAKE SURE THAT THE
REFUELING PRESSURE IS BETWEEN 35
AND 50 PSI. PRESSURES ABOVE THE
SPECIFIED LIMITS CAN CAUSE DAMAGE
TO EQUIPMENT AND INJURIES TO
PERSONS. PRESSURES BELOW THE
SPECIFIED
LIMITS
CAN
CAUSE
UNSATISFACTORY OPERATION OF THE
REFUELING COMPONENTS.
(j)
Pressurize the fuel system from 241.32 - 344.74 kPa

(35 - 50 psig).
(k) Make sure that the LH and RH refueling indication lights
(3) come on and there is no fuel flow.
(l) Set the REFUELING switch to the OPEN position and
make sure that the LH and RH refueling indication lights
(3) go off.
CAUTION:
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
STOP THE REFUELING OPERATION IF

BLACKOUT OCCURS OR ANY MESSAGE IS
DISPLAYED ON THE REFUEL PANEL. IF
YOU DO NOT OBEY THIS PRECAUTION,
FUEL LEAKAGE CAN OCCUR AND CAUSE
DAMAGE TO THE AIRCRAFT.
12-11-01-650-801-A/300
Page 306
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
CAUTION:
DURING THE REFUELING PROCEDURE,

LOOK AT THE PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE
AREA IN THE LEFT AND RIGHT WING
TANKS TO SEE IF THERE IS A FUEL
OVERFLOW. OVERFILLING CAUSES A
FUEL OVERFLOW THROUGH THE NACA
AIR INLET AND PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE.
IF AN OVERFLOW OCCURS AND THE
PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE DOES NOT
OPEN, DAMAGE TO THE AIRCRAFT
STRUCTURE CAN OCCUR.
(m) When you have the necessary fuel quantity, make sure
that the LH and RH refueling indication lights (3) come
on and the fuel flow stops.
NOTE: If fuel overflow occurs, stop the refueling
procedures immediately and do the AMM
MPP 05-50-21/601.
(n) Set the REFUELING switch to the CLOSED position.
(o) Close the valve handle on the fuel nozzle.
(p) Disconnect the fuel nozzle from the pressure
(q) Check the refueling/defueling adapter assembly (1) for
indication of leakage.
(r) Install the cap (2) to the pressure refueling/defueling
adapter assembly (1).
D. Fuel Tank - Pressure Refueling (AUTO MODE) - Fuel Quantity
Above 17400kg (38360lb) (Figure 301) (Figure 302)
(1) Do the fuel-tank pressure refueling in the auto mode as
follows:
(a) Make sure that the REFUELING switch is in the CLOSE
position.
(b) Make sure that the LH and RH refueling indication lights
(3) are off.
(c) Make sure that the defueling indication light (5) is off.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-11-01-650-801-A/300
Page 307
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
(d) Set the REFUEL SELECTION switch to the AUTO

position.
(2) Set the repeater indicator (4) to 17400kg (38360lb).
(a) Remove
the
cap
(2)
from
the
WARNING:
pressure
MAKE SURE THAT THE REFUELING

EQUIPMENT.
(b) Make sure that the refueling adapter is in good

condition:
(c) Connect
the
fuel
nozzle
to
the
(d) Open the valve handle on the fuel nozzle.
WARNING:
pressure

SPECIFIED
LIMITS
CAN
CAUSE
(e) Pressurize the fuel system from 241.32 - 344.74 kPa

(35 - 50 psig).
(f) Make sure that the LH and RH refueling indication lights
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-11-01-650-801-A/300
Page 308
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
(g) Set the REFUELING switch to the OPEN position and

(3) go off.
CAUTION:

CAUTION:

(h) When you have the necessary fuel quantity, make sure
procedures immediately and do the AMM MPP
05-50-21/601.
(i)
(j)
Set the REFUELING switch to the CLOSED position.

Reset the refueling door switch (6).
NOTE: The message SOV TEST WAIT will be
displayed in the repeater indicator for 12
seconds while the auxiliary tank refuel valves
are tested for correct operation.
(3) Set the repeater indicator (4) to any fuel quantity between
17410kg (38382lb) and 22760kg (50177lb).
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-11-01-650-801-A/300
Page 309
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
WARNING:

SPECIFIED
LIMITS
CAN
CAUSE
(a) Pressurize the fuel system from 241.32 - 344.74 kPa

(35 - 50 psig).
(b) Make sure that the LH and RH refueling indication lights
(c) Set the REFUELING switch to the OPEN position and
(3) go off.
CAUTION:

(d) If the STOP L OVR, STOP R OVR, STOP F OVR,

STOP A OVR or STOP LRFA OVR message shows on
the repeater indicator (4), stop the refueling procedure
and do as follows:
1. Decrease the wing fuel quantity until 12000kg
(26455 lb).
NOTE: Decrease the wing fuel quantity until you
get the fuel quantity, as follow:
LH= 6000kg (13227 lb).
RH= 6000kg (13227 lb).
The wings fuel quantity should be
decreased by Pressure Defueling (GHSH
TASK 12-11-01-650-802-A/300) or Run the
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-11-01-650-801-A/300
Page 310
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
Engines in Idle Position (AMM TASK 7100-01-910-801-A/200).

2. Make sure that the pitch indication is from 2.0 to
0.5. Refer to Figure 302.
3. Make sure that the roll indication is from 0.7 to
1.0. Refer to Figure 302.
4. Reset the refueling door switch (6) to clear the
repeater fault message.
NOTE: Make sure that the repeater fault message
was removed.
(4) Repeat the refueling procedure according to step (3) again,
to get the necessary fuel quantity.
NOTE:
If the message STOP L OVR, STOP R OVR,

STOP F OVR, STOPA OVR or STOP LRFA OVR
shows on the repeater indicator (4) again, stop the
refueling procedure and contact EMBRAER
Technical Support.
CAUTION:

(a) When you have the necessary fuel quantity, make sure
procedures immediately and do the AMM
MPP 05-50-21/601.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-11-01-650-801-A/300
Page 311
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
(b) Set the REFUELING switch to the CLOSED position.

(c) Close the valve handle on the fuel nozzle.
(d) Disconnect the fuel nozzle from the pressure
(e) Check the refueling/defueling adapter assembly (1) for
indication of leakage.
(f) Install the cap (2) to the pressure refueling/defueling
E.
Fuel Tank
(Figure 301)
Pressure
Refueling
(MANUAL
MODE)
(1) Do the fuel-tank pressure refueling in the manual mode as

follows:
(a) Make sure that the LH and RH refueling indication
lights (3) are off.
(b) Make sure that the defueling indication light (5) is off.
(c) Set the REFUEL SELECTION switch to the MANUAL
position.
(d) Remove
the
cap
(2)
from
the
pressure
WARNING: MAKE SURE THAT THE REFUELING
EQUIPMENT.
(e) Make sure that the refueling adapter is in good

condition:
(f)
Connect the fuel nozzle to the

(g) Open the valve handle on the fuel nozzle.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
pressure
12-11-01-650-801-A/300
Page 312
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
WARNING:

SPECIFIED
LIMITS
CAN
CAUSE
(h) Pressurize the fuel system with 241.32 - 344.74 kPa

(35 - 50 psig).
(i) Make sure that the LH and RH refueling indication
lights (3) are on and there is no fuel flow.
(j) Set the REFUELING switch to the OPEN position and
make sure that the LH and RH refueling indication
lights (3) go off.
(k) When you have the necessary fuel quantity, set the
REFUELING switch to the CLOSED position.
(l) Make sure that the LH and RH refueling indication
lights (3) come on and the fuel flow stops.
(m) Close the valve handle on the fuel nozzle.
(n) Disconnect the fuel nozzle from the pressure
(o) Do a check of the refueling/defueling adapter
assembly (1) for indication of leakage.
(p) Install the cap (2) to the pressure refueling/defueling
F. Job Close-Up
(1) Disconnect the external AC power supply from the aircraft
(GHSH TASK 24-42-02-860-802- A/200).
NOTE:
If you used the POWER SELECTION switch in the

BATTERY position, set it back to the NORMAL
position and close the switch guard.
(2) Disconnect the bonding cable from the aircraft (GHSH

TASK 20-40-02-910-801-A/200).
(3) Close the refuel door.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-11-01-650-801-A/300
Page 313
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
ZONE
616
1. PRESSURE
REFUELING/DEFUELING
ADAPTER ASSEMBLY
6. REFUELING
DOOR SWITCH
2. CAP
C
TO L O
S
E
4. REPEATER INDICATOR
3. LH/RH REFUELING
INDICATION LIGHTS
5. DEFUELING
INDICATION LIGHT
REFUEL SELECTION
AUTO
POWER SELECTION
MANUAL
NORMAL
BATTERY
DO NOT INITIATE THE

REFUELING BEFORE
CONFIRMING THAT THE
REFUELING VALVE LIGHTS
ARE INITIALLY ON
CLOSED
CLOSED
LH TANK
RH TANK
FUEL QTY REMAINING

OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
TK SEL
DECRT
TEST
CLOSED
CLOSED
DEFUELING
REFUELING
C
REFUELING/DEFUELING CONTROL PANEL
SELECTED
INCR
Fuel Tank - Pressure Refueling

Figure 301
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-11-01-650-801-A/300
Page 314
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
A
MCDU (REF.)
IRS
STATUS
1/1
NAVIGATION MODE
IRS POSITION
N38 * 20.3
GS
300
W090 * 20.5
WIND
045
DFT
RT
/100
0.1
MILES FR FMS POS
N 0.1
PITCH
+ 1.25
POS
W2.1 TOTAL 2.1

ROLL
-2.15
SENSORS
1. PITCH INDICATION
2. ROLL INDICATION
N
S
X
+/
A
Aircraft Leveling - Check with IRS (through MCDU)
Figure 302
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-11-01-650-801-A/300
Page 315/316
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
GHSH TASK 12-11-01-650-802-A
1. Fuel Tank - Pressure Defueling
A. General
(1) This task gives the procedure to do the pressure defueling
of the wing fuel tanks.
NOTE:
It is not possible to directly pressure-defuel the

auxiliary fuel tanks. It is necessary to transfer its
fuel to the wing tanks first, and then do the
pressure defueling of the wing tanks. For fuel
transfer from Auxiliary Tanks to Wing Tanks refer
to AMM TASK 28-20-00-910-802-G/200.
B. Job Set-Up
(GHSH TASK 20-00-00-910-801-A/200).
(5) Connect the external AC power supply to the aircraft (GHSH
TASK 24-42-02-860-801-A/200).
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-11-01-650-802-A/300
Page 301
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
C. Fuel Tank - Pressure Defueling
(1) Make sure that the defueling indication light (3) is off.
(2) Remove the cap (2) from the pressure refueling/defueling
(3) Connect the fuel nozzle to the pressure refueling/defueling
(4) Open the valve handle on the fuel nozzle.
(5) Set the DEFUELING switch to the OPEN position and make
sure that the defueling indication light (3) comes on.
(6) On the FUEL CONTROL PANEL, set the XFEED switch as
applicable:
To defuel the two wing tanks, set the switch to the LOW 2
position or LOW 1 position
To defuel the LH tank, set the switch to the OFF position
To defuel the RH tank, set the switch to the LOW 1 position
CAUTION:
WHEN YOU FULLY DEFUEL THE TANK, YOU MUST

STOP WHEN THE INDICATION SHOWS 0. IN THIS
SITUATION THERE IS A SMALL QUANTITY OF
FUEL IN THE TANK THAT PREVENTS DAMAGE TO
THE FUEL PUMP. DAMAGE TO THE FUEL PUMP
WILL OCCUR IF IT OPERATES WITH NO FUEL
(DRY OPERATION).
(7) Apply suction to the fuel nozzle and/or set the AC PUMP
switches on the FUEL control panel, as applicable:
NOTE: If you apply suction to the fuel nozzle with the AC
PUMP on, you can do the pressure defueling
procedure in less time.
To defuel the two wing tanks, set the AC PUMP 1 and AC
PUMP 2 switches to the ON position
To defuel the LH tank, set the AC PUMP 1 switch to the ON
position
To defuel the RH tank, set the AC PUMP 2 switch to the ON
position
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-11-01-650-802-A/300
Page 302
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
(8) After you complete the defueling operation, set the
DEFUELING switch to the CLOSED position and make sure
that the defueling indication light (3) goes off.
(9) Set the XFEED switch to the OFF position.
(10) Set the AC PUMP 1 and AC PUMP 2 switches to the AUTO
position.
(11) Close the valve handle on the fuel nozzle.
(12) Disconnect
the
fuel
nozzle
from
the
pressure
(13) Install the cap (2) to the pressure refueling/defueling adapter
assembly (1).
D. Job Close-Up
(1) If necessary to drain the remaining fuel from the fuel tank, refer
to AMM TASK 12-11-05-680-802-A/300.
(GHSH TASK 24-42-02-860-802-A/200).
(4) Remove the bonding cable from the aircraft (GHSH TASK 2040-02-910-801-A/200).
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-11-01-650-802-A/300
Page 303
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
1. PRESSURE
REFUELING/DEFUELING
ADAPTER ASSEMBLY
2. CAP
TO C LO
S
E
ZONE
616
PRES
TO S
UN
LOCK -
REFUEL SELECTION
AUTO
POWER SELECTION
NORMAL
MANUAL
BATTERY
DO NOT INITIATE THE

REFUELING BEFORE
CONFIRMING THAT THE
ARE INITIALLY ON
CLOSED
CLOSED
LH TANK
RH TANK
FUEL QTY REMAINING

OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
3. DEFUELING INDICATION LIGHT
SELECTED
INCR
TK SEL
DECRT
TEST
CLOSED
C LO SED
DEFUELING
REFUELING
B
FUEL
ENG 1
ENG 2
XFEED
OFF
LOW 1
LOW 2
APU
AC PUMP 1
AUTO
AC PUMP 2
AUTO
XFEED OVRD
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
FUEL TRANSFER
AUTO
ISOLATION
OVRD
OFF
MODE
FUEL CONTROL PANEL
C
Fuel Tank - Pressure Defueling
Figure 303
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-11-01-650-802-A/300
Page 304
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
GHSH TASK 12-11-03-650-801-A
1. Fuel Tank - Gravity Refueling
A. General
(1) This task gives the procedure to refuel the aircraft by
gravity.
(2) Gravity refueling is permitted for the wing fuel tanks only.
(3) List of fuels approved by Embraer:
Fuel JET A-1

Fuel JET A
Fuel JP-8
Chinese Number 3 Jet Fuel, for ANAC certified aircraft
only
(4) List of additive approved by Embraer:

DIETHYLENE GLYCOL MONOMETHYL ETHER
NOTE:
Obey the fluid manufactures specifications to find

the additive proportions for each fuel.
B. Job Set-Up
(GHSH TASK 20-00-00-910-801-A/200).
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-11-03-650-801-A/300
Page 301
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
(4) For the LH fuel tank, open the LH gravity-fill cap (1). Refer
to Figure 302.
(5) For the RH fuel tank, open the RH gravity-fill cap (1). Refer
to Figure 302.
(7) Set the POWER SELECTION switch to the BATTERY
position on the refueling/defueling control panel. Refer to
Figure 301.
NOTE: If the aircraft power supply (battery or external
power) is not available, you can use the magnetic
level indicators to measure the fuel quantity (GHSH
TASK 12-11-07-200-801-B/300).
C. Wing Fuel Tank - Gravity Fueling
(1) Put the fueling nozzle into the gravity refueling adapter (2).
(2) Start the fueling operation and monitor the fuel quantity in the
tank.
NOTE: The total fuel tanks
16000 liters (4220 gal.).
capacity
is
approximately
(a) You can refuel the two wing tanks at the same time, or one
and then the other.
(b) Make sure there is no fuel imbalance when the procedure
is completed.
(3) Remove the fueling nozzle from the gravity refueling
adapter (2) after you have the correct fuel quantity in the
tank.
D. Job Close-Up
(1) Set the POWER SELECTION switch back to the NORMAL
position and close the switch guard on the
refueling/defueling control panel. Refer to Figure 301.
(3) For the LH fuel tank, close the LH gravity-fill cap (1). Refer
to Figure 302.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-11-03-650-801-A/300
Page 302
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
(4) For the RH fuel tank, close the RH gravity-fill cap (1). Refer
to Figure 302.
(5) Remove the bonding cable from the aircraft (GHSH TASK
20-40-02-910-801-A/200).
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-11-03-650-801-A/300
Page 303
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
ZONE
616
B
A
REFUEL SELECTION
POWER SELECTION
NORMAL
MANUAL
AUTO
BATTERY
DO NOT INITIATE THE

REFUELING BEFORE
CONFIRMING THAT THE
ARE INITIALLY ON
CLOSED
CLOSED
LH TANK
RH TANK
FUEL QTY REMAINING

OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
SELECTED
INCR
TK SEL
DECRT
TEST
C LO SED
DEFUELING
REFUELING
CLOSED
Fuel Tank Gravity Fueling

Figure 301
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-11-03-650-801-A/300
Page 304
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
A
ZONE
531
B
A
ZONE
631
A
FUELING NOZZLE
(REF.)
2. GRAVITY REFUELING
ADAPTER
1. GRAVITY FILL
CAP
B
Fuel Tank Gravity Fueling
Figure 302
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-11-03-650-801-A/300
Page 305/306
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
GHSH TASK 12-11-05-680-801-A
1. Fuel Tank - Water Draining
A. General
(1) This task gives the procedure to drain the water from the
fuel tanks. To drain the residual fuel from the fuel tanks,
refer to AMM TASK 12-11-05-680-802-A/300.
(2) Examine the fuel drained from each fuel tank for water and
other contaminants. You will usually see water in the fuel as
a layer below the fuel or as small bubbles in the fuel.
(3) Let the aircraft be stable (aircraft parked and fuel not being
used) for approximately 2 hours before you drain it. This
procedure is necessary to let the water go to the bottom of
the tank.
(4) The wing-tank drain valves are installed in zones 143 and
144 and the auxiliary-tank drain valves are installed in
zones 131, 141, 147 and 151.
B. Job Set-Up
(GHSH TASK 20-00-00-910-801-A/200).
TASK 24-42-02-860-801-A/200).
(4) On the MCDU (AMM SDS 34-61-00/1), use the sequence in
parentheses to open these SSPCs:
E1 START VLV-SPDA2 (CBMENU/CB BY SYS/ENGINE)
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-11-05-680-801-A/300
Page 301
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
(5) For cold-weather condition, do a check of the fuel
temperature on the synoptic page. It must be greater than
0C (32F).
NOTE: When the tank temperature is below 0 C
(32 F), you must not operate the drain valve.
Below this temperature, water can freeze around
the drain valve and make the water flow impossible
(6) Statically ground the aircraft (GHSH TASK 20-40-02-910801-A/200).
(7) For the left collector-tank drain valves, open access panels
192AL and 192BL. Refer to Figure 301.
(8) For the right collector-tank drain valves, open the access
panels 192BR and 192CR. Refer to Figure 301.
C. Wing Fuel Tank - Water Draining (Figure 301)
(1) Do these steps to drain the water from the wing fuel tanks:
(a) Put the container (1 gal) below the draining device (GSE
096).
(b) With the draining device (GSE 096), turn the drain valve
poppet (1) counterclockwise in the direction of the OPEN
position to open the drain valve (2).
NOTE: The drain valve (2) closes when you turn the
drain valve poppet (1) to the CLOSED position
with the draining device (GSE 096). To lock the
drain valve (2) open, turn the drain valve poppet
(1) one-quarter turn counterclockwise to the
OPEN position. To unlock the drain valve (2),
turn the drain valve poppet (1) one-quarter turn
clockwise to the CLOSED position.
Drain several times until the fuel in the container
shows no water. Examine the collected fuel for
contamination, specially at the fuel/water
interface.
(c) Remove the draining device (GSE 096) after you drain a
sufficient amount of fuel.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-11-05-680-801-A/300
Page 302
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
(d) Make sure that the drain valve poppet (1) is in the
CLOSED position and that there are no fuel leaks.
(2) Visually examine the collected fuel for contamination.
(3) If you see microorganisms or other unwanted matter in the fuel,
refer to AMM TASK 28-11-00-200-802-A/600.
WARNING:
USE PROCEDURES THAT AGREE WITH LOCAL

REGULATIONS
WHEN
YOU
DISCARD
DANGEROUS
CONSUMABLE
MATERIALS.
DANGEROUS CONSUMABLE MATERIALS CAN
CAUSE
INJURY
TO
PERSONS
AND
CONTAMINATION OF THE ENVIRONMENT.
(4) Discard the collected fuel.

(5) Do this procedure again for the other drain valves.
D. Auxiliary Fuel Tank - Water Draining (Figure 302)
(1) Do these steps to drain the water from the auxiliary fuel
tanks:
(a) Put the container (1 gal) below the draining device
(GSE 447).
(b) Insert the tube (4) of the draining device (GSE 447) into
the drain hole (6).
(c) With the draining device (GSE 447), push the drain
valve poppet (3) upward to open the drain valve (2).
NOTE: The drain valve (2) automatically closes when
the draining device (GSE 447) is removed.
Drain several times until the fuel in the
container shows no water. Examine the
collected fuel for contamination, specially at
the fuel/water interface.
(d) Remove the draining device (GSE 447) after you drain a
sufficient amount of fuel.
(e) Make sure that the drain valve poppet (1) is in the
CLOSED position and that there are no fuel leaks.
(2) Visually examine the collected fuel for contamination.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-11-05-680-801-A/300
Page 303
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
(3) If you see microorganisms or other unwanted matter in the
fuel, refer to AMM TASK 28-11-00-200-802-A/600.
WARNING:
USE PROCEDURES THAT AGREE WITH

LOCAL REGULATIONS WHEN YOU DISCARD
DANGEROUS CONSUMABLE MATERIALS.
DANGEROUS CONSUMABLE MATERIALS CAN
CAUSE
INJURY
TO
PERSONS
AND
CONTAMINATION OF THE ENVIRONMENT.
(4) Discard the collected fuel.

(5) Do this procedure again for the other drain valves.
E. Job Close-Up
(1) For the left collector-tank drain valves, close the access
panels 192AL and 192BL. Refer to Figure 301.
(2) For the right collector-tank drain valves, close the access
panels 192BR and 192CR. Refer to Figure 301.
parentheses to close these SSPCs:
(4) Disconnect the external AC power supply from the

CAUTION:
EXAMINE ALL THE WORK AREAS TO MAKE

SURE THAT YOU REMOVED ALL TOOLS AND
EQUIPMENT AFTER YOU COMPLETED THE
WORK. IF YOU DO NOT OBEY THIS
PROCEDURE, DAMAGE TO THE AIRCRAFT
CAN OCCUR.

the work area.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-11-05-680-801-A/300
Page 304
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
A
ZONE
192
ACCESS PANEL
192 BL
ACCESS DOOR
192 BR
ACCESS DOOR
192 AL
ACCESS PANEL
192 CR
Wing Fuel Tank Water Draining

Figure 301 Sheet 1
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-11-05-680-801-A/300
Page 305
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
1. DRAIN VALVE
POPPET
2. DRAIN
VALVE
C
Wing Fuel Tank Water Draining
Figure 301 Sheet 2
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-11-05-680-801-A/300
Page 306
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
ZONES
130
140
150
WETDRAIN
ACCESS PANEL
(REF.)
B
TYPICAL
Auxiliary Fuel Tank Water Draining

Figure 302 Sheet 1
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-11-05-680-801-A/300
Page 307
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
LOWER SKIN
TANK
(REF.)
2. DRAIN VALVE
3. DRAIN VALVE
POPPET
4. DRAINING DEVICE
TUBE
5. DRAIN HOSE
AIRCRAFT SKIN
(REF.)
6. DRAINING HOLE
1. DRAINING
DEVICE
(GSE 447)
B
TYPICAL
INTERNAL VIEW
Auxiliary Fuel Tank Water Draining

Figure 302 Sheet 2
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-11-05-680-801-A/300
Page 308
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
GHSH TASK 12-11-07-200-801-B
1. Fuel Magnetic Level - Check
A. General
(1) The magnetic level indicators give the fuel quantity
mechanically.
(2) The magnetic level indicators are installed on the skin of the
lower wing. There are three indicators in each wing.
(3) The magnetic level indicators show a visual indication of the
total (usable + unusable) fuel quantity in the related wing
tank.
B. Job Set-Up
(GHSH TASK 20-00-00-910-801-A/200).
(2) Do not do other tasks on the aircraft. It will cause errors in
the fuel level indication.
NOTE: Let the fuel become stable for 5 minutes before you
continue with this procedure.
TASK 24-42-02-860-801-A/200).
(4) Do a check of aircraft leveling with GSE 039 or with IRS
(through MCDU)
(a)
To do a check of the aircraft leveling with GSE 039, do

the steps that follow:
WARNING: MAKE SURE THAT THE LANDING
GEAR SAFETY PINS ARE INSTALLED.
THIS IS TO PREVENT INJURIES TO
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-11-07-200-801-B/300
Page 301
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
PERSONS
MATERIAL.
AND
DAMAGE
TO
1. Install the GSE 039 in the LH main landing-gear

compartment. Refer to Figure 301.
WARNING: MAKE SURE THAT YOU READ THE
CORRECT VALUE. IF YOU READ A
WRONG
VALUE,
THE
FUEL
QUANTITY WILL STAY INCORRECT
AND THE REAL FUEL QUANTITY WILL
NOT BE SUFFICIENT TO COMPLETE
THE FLIGHT. IF YOU DO NOT OBEY
THIS PRECAUTION, DAMAGE TO THE
EQUIPMENT AND INJURIES TO
PERSONS CAN OCCUR.
2. Make sure that the GSE 039 indication is from 2.0 to 0.0 pitch and from 0.0 to 1.0 roll, on the
leveling scale.
3. Record the pitch and roll indications.
(b)
To do a check of the aircraft leveling with the IRS

(through MCDU), do the steps that follow:
1.
Make sure that these circuit breakers are closed:
2.
IRS 1 PWR 1-LHCBP (DC ESS BUS 1 NAV)

IRS 1 PWR 2-RHCBP (DC ESS BUS 2 NAV)
IRS 2 PWR 1-RHCBP (DC BUS 2 NAV)
IRS 2 PWR 2-LHCBP (DC BUS 1 NAV)
On MCDU 1, push the NAV key.

a MCDU 1 shows the NAV INDEX page.
3.
On MCDU 1, push the LSK (POS SENSORS).

a MCDU 1 shows the POS SENSORS page.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-11-07-200-801-B/300
Page 302
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
4.
On MCDU 1, push the LSK (IRS 1 STATUS) to

see the status of IRS 1.
a MCDU 1 shows the IRS 1 STATUS page.
WARNING: MAKE SURE THAT YOU READ THE

CORRECT VALUE. IF YOU READ A
WRONG
VALUE,
THE
FUEL
QUANTITY WILL STAY INCORRECT
AND THE REAL FUEL QUANTITY WILL
NOT BE SUFFICIENT TO COMPLETE
THE FLIGHT. IF YOU DO NOT OBEY
THIS PRECAUTION, DAMAGE TO THE
EQUIPMENT AND INJURIES TO
PERSONS CAN OCCUR.
5.
On the IRS 1 STATUS page, record the value and

inclination direction of the aircraft pitch (1) and roll
angle (2).
NOTE: When the pitch and roll values are
positive, the pitch and left wing are up.
When the pitch and roll values are
negative, the pitch and left wing are
down.
6.
7.
Make sure that the pitch indication is from - 2.0

to 0.0.
Make sure that the roll indication is from - 1.0 to
1.0. In the tables, only positive roll values are
considered. Do the considerations that follow:
a For negative roll values, consider them as
positive values but the left wing is the low wing
and the right wing is the high wing.
b For positive roll values, the left wing is the high
wing and the right wing is the low wing.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-11-07-200-801-B/300
Page 303
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
C. Fuel Magnetic Level - Check

(1) Read the calibrated rod (2).
NOTE: To find the fuel quantity in one of the wing tanks,
examine each magnetic level indicator (1) in the
direction from OUTBD to INBD. Do this until you have
one that is not at its lower stop (0 on the calibrated rod
(2)).
(a) Push and turn magnetic level indicator 3 (1) to release
it.
NOTE: Release the indicator slowly from up down.
Make sure that the stick falls freely until it is
held by the magnet float.
(b) Read indicator 3:
1. If you read a value that is more than 0.0 (zero),
record this value and use Table 301 to identify the
correct table to use for the aircraft leveling.
NOTE:
Look at the note that you made when you

did the aircraft leveling check.
2. If you read 0.0 (zero), then read indicator 2:

a. If you read a value that is more than 0.0 (zero),
record this value and use Table 301 to identify
the correct table to use for the aircraft leveling.
NOTE:
Look at the note that you made when you

did the aircraft leveling check.
b. If you read 0.0 (zero), now read indicator 1:
1.) If you read a value that is more than 0.0

(zero), record this value and use Table 301 to
identify the correct table to use for the aircraft
leveling.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-11-07-200-801-B/300
Page 304
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
NOTE: Look at the note that you made when

you did the aircraft leveling check.
2.) If you read 0.0 (zero), then the fuel quantity in

the applicable wing tank is less than the value
that the magnetic level indicator can read.
(2) Table 301 is used to identify the correct table to use for the
aircraft leveling.
NOTE: Look at the note that you made when you did the
aircraft leveling check.
Table 301 - AIRCRAFT PITCH AND ROLL
PITCH
0.0 to 0.25
-2.0 to -0.75
Table 303
-0.75 to 0.0
Table 302
WARNING:
ROLL
0.25 to 1.0
Table 306
Table 307
Table 304
Table 305
MAKE SURE THAT YOU READ THE CORRECT

VALUE. IF YOU READ A WRONG VALUE, THE
FUEL QUANTITY WILL STAY INCORRECT AND
THE REAL FUEL QUANTITY WILL NOT BE
SUFFICIENT TO COMPLETE THE FLIGHT. IF
DAMAGE TO THE EQUIPMENT AND INJURIES
TO PERSONS CAN OCCUR.
(3) Find the related fuel quantity in the applicable table, based
on pitch, roll, and calibrated rod.
NOTE: 1 is equivalent to 0.26417 gal.
The maximum error for the quantities given in the
tables that follow is 5.0% of the indication.
When the tanks are close to full or near empty, the
magnetic level indicators will not indicate the fuel
quantity accurately. The - (dashes) in the table
were included to cover this condition.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-11-07-200-801-B/300
Page 305
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
The tables give fuel quantity indication read in

volume unit ( or gal.). To know the fuel quantity
indication in mass unit (kg or lb), you must multiply
the volume by the fuel density value. During this
operation, make sure that you use the correct
units.
Table 302 - Magnetic Level Indication - Operational Data
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-11-07-200-801-B/300
Page 306
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
Table 302 - Magnetic Level Indication - Operational Data (Continued)
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-11-07-200-801-B/300
Page 307
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-11-07-200-801-B/300
Page 308
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-11-07-200-801-B/300
Page 309
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-11-07-200-801-B/300
Page 310
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-11-07-200-801-B/300
Page 311
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-11-07-200-801-B/300
Page 312
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-11-07-200-801-B/300
Page 313
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-11-07-200-801-B/300
Page 314
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-11-07-200-801-B/300
Page 315
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-11-07-200-801-B/300
Page 316
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-11-07-200-801-B/300
Page 317
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-11-07-200-801-B/300
Page 318
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-11-07-200-801-B/300
Page 319
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-11-07-200-801-B/300
Page 320
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-11-07-200-801-B/300
Page 321
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-11-07-200-801-B/300
Page 322
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
(4) Lift the magnetic level indicator (1) to its normal position and
turn it.
D. Job Close-Up
(1) If you measured the aircraft pitch and roll with the GSE 039,
remove it from the LH main landing-gear wheel.
(GHSH TASK 24-42-02-860-802-A/200).
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-11-07-200-801-B/300
Page 323
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
B
A
ZONE
1431
WING STUB
(REF.)
C
2
PLUMB BOB CORD

ATTACHMENT POINT
GSE 039
B
AIRCRAFT
LEVELING SCALE
THE PLUMB BOB SHOWS THE LOWER WING.
AS APPLICABLE TO THE ACFT CONFIGURATION
Aircraft Leveling Check

Figure 301
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-11-07-200-801-B/300
Page 324
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
A
MCDU (REF.)
IRS
STATUS
1/1
NAVIGATION MODE
IRS POSITION
N38 * 20.3
GS
300
W090 * 20.5
WIND
045
DFT
RT
/100
0.1
MILES FR FMS POS
N 0.1
PITCH
+ 1.25
POS
W2.1 TOTAL 2.1

ROLL
-2.15
SENSORS
1. PITCH INDICATION
2. ROLL INDICATION
+/
A
Aircraft Leveling Check
Figure 302
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-11-07-200-801-B/300
Page 325
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
A
ZONES
521
531
INDICATOR 3
ZONES
621
631
B
INDICATOR 2
INDICATOR 1
ACCESS PANEL
531BB/631BB
ACCESS PANEL
521EB/621EB
ACCESS PANEL
521AB/621AB
1. MAGNETIC LEVEL
INDICATOR
ACCESS PANEL (REF.)
2. CALIBRATED ROD
B
Fuel Magnetic Level Check
Figure 303
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-11-07-200-801-B/300
Page 326
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
GHSH TASK 12-12-01-200-801-A
1. Hydraulic Reservoir Level - Check
A. General
(1) This task gives the procedure to do the level check of the
hydraulic system reservoirs.
(2) There is one reservoir for each hydraulic system. The No. 1
hydraulic system reservoir has a volumetric capacity of
3
12.3 (750 in ). The No. 2 hydraulic system reservoir has a
3
volumetric capacity of 14.75 (900 in ). The No. 3 hydraulic
system reservoir has a volumetric capacity of 6.15
3
(375 in ).
B. Job Set-Up
(GHSH TASK 20-00-00-910-801-A/200).
TASK 24-42-02-860-801-A/200).
(3) Make sure that the GSE 070 are installed to prevent
movement of the aircraft.
(4) Depressurize the applicable hydraulic system (AMM TASK
29-10-00-860-804-A/200) to release the pressure from the
applicable hydraulic accumulator:
NOTE: Use a flashlight while you work in the No. 3
hydraulic system.
For the No. 1 and No. 2 hydraulic systems (1). Refer to
Figure 302.
For the No. 3 hydraulic system (1). Refer to Figure 303.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-12-01-200-801-A/300
Page 301
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
(5) Make sure that the applicable hydraulic accumulator agrees
with the placard limits (AMM TASK 12-15-05-600-801A/300).
(6) Make sure that the spoilers and TR are stowed.
C. Hydraulic Reservoir - Fluid Level Check
NOTE: The hydraulic reservoir level check can be done through:
The MFD indication in the cockpit. Refer to SUBTASK
700-008-A or
The gauge of the applicable reservoir. Refer to
SUBTASK 700-009-A
SUBTASK 700-008-A
WARNING:
THE HYDRAULIC SYSTEM HAS PHOSPHATEESTER HYDRAULIC FLUID. PUT ON APPROVED

RUBBER GOGGLES AND RUBBER GLOVES
WHEN YOU WORK ON THE HYDRAULIC SYSTEM.
IF THE FLUID TOUCHES YOU, FLUSH YOUR SKIN
WITH WATER. IF IT GETS IN YOUR EYES, FLUSH
THEM WITH WATER AND GET MEDICAL AID. THE
FLUID CAN CAUSE SKIN AND EYE IRRITATION.
WARNING:
OBEY ALL HYDRAULIC SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

WHEN YOU DO WORK ON THE HYDRAULIC
SYSTEM COMPONENTS. IF YOU DO NOT OBEY
THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS, INJURY TO
PERSONS AND DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT CAN
OCCUR.
(1) In the cockpit, zone 220, set the MFD to the hydraulic synoptic
page.
(2) Record the fluid temperature indications for the No. 1 (1), No. 2
(5), or No. 3 (3) hydraulic system. Refer to Figure 301.
NOTE: The fluid temperature is also recorded to measure the
reservoir level check through the reservoir gauge
(SUBTASK 700-009-A).
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-12-01-200-801-A/300
Page 302
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
(3) Record the fluid quantity indications for the No. 1 (2), No. 2
NOTE: When the hydraulic level check is performed in the
hydraulic synoptic page of the MFD, go to
SUBTASK 700-004-A
SUBTASK 700-009-A
(4) Get access to the applicable hydraulic compartment, as
follows:
(a) At zone 199, for the No. 1 hydraulic system, open the
access door 199KL.
(b) At zone 198, for the No. 2 hydraulic system, open the
access door 198LR.
(c) At zone 314, for the No. 3 hydraulic system, open the
access door 314AR.
NOTE: Use a workstand (rear fuselage) to get access
to this hydraulic compartment.
(5) Record the quantity indication on the hydraulic fluid level
indicator of the applicable reservoir:
No. 1 and/or No.2 hydraulic reservoir (2). Refer to
Figure 302.
No. 3 hydraulic reservoir (2). Refer to Figure 303.
SUBTASK 700-004-A (Figure 301) (Figure 302) (Figure 303)
(6) Make sure that the recorded values are in the range of the
table that follows:
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-12-01-200-801-A/300
Page 303
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
Table 301- Fluid Levels Limits
(7) If the fluid level value is out of the limits, service the
applicable hydraulic system reservoir (GHSH TASK 12-1201-600-801-A/300).
(8) Pressurize the applicable hydraulic system (AMM TASK 2910-00-863-802-A/200).
NOTE: When the hydraulic level check is performed in the
hydraulic synoptic page of the MFD indication, go
to SUBTASK 700-005-A
No. 1 and/or No.2 hydraulic reservoir (2). Refer to
Figure 302.
SUBTASK 700-005-A
(11) Compare the reservoir quantity indication of the applicable
hydraulic system, with the system pressurized and depressurized, as follows:
Table 302 Quantity Indications Limits
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-12-01-200-801-A/300
Page 304
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
(12) Bleed the air from the applicable reservoir if the difference
in quantity indications is more than the limit in (AMM TASK
29-10-00-870-803-A/200).
D. Job Close-Up
CAUTION: EXAMINE ALL THE WORK AREAS TO MAKE
PROCEDURE, DAMAGE TO THE AIRCRAFT CAN
OCCUR.
(1) Remove all tools, equipment and unwanted materials from
the work area.
(GHSH TASK 24-42-02-860-802-A/200).
WARNING: ALWAYS OBEY THE MANUFACTURERS
HEALTH AND SAFETY PRECAUTIONS WHEN
YOU USE HYDRAULIC FLUID. DO NOT GET
HYDRAULIC FLUID ON YOUR SKIN, IN YOUR
EYES OR MOUTH. PUT ON APPROVED
PROTECTIVE CLOTHING AND GOGGLES.
HYDRAULIC FLUID IS TOXIC AND CAN CAUSE
INJURIES.
CAUTION: USE
ONLY
SPECIFIED
SOLVENTS,
DETERGENTS OR CLEANERS. IF YOU USE
MATERIALS THAT ARE NOT SPECIFIED,
DAMAGE TO THE AIRCRAFT CAN OCCUR.
(3) Clean all the hydraulic fluid from the work area.
(4) When the hydraulic level check is performed with the
reservoir gauge, close the access to the applicable
hydraulic compartment, as follows:
(a) At zone 199, for the No. 1 hydraulic system, open the
access door 199KL.
(b) At zone 198, for the No. 2 hydraulic system, open the
access door 198LR.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-12-01-200-801-A/300
Page 305
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
(c) At zone 314, for the No. 3 hydraulic system, open the
access door 314AR.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-12-01-200-801-A/300
Page 306
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
3. TEMPERATURE
5. TEMPERATURE
2. QUANTITY
4. QUANTITY
6. QUANTITY
1. TEMPERATURE
PRESS
QTY
PRESS
SYS 1
90 33/64 C
728
PSI
QTY
PRESS
QTY
SYS 3
90 33/64 C
78 %
1080
SYS 2
90 33/64 C
PSI
27 %
760
PSI
21 %
PTU
LANDING GEAR
E LEV OUTBD
R U D UPPER
ENG 1 REVERSER
MF SPOILER
GND SPOILER 2
BRAKE OUTBD
LH
EL EV OUTBD RH
RUD LOW
ER
AI
L O U TB D
3/4
ELE V IN BD
AIL IN BD
ENG 2 REVERSER
MF SP OILER 5
GND SPOI
LER 1
BR A K E IN BD
NOSE WHEEL STR
EM ER/PARK BRAKE
A
Hydraulic System Reservoir Synoptic-Page - Fluid Level Check
Figure 301
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-12-01-200-801-A/300
Page 307
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
C
A
ZONE
190
1. PALM BUTTON
B
2
1
0
TYPICAL
B
2. QUANTITY
GAUGE
XX
XX
XX
C
No. 1 and No. 2 Hydraulic System Reservoir - Fluid Level Check
Figure 302
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-12-01-200-801-A/300
Page 308
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
A
ZONES
314
316
1. PALM BUTTON
2. QUANTITY
GAUGE
No. 3 Hydraulic System Reservoir - Fluid Level Check

Figure 303
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-12-01-200-801-A/300
Page 309/310
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
GHSH TASK 12-12-01-600-801-A
1. Hydraulic Reservoir - Servicing
A. General
(1) This task gives the procedure to do the servicing of the
hydraulic system reservoirs.
(2) The list of approved consumable is:
(a) HYJET-IV-A-PLUS
(b) SKYDROL LD-4
(c) SKYDROL 500B-4
(3) There is one reservoir for each hydraulic system. Hydraulic
system reservoir No. 1 has a volumetric capacity of 12.3
3
(750 in ). Hydraulic system reservoir No. 2 has a volumetric
3
capacity of 14.75 (900 in ). Hydraulic system reservoir No.
3
3 has a volumetric capacity of 6.15 (375 in ).
B. Job Set-Up
(GHSH TASK 20-00-00-910-801-A/200).
(2) Get access to the applicable hydraulic compartment as
follows:
(a) In zone 199, for hydraulic system No. 1, open access
door 199CL.
(b) In zone 198, for hydraulic system No. 2, open access
panel 198CR.
(c) In zone 314, for hydraulic system No. 3, open access
door 314AR.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-12-01-600-801-A/300
Page 301
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
(3) Make sure that the parking brake is applied.
(4) Do a check of the accumulator pressure gauge of the
applicable hydraulic system (GHSH TASK 12-15-05-200801-A/300).
WARNING:
KEEP PERSONS AND EQUIPMENT FAR FROM

THE FLIGHT CONTROL SURFACES, THRUST
REVERSERS, AND LANDING GEAR. THESE
COMPONENTS CAN MOVE SUDDENLY WHEN
YOU SUPPLY HYDRAULIC POWER AND
CAUSE INJURIES TO PERSONS AND
DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT.
WARNING:
MAKE SURE THAT THE LANDING GEAR

DAMAGE TO MATERIAL.
(5) Release the pressure from the applicable hydraulic system

(AMM TASK 29-10-00-860-804-A/200).
(7) For hydraulic system No. 2, make sure that the landing gear
is extended (AMM TASK 32-33-00-710-801-A/500).
C. Hydraulic Reservoir - Servicing
WARNING:

(1) Remove the dust cap from the applicable fill QD (1), for
hydraulic system No. 1 and/or No. 2, or (2) for hydraulic system
No. 3, on the GROUND SERVICE panel.
NOTE: Use a flashlight while you work in the No. 3 hydraulic
compartment.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-12-01-600-801-A/300
Page 302
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
Make sure that the GSE 099 has sufficient hydraulic
fluid to fill the hydraulic fluid reservoirs. If you do not
obey this precaution, air can go into the hydraulic
system.
(2) Connect the auxiliary hose of the GSE 099 to the fill QD (1), for
hydraulic system No. 1 and/or No. 2, or (2), for hydraulic
system No. 3, but keep the connection loose.
(3) Put a stainless steel container (1 gal) below the connection
between the auxiliary hose of the hydraulic reservoir service
unit and the fill QD (1) or (2).
(4) Operate the GSE 099 until a small quantity of air-free hydraulic
fluid drains through the connection into the stainless steel
container (1 gal). This is an indication that there is no air in the
auxiliary hose.
(5) Tighten the auxiliary hose fitting of the GSE 099 to the fill QD
(1) or (2).
(6) Operate the GSE 099 until the reservoir quantity gauge shows
a value that agrees with the range in the table that follows:
Table 303- Fluid Levels Limits
(7) Disconnect the auxiliary hose from the fill QD (1) or (2) and
from the GSE 099.
(8) Install the dust cap on the applicable fill QD (1) or (2).
(10) Record the quantity shown for the hydraulic reservoir of the
applicable hydraulic system.
(11) In the cockpit, in zone 220, set the MFD to the hydraulic
synoptic page.
(12) Record the fluid quantity indications for hydraulic system
No. 1 (1), No. 2 (5), or No. 3 (3). Refer to Figure 301.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-12-01-600-801-A/300
Page 303
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
NOTE:
The fluid level on the reservoir gauge must agree

with that on the cockpit display for each hydraulic
system.
(13) Release the pressure from the applicable hydraulic system

(AMM TASK 29-10-00-860-804-A/200).
(14) Decrease the pressure in the accumulator of the applicable
hydraulic system.
(15) Record the quantity shown for the reservoir of the
applicable hydraulic system.
(16) Record the fluid quantity indications for hydraulic system
No. 1 (1), No. 2 (5), or No. 3 (3). Refer to Figure 301.
NOTE:
The fluid level on the reservoir gauge must agree

with that on the cockpit display for each hydraulic
system.
(17) Compare the reservoir quantity indication for the applicable

hydraulic system, with the system pressurized and
depressurized, as follows:
Table 304 - Quantity Indication Limits
(18) Bleed the air from the applicable reservoir if the difference
in quantity indications is more than the limit in (AMM TASK
29-10-00-870-803-A/200).
D. Job Close-Up
OCCUR.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-12-01-600-801-A/300
Page 304
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK

the work area.
INJURIES.

OCCUR.
(3) Close the access to the applicable hydraulic compartment,
as follows:
(a) In zone 199, for hydraulic system No. 1, close access
door 199CL.
(b) In zone 198, for hydraulic system No. 2, close access
panel 198CR.
(c) In zone 314, for hydraulic system No. 3, close access
door 314AR.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-12-01-600-801-A/300
Page 305
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
3. TEMPERATURE
5. TEMPERATURE
2. QUANTITY
4. QUANTITY
6. QUANTITY
1. TEMPERATURE
PRESS
QTY
PRESS
SYS 1
90 33/64 C
728
PSI
QTY
PRESS
QTY
SYS 3
90 33/64 C
78 %
1080
SYS 2
90 33/64 C
PSI
27 %
760
PSI
21 %
PTU
LANDING GEAR
E LEV OUTBD
R U D UPPER
ENG 1 REVERSER
MF SPOILER
GND SPOILER 2
BRAKE OUTBD
LH
EL EV OUTBD RH
RUD LOW
ER
AI
L O U TB D
3/4
ELE V IN BD
AIL IN BD
ENG 2 REVERSER
MF SP OILER 5
GND SPOI
LER 1
BR A K E IN BD
NOSE WHEEL STR
EM ER/PARK BRAKE
A
Figure 301
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-12-01-600-801-A/300
Page 306
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
ZONE
190
ZONE
314
316
A
TYPICAL
Hydraulic Reservoir of Hydraulic Systems No. 1, No. 2, and No. 3

Figure 302 Sheet 1
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-12-01-600-801-A/300
Page 307
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
1. FILL
1
0
4
5
2. FILL
1
SKYDROL HYDRAULIC
RESERVOIR SERVICING UNIT
USED TO FILL THE HYDRAULIC RESERVOIRS WITH HYDRAULIC FLUID.

THIS GSE CAN ALSO BE USED TO FILL THE POWERPLANT HYDRAULIC RESERVOIR,
TAKING CARE NOT TO USE SKYDROL.
Hydraulic Reservoir of Hydraulic Systems No. 1, No. 2, and No. 3

Figure 302 Sheet 2
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-12-01-600-801-A/300
Page 308
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
GHSH TASK 12-12-01-600-802-A
1. Hydraulic Reservoir - Servicing (Routine Check)
A. General
hydraulic system reservoirs if the hydraulic quantity is below
the normal indication.
(2) The list of approved consumable is:
(a) HYJET-IV-A-PLUS
(b) SKYDROL LD-4
(c) SKYDROL 500B-4
(3) There is one reservoir for each hydraulic system. Hydraulic
system reservoir No. 1 has a volumetric capacity of 12.3
3
(750 in ). Hydraulic system reservoir No. 2 has a volumetric
3
capacity of 14.75 (900 in ). Hydraulic system reservoir
3
No. 3 has a volumetric capacity of 6.15 (375 in ).
(4) To correctly do the servicing of the hydraulic system when
the aircraft is on the ground, make sure that:
There is no excessive trapped air in the reservoir.

The brake and system accumulators are bleed to
nominal charge.
The mechanical gauge correlates with the EICAS
indication.
The spoilers and thrust reversers are stowed.
The pumps are off.
The indicated quantity falls within a percentage volume
versus temperature.
B. Job Set-Up
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-12-01-600-802-A/300
Page 301
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
(GHSH TASK 20-00-00-910-801-A/200).
(2) Make sure that the wheel chocks are installed to prevent
movement of the aircraft (ITEM GSE 070).
(4) Do a check of the accumulator pressure gauge of the
applicable hydraulic system (GHSH TASK 12-15-05-200801-A/300).
(6), or No. 3 (4) hydraulic systems. Refer to Figure 301.
(7) Bleed the air from the applicable hydraulic reservoir (AMM
TASK 29-10-00-870-803-A/200).
C. Hydraulic Reservoir - Servicing
follows:
(a) In zone 199, for No. 1 hydraulic system, open access
door 199CL.
(b) In zone 198, for No. 2 hydraulic system, open access
panel 198CR.
(c) In zone 314, for No. 3 hydraulic system, open access
door 314AR.
No. 1 and/or No.2 hydraulic reservoir (2). Refer to Figure
302.
(3) Compare the reservoir quantity indication of the applicable
hydraulic system.
WARNING:
EFFECTIVITY: ALL

12-12-01-600-802-A/300
Page 302
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
WARNING:

OCCUR.
WARNING:
MAKE SURE THAT THE LANDING GEAR SAFETY

PINS ARE INSTALLED. THIS IS TO PREVENT
INJURIES TO PERSONS AND DAMAGE TO
MATERIAL.
(4) Release the pressure from the hydraulic system with the ACMP
as follows:
(a)
In the cockpit, zone 220, on the HYDRAULIC control

panel, set the ELEC PUMP switch of the related system to
OFF (Figure 304):
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
SYS 1 - ELEC PUMP (8).

SYS 2 - ELEC PUMP (2).
SYS 3 - ELEC PUMP A (7).
SYS 3 - ELEC PUMP B (3).
The CAS message HYD PUMP NOT AUTO comes into

view.
In the cockpit, zone 220, on the HYDRAULIC control
panel, set the PTU switch (1) to OFF. Refer to Figure 304.
Put a DO NOT OPERATE tag on the HYDRAULIC control
panel.
The CAS message HYD PTU NOT AUTO comes into
view.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-12-01-600-802-A/300
Page 303
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
(5) In the cockpit, zone 220, for the No. 1 and No. 2 hydraulic
systems, slowly push and pull the emergency/parking brake
handle (9) (approximately 10 complete cycles). Do this until the
message EMERG BRK FAIL comes into view on the EICAS.
NOTE: When the hydraulic pressure is released, the
EMERG/PRKG BRAKE lamp (10) on the
EMERGENCY PARKING BRAKE CONTROL PANEL
will continue turned off.
(6) In the cockpit, zone 220, on the MFD, make sure that the
hydraulic synoptic page shows low pressure in the hydraulic
system.
No. 1 hydraulic system pressure (4) 344.7 kPa (50

psi).
psi).
psi).
NOTE: If the hydraulic synoptic page does not show low

pressure in the hydraulic system, operate these
hydraulic users until the hydraulic synoptic page shows
low pressure:
Outboard and inboard elevators
Outboard and inboard brakes
Upper and lower rudder
(7) Push and hold the palm button (AMM TASK 29-10-00-860804-A/200) on the dump thermal-relief valve for
approximately 20s to release the pressure from the
applicable hydraulic accumulator:
NOTE: Use a flashlight while you work in the No. 3
hydraulic system.
For the No. 1 and No. 2 hydraulic systems (1). Refer to
Figure 302.
For the No. 3 hydraulic system (1). Refer to Figure 303.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-12-01-600-802-A/300
Page 304
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
WARNING:

WARNING:

OCCUR.
(8) Do a test of the nitrogen pressure in the No. 1 and No. 2

accumulators, as follows:
(a)
(b)
Look at the pressure gauge of the applicable

accumulator-pressure gauge/fill assembly (1), for No.
1 and/or No. 2 hydraulic systems, or (2)for No. 3
hydraulic system. Refer to Figure 305 and Figure 306.
Make sure that the pressure is as follows:
Table 305 - Accumulator Charging Pressures Versus
Fluid Temperature
(9) If the pressure value is out of the range given in Table 305,
do the servicing of the accumulator (AMM TASK 12-15-05600-801-A/300).
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-12-01-600-802-A/300
Page 305
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
(10) Make sure that the reservoir quantity gauge shows a value
that agrees with the range in the table that follows:
Table 306 Fluid Level Limits
(11) If the quantity does not agree with the range in the table, do
as follows:
HYDRAULIC
SYSTEM
HAS
WARNING: THE
PHOSPHATE-ESTER HYDRAULIC FLUID.
PUT ON APPROVED RUBBER GOGGLES
AND RUBBER GLOVES WHEN YOU WORK
ON THE HYDRAULIC SYSTEM. IF THE
FLUID TOUCHES YOU, FLUSH YOUR SKIN
WITH WATER. IF IT GETS IN YOUR EYES,
FLUSH THEM WITH WATER AND GET
MEDICAL AID. THE FLUID CAN CAUSE
SKIN AND EYE IRRITATION.
(a)
Remove the dust cap from the applicable fill QD (1),

for No. 1 and/or No. 2 hydraulic systems, or (2) for No.
3 hydraulic system, on the GROUND SERVICE panel.
NOTE: Use a flashlight while you do work in the No. 3
hydraulic system compartment.
Make sure that GSE 099 has sufficient
hydraulic fluid to fill the hydraulic fluid
reservoirs. If you do not obey this precaution,
air can go into the hydraulic system.
(b)
Connect the auxiliary hose of GSE 099 to the fill QD

(1), for No. 1 and/or No. 2 hydraulic system, or (2), for
No. 3 hydraulic system, but keep the connection loose.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-12-01-600-802-A/300
Page 306
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
(c)
(d)
(e)
Put a stainless steel container (1 gal) below the

connection between the auxiliary hose of the
hydraulic-reservoir service-unit and the fill QD (1) or
(2).
Operate GSE 099 until a small amount of air-free
hydraulic fluid drains through the connection into the
stainless steel container (1 gal). This is an indication
that there is no air in the auxiliary hose.
Tighten the auxiliary hose fitting of GSE 099 to the fill
QD (1) or (2).
D. Job Close-Up
OCCUR.

the work area.
INJURIES.
ONLY
SPECIFIED
SOLVENTS,
CAUTION: USE
as follows:
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-12-01-600-802-A/300
Page 307
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
(a)
(b)
(c)
In zone 199, for hydraulic system No. 1, close access

door 199CL.
panel 198CR.
door 314AR.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-12-01-600-802-A/300
Page 308
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
3. TEMPERATURE
5. TEMPERATURE
2. QUANTITY
4. QUANTITY
6. QUANTITY
1. TEMPERATURE
PRESS
QTY
PRESS
SYS 1
90 33/64 C
728
PSI
QTY
PRESS
QTY
SYS 3
90 33/64 C
78 %
1080
SYS 2
90 33/64 C
PSI
27 %
760
PSI
21 %
PTU
LANDING GEAR
E LEV OUTBD
R U D UPPER
ENG 1 REVERSER
MF SPOILER
GND SPOILER 2
BRAKE OUTBD
LH
EL EV OUTBD RH
RUD LOW
ER
AI
L O U TB D
3/4
ELE V IN BD
AIL IN BD
ENG 2 REVERSER
MF SP OILER 5
GND SPOI
LER 1
BR A K E IN BD
NOSE WHEEL STR
EM ER/PARK BRAKE
A
Figure 301
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-12-01-600-802-A/300
Page 309
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
C
A
ZONE
190
1. PALM BUTTON
B
2
1
0
TYPICAL
B
2. QUANTITY
GAUGE
XX
XX
XX
C
No. 1 and No. 2 Hydraulic System Reservoir - Fluid Level Check
Figure 302
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-12-01-600-802-A/300
Page 310
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
A
ZONES
314
316
1. PALM BUTTON
2. QUANTITY
GAUGE
No. 3 Hydraulic System Reservoir - Fluid Level Check

Figure 303
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-12-01-600-802-A/300
Page 311
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
1. PTU
SWITCH
HYDRAULIC
PTU
AUTO
OFF
ON
ENG PUMP
SHUTOFF
S
Y
S
ELEC PUMP
AUTO
8. SYS 1
ELECTRIC
PUMP
ENG PUMP
SHUTOFF
OFF
S
Y
S
ELEC PUMP
AUTO
ON
OFF
ON
2. SYS 2
ELECTRIC
PUMP
SYS 3
7. SYS 3A
ELECTRIC
PUMP
ELEC PUMP B
AUTO
ELEC PUMP A
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
3. SYS 3B
ELECTRIC
PUMP
COCKPIT HYDRAULIC
CONTROL PANEL
(AMM SDS 311500)
EMERGENCY PARKING
BRAKE CONTROL PANEL
4. SYS 1
PRESSURE
5. SYS 3
PRESSURE
PRESS
PRESS
QTY
SYS 1
90 33/64 C
10. EMERG/PRKG
BRAKE LAMP
728
PSI
78
1080
6. SYS 2
PRESSURE
QTY
SYS 3
90 33/64 C
PSI
27
PRESS
QTY
SYS 2
90 33/64 C
%
B
760
PSI
21 %
PTU
D
LANDING GEAR
E LEV OUTBD
R U D UPPER
ENG 1 REVERSER
MF SPOILER
GND SPOILER 2
BRAKE OUTBD
LH
EL EV OUTBD RH
RUD LOW
ER
AI
L O U TB D
3/4
ELE V IN BD
AIL IN BD
ENG 2 REVERSER
MF SP OILER 5
GND SPOI
LER 1
BR A K E IN BD
NOSE WHEEL STR
EM ER/PARK BRAKE
MFD MULTFUNCTION DISPLAY

(AMM SDS 316100)
9. EMERGENCY/PARKING
BRAKE HANDLE
C
Hydraulic-System Synoptic Page- Depressurization
Figure 304
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-12-01-600-802-A/300
Page 312
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
ZONE
190
TYPICAL
5. PALM
BUTTON
1. PRESSURE
GAUGE
2
1
0
4. DUST CAP
4
5
2. CHARGING
VALVE
3. NUT
B
TYPICAL
1
TORQUE: 5.78 14.45 N.m (50 125 lb.in)
TORQUE: HAND TIGHT
No. 1 / No. 2 Hydraulic System-Accumulator - Pressure Level Check

Figure 305
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-12-01-600-802-A/300
Page 313
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
HYDRAULIC
SYSTEM (REF.)
A
ZONES
314
316
B
1. CHARGING
VALVE
GROUND SERVICE
PANEL (REF.)
2. PRESSURE
GAUGE
1
3. NUT
4. DUST CAP
5. PALM
BUTTON
C
TORQUE: 5.64 6.78 N.m (50 60 lb.in)
No. 3 Hydraulic System - Accumulator - Pressure Level Check

Figure 306
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-12-01-600-802-A/300
Page 314
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
ZONE
190
ZONE
314
316
A
TYPICAL
Hydraulic Reservoir of No. 1, 2, and 3 hydraulic System - Servicing

Figure 307 Sheet 1
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-12-01-600-802-A/300
Page 315
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
1. FILL
1
0
4
5
2. FILL
1
SKYDROL HYDRAULIC
RESERVOIR SERVICING UNIT
USED TO FILL THE HYDRAULIC RESERVOIRS WITH HYDRAULIC FLUID.

THIS GSE CAN ALSO BE USED TO FILL THE POWERPLANT HYDRAULIC RESERVOIR,
TAKING CARE NOT TO USE SKYDROL.
Hydraulic Reservoir of No. 1, 2, and 3 hydraulic System - Servicing

Figure 307 Sheet 2
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-12-01-600-802-A/300
Page 316
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
GHSH TASK 12-12-05-610-801-A
1. Emergency/Parking Brake Accumulator - Servicing
A. General
(1) This task gives the procedure to pressurize the
emergency/parking brake accumulator to the correct
pressure, with nitrogen.
(2) There are two accumulators, one (outboard brake assembly
circuit) is pressurized by the No. 1 hydraulic system and the
other (inboard brake assembly circuit) is pressurized by the
No. 2 hydraulic system.
(3) Data is given for the outboard brake-assembly accumulator.
Data for the inboard brake assembly accumulator, which is
different, is given in parentheses.
B. Job Set-Up
(GHSH TASK 20-00-00-910-801-A/200).
(2) You need to energize the aircraft to do a check of the
emergency/parking brake accumulator pressure. There are
2 procedures to energize the aircraft:
(a) Energize the aircraft with the APU (GHSH TASK 49-1000-910-801-A/200) or;
(b) Energize the aircraft with the GPU (GHSH TASK 24-4202-860-801-A/200).
(3) In the zone 199 (198), open the access door 199HL
(198JR).
(4) Make sure that the hydraulic pressure in the No. 1 (No. 2)
hydraulic system is released (AMM TASK 29-10-00-860804-A/200).
(5) Make sure that the hydraulic pressure in the outboard brake
circuit (inboard brake circuit) is released:
(a)
(b)
In the cockpit, operate the PARKING BRAKE handle

to release the hydraulic pressure in the brake circuit.
On the MFD (1), on the status page, look at the EMER
ACCU PSI value.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-12-05-610-801-A/300
Page 301
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
(c)
Continue to operate the PARKING BRAKE handle.

Stop the operation when there is no change in the
pressure value.
NOTE: When the hydraulic pressure in the brake
circuit is fully released, the EMER ACCU PSI
value is equal to the nitrogen pre-charge
pressure in the accumulator.
(6) Set the PARKING BRAKE handle to brakes off (handle fully
down).
C. Emergency/Parking Brake Accumulator - Servicing
SUBTASK 610-003-A
WARNING:
DO NOT LET HIGH PRESSURE GAS TOUCH

YOUR SKIN. GAS BUBBLES IN YOUR BLOOD CAN
KILL YOU.
WARNING:
PUT ON APPROVED SAFETY CLOTHING AND

GOGGLES WHEN
YOU
DO WORK
ON
PRESSURIZED SYSTEMS OR COMPONENTS.
PRESSURIZED
FLUID
AND
GAS
ARE
DANGEROUS AND CAN CAUSE INJURIES.
(1) On the MFD (1), on the status page, do a check of the pressure
in the accumulator (5). Refer to Figure 301 and Figure 303.
(2) Make sure that the nitrogen pre-charge pressure is equal to
that shown on the brake accumulator pre-charge chart Figure
302.
NOTE: A placard of the brake-accumulator pre-charge chart
Figure 302 is on the inside of the 199HL (198JR).
(3) If necessary, pressurize the accumulator (5) with nitrogen A-A59503 (Figure 301):
(a) Remove the blanking cap (2) from the charging connection
(6). Refer to Figure 301.
(b) Connect the supply hose (3) of the GSE 057 to the charging
connection (6). Refer to Figure 301.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-12-05-610-801-A/300
Page 302
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
(c) Loosen the nut (1) on the charging connection (6). Refer to
Figure 301.
(d) Open the regulator (4) until the gage on the GSE 057 shows
the correct pressure. Refer to Figure 301.
NOTE: The brake-accumulator pre-charge chart Figure
302 gives the correct pressure in the accumulator
(5) for the ambient temperature. Refer to
Figure 301.
(e) Close the regulator (4) to stop the flow of nitrogen to the
accumulator (5). Refer to Figure 301.
(f) Let the nitrogen pressure become stable:
1. After 10 minutes (to let the nitrogen pressure become
stable), make sure that the pressure on the gage has not
changed.
2. If necessary, adjust the pressure again to give the correct
value.
(g) In the cockpit, on the MFD (1), make sure that the status
page shows the correct pressure. Refer to Figure 303.
(h) Do a check of the hydraulic pressure in the accumulator (5)
(Figure 301):
1. Pressurize the No. 1 and No. 2 hydraulic systems (AMM
TASK 29-10-00-863-802-A/200).
2. Look at the gage on the GSE 057, the accumulator (5)
must show a system pressure of (19305 to 20684)
1379 kPa ((2800 to 3000) 200 psig). Refer to Figure
301.
3. In the cockpit, 220, on the HYDRAULIC control panel, set
the SYS 1 ELEC PUMP switch (1) and SYS 2 - ELEC
PUMP switch (2) to OFF. Refer to Figure 304.
(i)
If the system does not show the correct nitrogen pre-charge

and hydraulic pressure in the accumulator, do SUBTASK
610-003-A from step (d) to (h), maximum 3 times, until the
system shows the correct value.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-12-05-610-801-A/300
Page 303
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
(j)
Do SUBTASK 610-003-A from step (d) to (h) again until the

system shows the correct nitrogen pre-charge and hydraulic
pressure in the accumulator.
(k) Tighten the nut (1) on the charging connection (6). Refer to
Figure 301.
(l) Disconnect the supply hose (3) from the charging
connection (6). Refer to Figure 301.
(m) Use the torque wrench to torque the nut (1) to 5.65 - 6.78
N.m (50 - 60 lb.in). Refer to Figure 301.
(n) Install the blanking cap (2) on the charging connection (6).
D. Job Close-Up
(1) Do the procedures to put the aircraft back to its initial
condition (AMM TASK 32-00-00-860-802-A/200).
(2) Deenergize the aircraft. Refer to the applicable procedure:
(a) APU (GHSH TASK 49-10-00-910-802-A/200) or;
(b) GPU (GHSH TASK 24-42-02-860-802-A/200).
the work area.
(5) Close the access door 199HL (198JR).
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-12-05-610-801-A/300
Page 304
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
A
ZONE
198
199
1
1. NUT
2. BLANKING
CAP
3. SUPPLY
HIOSE
6. CHARGING
CONNECTION
5. ACCUMULATOR
NITROGEN SERVICING
REGULATOR (REF.)
4. REGULATOR
B
TORQUE: 5.68 6.78 N.m (50 60 lb.in)
Emergency/Parking Brake Accumulator - Pressurize With Nitrogen

Figure 301
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-12-05-610-801-A/300
Page 305
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
RECOMMENDED CHARGE RANGE

FOR ACCUMULATOR
TEMPERATURE F
58
40
22
14
32
50
68
86
104
122
140
6895
1000
900
MAX
800
IMU
IN
NOM
700
MIN
IMU
S
PRE
AL P
MP
SUR
RES
RES
6205
SUR
5516
E
SUR
4826
4137
600
500
60
158
7584
PRESSURE kPa (kilopascoal)
PRESSURE psi (pounds/square inch)
76
1100
3447
40
20
20
40
60
TEMPERATURE C
Emergency/Parking Brake Accumulator Ambient

Temperature/Accumulator Pressure Chart Figure 302
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-12-05-610-801-A/300
Page 306
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
A
1. MFD
BRAKES
EMER
ACCU
PSI
600
S
Y
S
2
S
Y
S
1 600
A
Emergency/Parking Brake Accumulator - Multi-Function Display
Figure 303
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-12-05-610-801-A/300
Page 307
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
HYDRAULIC CONTROL
PANEL
HYDRAULIC
ENG PUMP
SHUTOFF
ON
OFF
1. SYS 1
ELECTRIC
PUMP
ELEC PUMP
ELEC PUMP
AUTO
AUTO
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
SYS 3
ELEC PUMP A
ELEC PUMP B
ON
AUTO
OFF
OFF
S
Y
S
2
2. SYS 2
ELECTRIC
PUMP
ON
S
Y
S
1
ENG PUMP
SHUTOFF
PTU
AUTO
A
Emergency/Parking Brake Accumulator - Depressurization
Figure 304
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-12-05-610-801-A/300
Page 308
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
GHSH TASK 12-12-08-600-802-A
1. Main-Landing-Gear Shimmy Damper - Servicing
A. General
(1) This task gives the procedure to do the servicing for the
shimmy damper of the MLG.
(2) The approved cleaning material for this task are:
MEK
Solvent RHODIASOLVE E-23
CRC10900
CONTEC EX420602
(3) This procedure can be done with the aircraft on ground or

on jacks.
(4) Data is given for the left shimmy damper. Data for the right
shimmy damper that is different is given in parentheses.
B. Job Set-Up
WARNING:


of the landing gear (AMM TASK 32-00-00-860-801-A/200).
(2) Do the shimmy damper inspection. Refer to AMM TASK 3211-03-200-802-A/600.
(3) Put a GSE 083 on the two MLG wheel assemblies.
(4) Put a stainless steel container (1 gal) in position below the
shimmy damper.
WARNING:
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
ALWAYS PUT ON GLOVES AND GOGGLES TO

MAKE SURE THAT THE SKYDROL DOES NOT
TOUCH YOU. SKYDROL IS CORROSIVE AND
CAN CAUSE INJURIES TO YOUR EYES AND
SKIN.
12-12-08-600-802-A/300
Page 301
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
(5) Put on rubber gloves and rubber goggles to do the steps
where the SKYDROL LD-4 can touch you.
C. Main-Landing-Gear Shimmy Damper - Servicing
WARNING:
ALWAYS OBEY THE MANUFACTURERS HEALTH

AND SAFETY PRECAUTIONS WHEN YOU USE
CLEANING MATERIAL. DO NOT GET THIS
MATERIAL ON YOUR SKIN, IN YOUR EYES OR
MOUTH. PUT ON APPROVED PROTECTIVE
CLOTHING, GOGGLES AND GLOVES. CLEANING
MATERIAL IS DANGEROUS AND, IF YOU DO NOT
OBEY THESE PRECAUTIONS, INJURY CAN
OCCUR.
WARNING:

HYDRAULIC FLUID. DO NOT GET HYDRAULIC
FLUID ON YOUR SKIN, IN YOUR EYES OR
CLOTHING AND GOGGLES. HYDRAULIC FLUID IS
TOXIC AND CAN CAUSE INJURIES.
CAUTION:
REMOVE ALL HYDRAULIC FLUID THAT FALLS ON

THE AIRCRAFT SURFACES HYDRAULIC FLUID
CAN CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE AIRCRAFT
SURFACES.
(1) In zone 731 (zone 741), do the servicing of the shimmy damper
(6):
(a) Use a lint-free wiper cloth moist with the approved cleaning
material to clean the sight glass (8) and its edges.
(b) Look at the sight glass (8) and do a check to make sure the
shimmy damper (6) is filled correctly with SKYDROL LD-4.
(c) Look directly down on the sight glass (8) to do a correct
check, not from an angle.
(d) The shimmy damper (6) is serviced correctly when:
The indication band (black) (3) is aligned with MAX (DO

NOT OVERFILL).
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-12-08-600-802-A/300
Page 302
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
The indication band (black) (3) is between MAX (DO

NOT OVERFILL) and MIN (DO REFILL). Refer to Figure
302.
(e) The shimmy damper (6) must be serviced when:
The indication band (black) (3) is aligned with MIN (DO

REFILL).
The indication band (red) (4) can be seen. Refer to
Figure 302.
WARNING:

CLEANING MATERIAL. DO NOT GET THIS
MATERIAL ON YOUR SKIN, IN YOUR EYES OR
CLOTHING, GOGGLES AND GLOVES. CLEANING
MATERIAL IS DANGEROUS AND, IF YOU DO NOT
OBEY THESE PRECAUTIONS, INJURY CAN
OCCUR.
WARNING:

HYDRAULIC FLUID. DO NOT GET HYDRAULIC
FLUID ON YOUR SKIN, IN YOUR EYES OR
CLOTHING AND GOGGLES. HYDRAULIC FLUID IS
TOXIC AND CAN CAUSE INJURIES.
CAUTION:
REMOVE ALL HYDRAULIC FLUID THAT FALLS ON

THE AIRCRAFT SURFACES HYDRAULIC FLUID
CAN CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE AIRCRAFT
SURFACES.
(2) In zone 731 (zone 741), fill the shimmy damper (6) with
SKYDROL LD-4 (Figure 301).
WARNING:
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
PUT ON APPROVED SAFETY GLASSES

BEFORE YOU CUT LOCKWIRE. IF YOU DO
NOT OBEY THIS PRECAUTION, PIECES OF
12-12-08-600-802-A/300
Page 303
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
LOCKWIRE CAN HIT YOUR EYES AND
CAUSE INJURIES.
(a) Remove and discard the lockwire (5) from the nut (4). Refer
to Figure 301.
(b) Remove the nut (4) from the shaft (1). Refer to Figure 301.
(c) Remove the cap (3) from the charging connector (2). Refer
to Figure 301.
(d) Make sure that a GSE 287 (Skydrol) is connected to the
hose of a GSE 100.
(e) Connect the GSE 287 loosely to the charging connector (2).
(f) Operate the GSE 100 and bleed the hose. Continue to
bleed the hose and at the same time tighten the GSE 287
on the charging connector (2). Refer to Figure 301.
(g) Open the charging connector (2). Refer to Figure 301.
(h) Use a lint-free wiper cloth and solvent RHODIASOLVE E-23
to immediately clean any SKYDROL LD-4 that spills.
(i) Remove and discard the lockwire (5) from the plug (7).
(j) Use a lint-free wiper cloth to put in position around the plug
(7). Refer to Figure 301.
NOTE: Hydraulic fluid under pressure will be released
from the plug when the plug is opened.
WARNING:
CAREFULLY OPEN THE PLUG WHEN YOU

BLEED THE SHIMMY DAMPER. THE SHIMMY
DAMPER
IS
PRESSURIZED
WITH
HYDRAULIC FLUID. THE RELEASE OF
HYDRAULIC PRESSURE THAT IS NOT
CONTROLLED CAN CAUSE INJURIES.
(k) Carefully open the plug (7) one to two turns to release the
hydraulic pressure. Refer to Figure 301.
(l) Operate the GSE 100 until hydraulic fluid shows at the plug
(7) and shimmy damper (6) interface. Refer to Figure 301.
(m) Continue to operate the GSE 100 and close the plug (7).
(3) Fill the shimmy damper (6) to the correct level:
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-12-08-600-802-A/300
Page 304
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
(a) Operate the GSE 100 and fill the shimmy damper (6).
(b) Continue to operate the GSE 100 until the indication line
(black) (3) in the sight glass (8) is aligned with MAX (DO
NOT OVERFILL) Figure 302 on the shimmy damper (6).
Stop the operation of the GSE 100, do not overfill the
shimmy damper. Refer to Figure 302.
(4) Complete the servicing of the shimmy damper (6). Refer to
(Figure 301):
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
Close the charging connector (2). Refer to Figure 301.

Remove the GSE 287 from the charging connector (2).
Use a torque wrench to torque the charging connector
(2) to 5.0 - 8.5 N.m (44 75 lb.in) (AMM TASK 20-10-01910-801-A/200). Refer to Figure 301.
Install the cap (3) and tighten with your fingers. Refer to
Figure 301.
Install the nut (4) on the shaft (1). Refer to Figure 301.
Use a torque wrench to torque the nut (4) to 17 - 23 N.m
(150 - 204 lb.in) (AMM TASK 20-10-01-910-801-A/200).
WARNING:
CAREFULLY OPEN THE PLUG WHEN YOU

BLEED THE SHIMMY DAMPER. THE SHIMMY
DAMPER
IS
PRESSURIZED
WITH
HYDRAULIC FLUID. THE RELEASE OF
HYDRAULIC PRESSURE THAT IS NOT
CONTROLLED CAN CAUSE INJURIES.
(g) Safety the nut (4) with lockwire (5) (AMM TASK 20-1002-910-801-A/200). Refer to Figure 301.
(h) Use a torque wrench to torque the plug (7) to 5 - 8.5
N.m (44 - 75 lb.in) (AMM TASK 20-10-01-910-801A/200). Refer to Figure 301.
(i) Safety the plug (7) with lockwire (5) (AMM TASK 20-1002-910-801-A/200). Refer to Figure 301.
D. Job Close-Up
(1) Put the aircraft back to its initial condition:
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-12-08-600-802-A/300
Page 305
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
(a) Remove and safely discard the lint-free wiper cloth as
necessary.
(b) Remove the stainless steel container (1 gal) and if
necessary, safely discard the used SKYDROL LD-4.
(c) Remove the GSE 083 from the two MLG wheel
assemblies.
(d) Put the aircraft back to its initial condition (AMM TASK
32-00-00-860-802-A/200).
(e) Remove all tools, equipment and unwanted materials
from the work area.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-12-08-600-802-A/300
Page 306
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
B
A
ZONE
731
741
3. CAP
2
4. NUT
2. CHARGING
CONNECTOR
1. SHAFT
5. LOCKWIRE
5. LOCKWIRE
6. SHIMMY
DAMPER
7. PLUG
TORQUE: 5.0 8.5 N.m (44 75 lb.in)
TORQUE: 17 23 N.m (150 204 lb.in)
8. SIGHT
GLASS
Main-Landing-Gear Shimmy Damper - Servicing

Figure 301
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-12-08-600-802-A/300
Page 307
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
MIN (DO REFILL)
MIN (DO REFILL)
MAX (DO NOT OVERFILL)
C
PISTON (METALLIC BRONZE)
(REF.)
MIN (DO REFILL)
MIN (DO REFILL)

SHIMMY DAMPER
ON MAXIMUM
(SERVICEABLE)

(REF.)
MIN (DO REFILL)
MIN (DO REFILL)

SHIMMY DAMPER
ON MINIMUM
(UNSERVICEABLE)
D
MIN (DO REFILL)
3. INDICATION
BAND (BLACK)

(REF.)
MIN (DO REFILL)

SHIMMY DAMPER
SHOWS INDICATION
BAND (RED)
(UNSERVICEABLE)
3. INDICATION
BAND (BLACK)
3. INDICATION
BAND (RED)
3. INDICATION
BAND (BLACK)
Main-Landing-Gear Shimmy Damper - Servicing

Figure 302
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-12-08-600-802-A/300
Page 308
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
GHSH TASK 12-12-11-600-801-A
1. Hydraulic System Ecology Bottle - Servicing
A. General
ecology bottles in the No. 1, No. 2 and No. 3 hydraulic
systems.
(2) There are two ecology bottles in each hydraulic system.
(3) The No. 1 and No. 2 hydraulic-system ecology bottles are
installed on each side of the fuselage, aft of the wing, under
the wing-to-fuselage fairing.
(4) The No. 3 hydraulic system ecology bottles are installed in
the aft hydraulic compartment, aft of the rear pressure
bulkhead.
(5) There is one ecology bottle for the ACMP and one for the
hydraulic reservoir in each system.
B. Job Set-Up
WARNING:


(GHSH TASK 20-00-00-910-801-A/200).
follows:
(a)
(b)
(c)
In zone 199, for the No. 1 hydraulic system, open the

access door 199HL.
access door 198JR.
access door 314BR.
NOTE: Use a workstand (rear fuselage) while you
work in this compartment.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-12-11-600-801-A/300
Page 301
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
C. Ecology Bottle Servicing
WARNING:

WARNING:

OCCUR.
(1) Do the servicing of the No. 1 and/or No. 2 hydraulic system

ecology bottles (3) as follows:
(a) Place the stainless steel container (1 gal) below the work
area.
(b) Tag and remove the hoses (1) from the ecology bottle lid
(2).
CAUTION: PUT CAPS ON ALL LINES AND FITTINGS AND
MAKE SURE THAT THE AREA IS CLEAN AND
FREE OF ALL UNWANTED FLUID. DIRT CAN
CAUSE SYSTEM CONTAMINATION, LEAKAGE,
AND DAMAGE TO COMPONENTS.
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
(j)
(k)
(l)
Put protective cap/plug on all the open hoses.

Remove the lid (2).
Open the latch (5) to release the ecology bottle (3).
Remove the ecology bottle (3).
Drain the hydraulic fluid from the ecology bottle (3).
Install the ecology bottle (3) in the mount (4).
Close the latch (5) on the ecology bottle clamp.
Put the lid (2) on the ecology bottle (3).
Remove the protective cap/plug from the hoses (1).
Put the hoses (1) in the lid (2).
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-12-11-600-801-A/300
Page 302
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
(m) Remove the tags.
WARNING:

WARNING:

OCCUR.
(2) Do the servicing of the No. 3 hydraulic system ecology bottles

(3) as follows:
NOTE: Hydraulic fluid under pressure will be released from
the plug when the plug is opened.
CAUTION: PUT CAPS ON ALL LINES AND FITTINGS AND
MAKE SURE THAT THE AREA IS CLEAN AND
FREE OF ALL UNWANTED FLUID. DIRT CAN
CAUSE SYSTEM CONTAMINATION, LEAKAGE,
AND DAMAGE TO COMPONENTS.
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
(j)
Put protective cap/plug on all the open hoses (1).

Remove the lid (2).
Open the latch (5) to release the ecology bottle (3).
Place the stainless steel container (1 gal) below the work
area.
Tag and remove the hoses (1) from the ecology bottle lid
(2).
Drain the hydraulic fluid from the ecology bottle (3).
Install the ecology bottle (3) in the mount (4).
Close the latch (5) on the ecology bottle clamp.
Install the lid (2) on the ecology bottle (3).
Remove the protective cap/plug from the hoses (1).
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-12-11-600-801-A/300
Page 303
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
(k) Install the hoses (1) in the lid (2).
(l) Remove the tags.
D. Job Close-Up
OCCUR.
the work area.
WARNING:
ALWAYS OBEY THE MANUFACTURERS

HYDRAULIC FLUID IS TOXIC AND CAN
CAUSE INJURIES.
CAUTION: USE
ONLY
SPECIFIED
SOLVENTS,
as follows:
(a) In zone 199, for the No. 1 hydraulic system, close the
access door 199HL.
(b) In zone 198, for the No. 2 hydraulic system, close the
access door 198JR.
(c) In zone 314, for the No. 3 hydraulic system, close the
access door 314BR.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-12-11-600-801-A/300
Page 304
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
A
ZONE
190
A
1. HOSE (2x)
2. LID
3. BOTTLE
C
5. LATCH
4. MOUNT
Ecology Bottle of the No.1 and No. 2 Hydraulic Systems - Servicing

Figure 301
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-12-11-600-801-A/300
Page 305
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
A
ZONES
314
316
1. HOSE (4x)
2. LID (2x)
3. BOTTLE (2x)
4. MOUNT
C
5. LATCH
B
C
Ecology Bottle of the No.3 Hydraulic System - Servicing

Figure 302
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-12-11-600-801-A/300
Page 306
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
GHSH TASK 12-13-01-200-801-A
1. Engine Oil Level - MFD Check
A. General
(1) This task gives the procedure to do a check of the engine oil
level on the MFD.
(2) The MFDs in the cockpit give the indication of the engine oil
level.
B. Job Set-Up
WARNING:


(GHSH TASK 20-00-00-910-801-A/200).
TASK 24-42-02-860-801-A/200).
C. Engine Oil Level - General Visual Check
(1) EFFECTIVITY: ON ACFT WITH ENGINE
SOFTWARE VERSION UP TO 10EV5.32
Do a check of the engine oil level as follows:
FADEC
(a) Put your finger on the touchpad of the CCD, chose the
system page in DU 2 or 4, and push the enter button.
(b) Choose the status page and push the enter button again.
(c) On DU 2 or 4, do a check of the synoptic figure ENGINE
OIL LEVEL that shows oil quantity:
13.87 (14.6 qt) - Full tank.

7.1 - 13.7 (7.5 - 14.5 qt) - Service as required. Refer
to Table 301.
Below 7.1 (7.5 qt) - Servicing.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-13-01-200-801-A/300
Page 301
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
(2) EFFECTIVITY: ON ACFT WITH ENGINE FADEC
SOFTWARE VERSION UP TO 10EV5.32
Do a check of the oil tank capacity and operation range based
on a maximum permissible oil consumption rate of 0.38 /h
(0.40 qt/h) in the table below:
NOTE: To minimize variation in the oil consumption
calculation, the oil quantity level should be examined
after the engine has been shut down for more than 5
min, but not more than 30 min.
Table 301 - Oil Tank Capacity and Operation Range
(3) EFFECTIVITY: ON ACFT WITH ENGINE

SOFTWARE VERSION 10EV5.40 AND ON
Do a check of the engine oil level as follows:
(a)
(b)
(c)
FADEC
Put your finger on the touchpad of the CCD, chose the

system page in DU 2 or 4, and push the enter button.
Choose the status page and push the enter button again.
On DU 2 or 4, do a check of the synoptic figure ENGINE
OIL LEVEL that shows oil quantity:
13.87 (14.6 qt) - Full tank.
8.3 - 13.7 (8.8 - 14.5 qt) - Service as required. Refer
to Table 302.
Below 8.3 (8.8 qt) - Servicing.
(4) EFFECTIVITY: ON ACFT WITH ENGINE FADEC

SOFTWARE VERSION 10EV5.40 AND ON
Do a check of the oil tank capacity and operation range based
on a maximum permissible oil consumption rate of 0.38 /h
(0.40 qt/h) in the table below:
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-13-01-200-801-A/300
Page 302
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
NOTE: To minimize variation in the oil consumption
calculation, the oil quantity level should be examined
after the engine has been shut down for more than 5
min, but not more than 30 min.
Table 302 - Oil Tank Capacity and Operation Range
D. Job Close-Up
(GHSH TASK 24-42-02-860-802-A/200).
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-13-01-200-801-A/300
Page 303
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
DISPLAY UNIT 2
DISPLAY UNIT 4
A
ENTER BUTTON
TOUCHPAD
ENTER
BUTTON
Map
Plan
FLIGHTSKJ 9999 23H14

TAT 15 o C
SAT 12 Co
G.W.45123KG
Status
SERVICE
ENG OIL LEVEL
ELECTRICAL
Systems
DOORS
FUELING COMPT
BATT1
24.5V
BATT2
24.5V
7.9 QT 10.1
BRAKES
EMER
ACCU
PSI
S
Y
S
1
3000
S
Y
S
2
3000
OB
250
IB
250
IB
250
TEMP
o
C
OB
250
B
Engine Oil Level - General Visual Check
Figure 301
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-13-01-200-801-A/300
Page 304
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
GHSH TASK 12-13-01-200-802-A
1. Engine Oil Level - Engine Check
A. General
(1) This task gives the procedure to do the check of the engine
oil level on the engine.
B. Job Set-Up
WARNING:

WARNING:
OBEY
ALL
POWERPLANT
SAFETY
PRECAUTIONS. IF YOU ARE NOT CAREFUL
DURING THE POWERPLANT MAINTENANCE,
INJURY TO PERSONS AND/OR DAMAGE TO
WARNING:
DO NOT TOUCH THE EXHAUST DUCT AND

ENGINE COMPONENTS UNTIL THEY ARE
COOL. THE TEMPERATURE CAN STAY HIGH
FOR A LONG TIME AFTER THE ENGINE
STOPS. IF YOU DO NOT OBEY THIS
PRECAUTION, YOU CAN BURN YOURSELF.

(GHSH TASK 20-00-00-910-801-A/200).
(AMM TASK 71-00-00-910- 801-A/200).
(3) Open the oil servicing access-door (AMM TASK 06-43-00800-801-A/100):
(a)
For the LH engine, open this access door:

412BR
(b) For the RH engine, open this access door:

422BR
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-13-01-200-802-A/300
Page 301
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
C. Engine Oil Level - Check on the Engine
(1) Do a check of the engine oil level as follows:
(a)
Examine the oil level through the sight glass (oil-tanklevel indicator) on the oil tank. Refer to Figure 301.
NOTE:
(b)
To minimize variation in the oil consumption

calculation, the oil quantity level should be
examined after the engine has been shut down
for more than 5 min, but not more than 30 min.
If necessary, fill the oil tank up to the necessary level

(GHSH TASK 12-13-01-612-801- A/300).
D. Job Close-Up
(1) Close the oil servicing access doors as follows:
(a)
For the LH engine, close this access door:

412BR
(b)
For the RH engine, close this access door:

422BR
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-13-01-200-802-A/300
Page 302
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
A
FILL CAP
B
OIL TANK
OIL
FULL
1 QT
LOW
2 QT
LOW
1. SIGHT GLASS
LEVEL
B
Engine Oil Level - Check on the Engine
Figure 301 Sheet 1
EFFECTIVITY: ON ENGINE PRE-MOD SB GE CF34-10E 72-0037
12-13-01-200-802-A/300
Page 303
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
FILL CAP
OIL
OIL TANK
A
FULL
1. SIGHT GLASS
1 QT
LOW
LEVEL
B
Engine Oil Level - Check on the Engine
Figure 301 Sheet 2
EFFECTIVITY: ON ENGINE POST-MOD SB GE CF34-10E 72-0037
12-13-01-200-802-A/300
Page 304
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
GHSH TASK 12-13-01-612-801-A
1. Engine Oil - Filling
A. General
(1) This task gives the procedure to fill the engine with oil.
(2) EFFECTIVITY: ON ENGINE PRE-MOD SB GE CF34-10E
72-0037
The capacity of the oil tank is 14.8 (15.6 qt).
(3) EFFECTIVITY: ON ENGINE POST-MOD SB GE CF34-10E
72-0037
The capacity of the oil tank is 13.8 (14.6 qt).
(4) List of approved engine lubrication oils:
AEROSHELL TURBINE OIL 500

Lubricant TURBO OIL 2389
BP TURBO OIL 2380
BP TURBO OIL 2197
Oil MOBIL JET OIL II
(5) For more information, refer to the latest revision of the

GEAE CF34-10E SB 79-0004.
B. Job Set-Up
WARNING:
BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU DO WORK ON

ENGINE PARTS IMMEDIATELY AFTER THE
ENGINE STOPS. ENGINE PARTS CAN BE HOT.
DO NOT TOUCH HOT ENGINE PARTS
WITHOUT GLOVES BECAUSE THESE PARTS
CAN CAUSE INJURY.
WARNING:

EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-13-01-612-801-A/300
Page 301
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
(GHSH TASK 20-00-00-910-801-A/200).
of the powerplant (AMM TASK 71-00-00-910-801-A/200).
(3) Open the oil servicing access-door (AMM TASK 06-43-00800-801-A/100):
(a)
For the LH engine, open this access door:

412BR
For the RH engine, open this access door:
422BR
(b)
C. Engine Oil - Filling

WARNING:
ENGINE OIL IS TOXIC AND FLAMMABLE. USE

PERSONAL PROTECTION EQUIPMENT, IN A
WELL-VENTILATED AREA.
CAUTION:
DO NOT LET ENGINE LUBRICANT OIL DROP IN

THE ENGINE HIGH-STAGE BLEED VALVE.
DAMAGE TO THE MAIN COMPONENTS OF THE
BLEED SYSTEM CAN OCCUR.
(1) Open the engine-oil filler cap as follows:

(a)
(b)
(c)
Lift the handle on the engine-oil filler cap to the unlocked

position.
Turn the handle on the engine-oil filler cap CCW to the
OPEN position.
Remove the engine-oil filler cap.
(2) EFFECTIVITY: ON ENGINE PRE-MOD SB GE CF34-10E 720037

Add oil through the gravity fill port of the oil tank to fill the oil
reservoir. Make sure that the oil level is not higher than the 1QT
tank mark limit.
NOTE:
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
Do not mix different types of oil. For more information,

refer to the latest revision of the GEAE CF34-10E
Engine Manual (EMM TASK 72-00-00-700-807/1300),
subtask 72-00-00-760-223.
12-13-01-612-801-A/300
Page 302
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
(3)
EFFECTIVITY: ON ENGINE POST-MOD SB GE CF3410E 72-0037

Add oil through the gravity fill port of the oil tank to fill the oil
reservoir. Make sure that the oil level is not higher than the
FULL tank mark limit.
NOTE:
(4)
Do not mix different types of oil. For more information,

refer to the latest revision of the GEAE CF34-10E
Engine Manual (EMM TASK 72-00-00-700-807/1300),
subtask 72-00-00-760-223.
Install the engine-oil filler cap on the oil tank as follows:

(a) Align the lock of the engine-oil filler cap with the slots
in the gravity fill port and install the engine-oil filler cap.
(b) Turn the handle of the engine-oil filler cap CW to the
CLOSED position.
(c) Push the handle of the engine-oil filler cap down to the
locked position.
(5)
(6)
Clean spilled oil with a lint-free wiper cloth.

Make sure that you installed the engine-oil filler cap
correctly.
D. Job Close-Up
(1) Close the oil-servicing access door (AMM TASK 06-43-00800-801-A/100):
(a)
(b)
For the LH engine, close this access door:

412BR
For the RH engine, close this access door:
422BR
(2) Do the check of the engine oil level on the MFD (GHSH
TASK 12-13-01-200-801-A/300).
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-13-01-612-801-A/300
Page 303/304
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
GHSH TASK 12-13-05-200-801-A
1. APU Oil level - Check
A. General
(1) This task gives the procedures to do the check of the APU
oil level.
(2) The oil level sight glass is on the front of the APU gearbox.
(3) The oil level sight glass is in zone 352.
B. Job Set-Up
WARNING:

WARNING:
MAKE SURE THAT THE APU CONTROL

MASTER SWITCH IS IN THE OFF POSITION.
THIS IS TO PREVENT AN APU ACCIDENTAL
OPERATION. IF YOU DO NOT OBEY THIS
PRECAUTION, DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT AND
INJURY TO PERSONS CAN OCCUR.

(GHSH TASK 20-00-00-910-801-A/200).
TASK 24-42-02-860-801-A/200).
ASC CMD PWR-SPDA2 (CBMENU/CB BY SYS/APU)

APU FADEC-SPDA2 (CBMENU/CB BY SYS/APU)
APU FUEL SOV OPN-SPDA2 (CBMENU/CB BY SYS/APU)
(4) Remove the access panel 351GL.
(5) Unlatch and open the air inlet silencer.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-13-05-200-801-A/300
Page 301
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
C. APU Oil Level - Check
WARNING:
OBEY
ALL
POWERPLANT
SAFETY
WARNING:
DO NOT LET JET FUELAND LUBRICATING OILS

TOUCH YOU. THESE FLUIDS CAUSE INJURY TO
THE SKIN.
(1) Check the APU oil as follows:

(a) Check the level of the oil in the oil level sight glass (1).
(b) The oil level must be in the FULL mark on the oil level
sight glass (1).
(c) If necessary, fill the oil system to the FULL mark on the oil
level sight glass (1) (GHSH TASK 12-13-05-612-801A/300).
D. Job Close-Up
(1) Close and latch the air inlet silencer.
(2) Install the access panel 351GL.

(GHSH TASK 24-42-02-860-802-A/200).
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-13-05-200-801-A/300
Page 302
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
ZONES
351
352
C
1. OIL LEVEL
SIGHT GLASS
B
APU Oil Level Check
Figure 301
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-13-05-200-801-A/300
Page 303/304
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
GHSH TASK 12-13-05-612-801-A
1. APU Oil - Filling
A. General
(1) This task gives the procedures to fill the APU oil system.
(2) List of approved APU lubrication oils:
(a) Type 1:
1.
(b)
Oil lubricant TURBO OIL 2389
Type 2:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
AEROSHELL TURBINE OIL 500

Oil EXXON TURBO OIL 2380
Oil MOBIL JET OIL II
Oil BP TURBO OIL 2197
Oil MOBIL JET OIL 291
(3) The filler cap is on the front of the APU gearbox.

B. Job Set-Up
WARNING:

WARNING:
MAKE SURE THAT THE APU CONTROL

MASTER SWITCH IS IN THE OFF POSITION.
THIS IS TO PREVENT AN APU ACCIDENTAL
OPERATION. IF YOU DO NOT OBEY THIS
PRECAUTION, DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT AND
INJURY TO PERSONS CAN OCCUR.

(GHSH TASK 20-00-00-910-801-A/200).
TASK 24-42-02-860-801-A/200).
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-13-05-612-801-A/300
Page 301
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK

APU FUEL SOV OPN-SPDA2 (CBMENU/CB BY
SYS/APU)
(4) Remove the access panel 351GL.

(5) Unlatch and open the air inlet silencer.
C. APU Oil System - Filling
WARNING:
OBEY
ALL
POWERPLANT
SAFETY
WARNING:
DO NOT LET JET FUELAND LUBRICATING OILS

TOUCH YOU. THESE FLUIDS CAUSE INJURY TO
THE SKIN.
(1) Fill the APU oil system as follows:

(a) Make sure that the magnetic drain plug (1) is installed.
(b) Make sure that all oil system components are correctly
installed and tightened.
(c) Open the APU oil fill cap (3).
(d) If it is necessary to change the brand or type of oil, do the
steps that follow:
1. Drain the oil system (AMM TASK 12-13-05-680-801A/300).
2. Remove and discard the oil filter element (AMM TASK
49-91-03-000-801-A/400).
3. Install a new oil filter element (AMM TASK 49-91-03400-801-A/400).
CAUTION:
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
DO NOT MIX TYPES OR BRANDS OF OIL

WHEN YOU ADD OR REPLACE THE OIL IN
12-13-05-612-801-A/300
Page 302
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
THE APU. INCORRECT OILS CAN CAUSE
DAMAGE TO THE APU.
(e) Add oil until the oil level is at the FULL mark at the sight
glass (2).
NOTE: The APU oil capacity is 3.90 (4.12 qt).
If the APU will be started at cold operation
conditions (below - 40 C, - 40 F), use Type I oil
(MIL-PRF-7808).
(f) Close and lock the oil fill cap (1).
(g) If the oil brand or type was changed, do the steps that
follow:
1. Install the air inlet silencer (AMM TASK 49-16-01-400801-A/400).
2. Start the APU and operate it for three minutes with no
load (GHSH TASK 49-10-00-910-801-A/200).
3. Stop the APU (GHSH TASK 49-10-00-910-802-A/200).
4. Drain the oil system (AMM TASK 12-13-05-680-801A/300).
5. Add oil until the oil level is at the FULL mark again.
6. Close and lock the oil fill cap.
D. Job Close-Up
(1) Close and latch the air inlet silencer.
(2) Install the access panel 351GL.
APU FUEL SOV OPN-SPDA2 (CBMENU/CB BY
SYS/APU)
(GHSH TASK 24-42-02-860-802-A/200).
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-13-05-612-801-A/300
Page 303
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
A
ZONES
351
352
A
3. OIL FILL
CAP
2. OIL LEVEL
SIGHT GLASS
1. MAGNETIC
DRAIN PLUG
APU Oil System - Filling

Figure 301
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-13-05-612-801-A/300
Page 304
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
GHSH TASK 12-13-09-210-801-A
1. Integrated Drive Generator Oil Level - Check
A. General
(1) This task gives the procedure to do the check of the IDG oil
level and the DPI.
(2) There are two IDGs. IDG 1 is in zone 416 and IDG 2 is in
zone 426.
B. Job Set-Up
WARNING:


(GHSH TASK 20-00-00-910-801-A/200).
of the powerplant system (AMM TASK 71-00-00-910-801A/200).
TASK 24-42-02-860-801-A/200).
WARNING:
(5)

ENGINE COMPONENTS UNTIL THEY ARE
COOL. THE TEMPERATURE CAN STAY HIGH
FOR A LONG TIME AFTER THE ENGINE
STOPS. IF YOU DO NOT OBEY THIS
PRECAUTION, YOU CAN BURN YOURSELF.
For IDG 1, open the access door 413BL (AMM TASK 06-4300-800-801-A/100).
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-13-09-210-801-A/600
Page 601
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
(6)
For IDG 2, open the access door 423BL (AMM TASK 06-4300-800-801-A/100).
C. Integrated-Drive-Generator (IDG) Oil Level - Visual Check

WARNING:
BEFORE YOU DO WORK ON OR NEAR THE IDG,

MAKE SURE THAT IT IS COOL. THE
COMPONENTS CAN BE HOT AND CAN CAUSE
INJURY TO PERSONS.
WARNING:

ENGINE COMPONENTS UNTIL THEY ARE COOL.
THE TEMPERATURE CAN STAY HIGH FOR A
LONG TIME AFTER THE ENGINE STOPS. IF YOU
DO NOT OBEY THIS PRECAUTION, YOU CAN
BURN YOURSELF.
CAUTION:
BEFORE YOU DO A CHECK OF THE IDG OIL

LEVEL, MAKE SURE THAT THE OIL LEVEL IS
STABLE. THE OIL LEVEL BECOMES STABLE
WHEN THE IDG IS COLD TO THE TOUCH. IF YOU
DO NOT DO THIS, THERE WILL BE AN
INCORRECT OIL LEVEL IN THE IDG. DO NOT FILL
THE IDG WITH OIL IN THIS CONDITION. THIS CAN
CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE IDG.
(1) Do a check of the IDG oil level and the DPI (2) as follows:
NOTE: You must do a check of the oil level when the IDG is
sufficiently cold. With the IDG hot, the thermal
expansion of the oil can cause incorrect check of oil
level.
(a) Examine the DPI (2) for a red indicator button extended.
1. If the red indicator button is extended, replace the IDG
(AMM MPP 24-21-01/401).
(b)
With a flashlight examine the sight glass (1) indicator

for the correct oil level. The oil level is correct when
the oil meniscus is in the green zone.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-13-09-210-801-A/600
Page 602
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
1. If the oil level is above the green zone on the sight
glass (1), drain the oil (AMM TASK 12-13-09-680801-A/300).
2. If the oil level is below the green zone on the sight
glass (1), do the IDG oil servicing (AMM TASK 1213-09-610-801-A/300).
D. Job Close-Up
(1) For IDG 1, close the access door 413BL (AMM TASK 0643-00-800-801-A/100).
(2) For IDG 2, close the access door 423BL (AMM TASK 0643-00-800-801-A/100).
the work area.
(GHSH TASK 24-42-02-860-802-A/200).
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-13-09-210-801-A/600
Page 603
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
B
413 BL
423 BL
A
ZONE
410
420
C
D
1. SIGHT
GLASS
OVER
FILLED
2. DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE
INDICATOR (DPI)
GREEN
RED
CHECK
COLD
NORMAL
RESET
EXTENDED
C
D
ADD
OIL
Integrated-Drive-Generator (IDG) Oil Level Visual Check

Figure 601
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-13-09-210-801-A/600
Page 604
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
GHSH TASK 12-14-01-613-801-A
1. Potable Water System - Filling
A. General
(1) This task gives the procedure to fill the potable water tank.
(2) You can do this procedure with the external AC power
supply connected to the aircraft or you can use the
batteries.
B. Job Set-Up
WARNING:


(GHSH TASK 20-00-00-910-801-A/200).
(2) Use the MCDU (AMM SDS 34-61-00/1), to make sure that
these circuit breakers are closed:
WATER WASTE CTRL1-LICC (DC GND SVC BUS)

WATER WASTE CTRL2-LICC (DC BUS 1)
WATERWASTE CTRL3-AICC (HOT BATT BUS 2)
SPDA1 AC GND SVC-LICC (AC GND SVC BUS)
(3) Open access door 151AL.

C. Potable Water System Filling
EFFECTIVITY: ON EMBRAER 190 LINEAGE ACFT WITHOUT
SHOWER
WARNING:
DO NOT TOUCH THE DRAIN MAST. IF YOU

TOUCH IT, YOU WILL BE BURNED.
(1) To do the filling procedure with an external AC power supply,

do as follows:
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-14-01-613-801-A/300
Page 301
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
(a) Connect the external AC power supply to the aircraft
(GHSH TASK 24-42-02-860-801-A/200).
(b) Remove the protective cap (4) from the fill/drain nipple (3).
(c) Connect the hose of the potable water cart (GSE 052) to
the water fill/drain nipple (3). Refer to Figure 301, Sheet 2.
(d) Set the FILL/DRAIN switch (6) to the FILL position. Wait
10 seconds to set the fill/drain valve. Refer to Figure 301,
Sheet 2.
CAUTION:
THE MAXIMUM PRESSURE FOR FILLING IS

379.3 KPA (55 PSI).
(e) Start the water supply and fill the tank with water until the
FULL/DRAIN indicator (5) shows FULL. Refer to Figure
301, Sheet 2.
(f) On the CMS (1), make sure that the water quantityindication shows the correct level. Refer to Figure 301,
Sheet 1.
(g) Set the FILL/DRAIN switch (6) to the NORMAL position.
Wait 10 seconds to set the fill/drain valve. Refer to Figure
301, Sheet 2.
(h) Close the water supply.
(i) Disconnect the potable water cart (GSE 052).
(j) Put the protective cap (4) back on the fill/drain nipple (3).
NOTE: Let all unwanted water drain before you put the
protective cap on the fill/drain nipple.
Where there are freezing conditions, after the
water drainage, we recommend that you wait
approximately 30 minutes to put the protection
cap on the fill/drain nipple to make sure that all
residual water is drained. This procedure will
prevent the residual water freezing. The
protection cap can cause a blockage of the
water/fill drain line.
(k)
Disconnect the external AC power supply from the

EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-14-01-613-801-A/300
Page 302
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
(2) To do the water filling procedure with the batteries, do as
follows:
(a) Remove the protective cap (4) from the fill/drain nipple
(3). Refer to Figure 301, Sheet 2.
(b) Connect the hose of the potable water cart (GSE 052)
to the water fill/drain nipple (3). Refer to Figure 301,
Sheet 2.
(c) Set the fill/drain switch (6) to the FILL position. Wait 10
seconds to set the fill/drain valve. Refer to Figure 301,
Sheet 2.
CAUTION: THE MAXIMUM PRESSURE FOR FILLING IS
379.3 KPA (55 PSI).
(d) Start the water supply and fill the tank with water until
the water flow stops.
NOTE: If it is necessary more than 6 minutes to do the
filling procedure, set the FILL/DRAIN switch (6)
to the NORMAL position and then back to the
FILL position. Refer to Figure 301, Sheet 2.
(e) Set the FILL/DRAIN switch (6) to the NORMAL position.
Wait 10 seconds to set the fill/drain valve. Refer to
(f) Close the water supply.
(g) Disconnect the potable water cart (GSE 052).
(h) Put the protective cap (4) on the fill/drain nipple (3).
NOTE: Let all unwanted water drain before you put
the protective cap on the fill/drain nipple.
Where there are freezing conditions, after the
water drainage, we recommend that you wait
approximately 30 minutes to put the protection
cap on the fill/drain nipple to make sure that all
residual water is drained. This procedure will
prevent the residual water freezing. The
protection cap can cause a blockage of the
water/fill drain line.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-14-01-613-801-A/300
Page 303
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
D. Job Close-Up
CAUTION:

MATERIALS FROM THE TOWING AREA. MAKE
SURE THAT THE AREA IS CLEAN.

the work area.
(2) Close and latch access door 151AL.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-14-01-613-801-A/300
Page 304
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
MONUMENT
(REF.)
A
ZONE
151
D
C
1. CMS
Potable Water System - Filling

Figure 301 Sheet 1
EFFECTIVITY:
ON EMBRAER 190 LINEAGE ACFT WITHOUT SHOWER
12-14-01-613-801-A/300
Page 305
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
2. DOOR SWITCH
6. FILL/DRAIN
SWITCH
3. FILL/DRAIN
NIPPLE
NORMAL
DR
AIN
FIL
FULL
4. PROTECTIVE CAP
DRAIN
5. FULL/DRAIN
INDICATOR
FILL/DRAIN VALVE (REF.)
O
p
e
n
Closed
7. VALVE OPEN
CLOSE SELECTOR
D
Potable Water System Filling
Figure 301 Sheet 2
EFFECTIVITY:
ON EMBRAER 190 LINEAGE ACFT WITHOUT SHOWER
12-14-01-613-801-A/300
Page 306
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
GHSH TASK 12-14-05-600-801-A
1. Waste Tank - Servicing
A. General
VWS.
(2) To do the servicing of the VWS, you must drain and flush
the vacuum waste-storage tank.
B. Job Set-Up
WARNING:


(GHSH TASK 20-00-00-910-801-A/200).
(2) Prepare the rinse solution as follows:
(a)
Put 44 46 (11.6 - 12.2 gal.) of water in a separate

container and add one of the germicidal deodorants
that follow:
For deodorant SANI-PAK POWDER SP77000
SERIES, add 44 - 46 g (1.5 - 1.6 oz) of germicidal
deodorant.
For deodorant SANI-PAK LIQUID SP97000
SERIES, add 192 ml of germicidal deodorant.
For MIRABOWL Q, add 1.092 kg (38.5 oz) of
germicidal deodorant.
NOTE:
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
You can use only water to do the water tank

servicing, but we recommend the use of a rinse
solution. The rinse solution contains surfactants
that help clean the inner surface of the water tank.
12-14-05-600-801-A/300
Page 301
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
NOTE: For aircraft that operate at temperatures below 0 C
(32 F), add to the rinse solution an anti-ice product
as specified in the SM - Standard Manual, AMS 1424
and AMS 1428.
(3) In zone 152, open the access door 152AR.
C. Waste Tank - Servicing
WARNING:
DO NOT LET THE TOILET SYSTEM CLEANER GET

IN YOUR EYES, IN YOUR MOUTH OR ON YOUR
SKIN. IF YOU DO, FLUSH YOUR EYES, MOUTH
OR SKIN WITH WATER AND GET MEDICAL AID.
THE TOILET SYSTEM CLEANER IS AN ACID AND
CAN BURN YOU.
WARNING:
DO NOT GET WASTE FLUID ON YOUR SKIN, IN

YOUR EYES OR MOUTH. PUT ON APPROVED
PROTECTIVE
CLOTHING,
GOGGLES
AND
RUBBER GLOVES. IF WASTE FLUID TOUCHES
YOU, HEALTH PROBLEMS CAN OCCUR.
(1) Slowly pull the handle (5) to open the drain-valve protective
cap (6).
NOTE: Contaminated water can stay between the waste
drain valve and the protective cap. Open carefully to
prevent health problems.
(2) Install the GSE 050 lavatory dumping coupling (9) to the waste
drain valve (4).
NOTE: Make sure that the lavatory dumping coupling is
correctly installed.
(3) Remove the protective cap (7) from the rinse nipple (1).
(4) Install the GSE 050 lavatory filling coupling (8) to the rinse
nipple (1).
(5) Push the flapper-valve actuator lever (2) to open the waste
drain valve (4).
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-14-05-600-801-A/300
Page 302
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
(6) Slowly and carefully pull the drain control handle (3)
approximately 10 cm (4 in) to empty the waste tank.
(7) Start to supply the rinse fluid through the GSE 051 (10) at a
pressure of 20 to 25 psi for 2 min or until a volume of 38 (10
gal.) is used.
NOTE: Make sure that the waste tank is completely drained
before you start to supply the rinse fluid.
If you do not use the correct rinse pressure you will
not clean the level sensors properly.
(8) Slowly and carefully push the drain control handle (3) back.
(9) Fill the waste tank with 6 - 8 (1.6 - 2.1 gal.) of rinse fluid.
(10) Stop the GSE 051 (10) rinse fluid-supply.
(11) Slowly remove the GSE 050 lavatory filling coupling (8).
(12) Slowly remove the GSE 049 lavatory dumping coupling (9).
(13) Install the protective cap (7) and close the rinse nipple (1).
(14) Put the drain valve protective cap (6) in the closed position
and lock it with the handle (5).
D. Job Close-Up
WARNING: DO NOT LET THE TOILET SYSTEM CLEANER
GET IN YOUR EYES, IN YOUR MOUTH OR ON
YOUR SKIN. IF YOU DO, FLUSH YOUR EYES,
MOUTH OR SKIN WITH WATER AND GET
MEDICAL AID. THE TOILET SYSTEM CLEANER
IS AN ACID AND CAN BURN YOU.
WARNING: DO NOT GET WASTE FLUID ON YOUR SKIN, IN
YOUR EYES OR MOUTH. PUT ON APPROVED
PROTECTIVE CLOTHING, GOGGLES AND
RUBBER GLOVES. IF WASTE FLUID TOUCHES
YOU, HEALTH PROBLEMS CAN OCCUR.
(1) Clean the service panel and adjacent area.
(2) In zone 152, close and latch the access door 152AR.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-14-05-600-801-A/300
Page 303
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
A
ZONE
152
2. FLAPPER VALVE
ACTUATOR LEVER
3. DRAIN CONTROL
HANDLE
1. RINSE
NIPPLE
4. WASTE DRAIN
VALVE
5. HANDLE
8. LAVATORY FILLING
COUPLING
7. PROTECTIVE
CAP
6. DRAIN VALVE
PROTECTIVE CAP
9. LAVATORY DUMPING
COUPLING
A
10. TOILET GROUND
SERVICING CART
Waste Tank - Servicing

Figure 301
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-14-05-600-801-A/300
Page 304
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
GHSH TASK 12-15-01-200-801-A
1. Main-Landing-Gear Tire Pressure - Check
A. General
(1) This task gives the procedure to do a check of the tire
pressure on the MLG.
(2) The pressure check can be done with a wheel pressure
gauge or with other external gauge. But, do not use the
wheel pressure gauge as a reference during inflation of the
tire.
(3) The procedure is the same for the tires of the left and the
right MLG. Data is given for the tires of the left MLG. Data
for the tires of the right MLG, which is different, is given in
parentheses.
(4) The procedure is for an aircraft with its weight on its wheels,
not for an aircraft on jacks.
(5) The task GHSH TASK 12-15-03-200-801-A/300 gives the
procedure to do a check of the tire pressure on the nose
landing gear.
B. Job Set-Up
WARNING:


C. Main-Landing-Gear Tire Pressure - Check
WARNING: DO NOT GO NEAR THE AIRCRAFT TIRES WHEN
THEY ARE HOT. IF IT IS NECESSARY TO
MEASURE THE TEMPERATURE OF THE TIRES,
GO NEAR THEM FROM THE FRONT. DO NOT
GO TO THE TIRES FROM THE SIDE. THE HIGH
TEMPERATURE CAN CAUSE AN EXPLOSION
OF THE TIRES.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-15-01-200-801-A/300
Page 301
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
WARNING:

KILL YOU.
WARNING:

GOGGLES WHEN
YOU
DO WORK
ON
PRESSURIZED
FLUID
AND
GAS
ARE
(1) Do a check of the tire pressures as follows:

(a) Only use a pressure gauge which is calibrated and uses
the correct units of measurement.
CAUTION:
DO NOT BLEED AIR FROM A HOT TIRE TO

MAKE THE PRESSURE COME TO THE
CORRECT LIMITS BECAUSE, AT AMBIENT
TEMPERATURE, THEIR PRESSURE WILL BE
LESS THAN THE CORRECT OPERATIONAL
PRESSURE.
(b) Make sure that the temperature of the tire (1) is the same
as the ambient temperature.
(c) Remove the cap (3) from the valve (5) on the wheel (2).
(d) Connect the GSE 059 (4) to the valve (5).
(e) The pressure in the tire (1) must be between 1130 and
1165 kPa (164 0/+5 psi) with the aircraft on the ground.
NOTE:
For unloaded condition (aircraft on jack), the

pressure in the tire must be 4% lower than
loaded condition (aircraft on ground).
1. If there is a large temperature decrease between the

departure and the destination airports, you must adjust
the tire pressure for the colder airport before the flight.
If the temperature difference is equal to or greater than
25 C (45 F) lower, do this procedure:
a. Increase the given tire pressure 1% for each
3 C (5.4 F) of temperature difference.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-15-01-200-801-A/300
Page 302
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
Example:
Temperature at departure airport = 20 C
(68 F)
Temperature at arrival airport = -10 C (14
F)
Temperature difference = 30 C (54 F)
Increase the tire pressure: (30 C /3 x 1%)
= 10% (54 F / 5.4 x 1% = 10%)
If the tire pressure is 1165 kPa (169 psi),
increase the tire pressure: 1165 kPa (169
psi) + 10% = 1282 kPa (186 psi).
NOTE: The tire maximum rated tire pressure

is limited to 1337 kPa (194 psi) in
loaded condition (aircraft on ground).
Do not increase the tire pressure
above this value.
(f)
If the pressure is in the limits given above:

1.
2.
If the pressure of a tire is at (or close to) the

bottom limit of the range, Embraer recommends
that you inflate the tire to 1165 kPa (169 psi). This
is to prevent removals which are not necessary at
subsequent pressure checks (GHSH TASK 1215-01-600-801-A/300).
If the pressure in a tire is at (or close to) the
higher limit of the range, go to SUBTASK 200011-A.
(g) If the pressure is not in the limits given above, refer to

the table below for the correct maintenance procedure:
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-15-01-200-801-A/300
Page 303
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
Table 301 - Tire Pressure Schedule and Adjustment Procedure
SUBTASK 200-011-A
(2) After the check, do as follows:
(a) Remove the GSE 059 (4) from the valve (5).
(b) Make sure that there is no leakage of gas from the
valve (5).
(c) Install the cap (3) on the valve (5).
(3) Repeat these procedures for each one of the other MLG
wheels (2).
D. Job Close-Up
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-15-01-200-801-A/300
Page 304
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
CAUTION:
EXAMINE ALL THE WORK AREAS TO MAKE

CAN OCCUR.

the work area.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-15-01-200-801-A/300
Page 305
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
A
ZONES
731
741
A
1. TIRE
2. WHEEL
C
B
3. BLANKINGCAP
4. PRESSURE
GAGE
5. VALVE
C
MLG Tire Pressure - Check
Figure 301
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-15-01-200-801-A/300
Page 306
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
GHSH TASK 12-15-01-600-801-A
1. Main-Landing-Gear Tire - Servicing
A. General
(1) This task gives the procedure to inflate a tire on the MLG.
(3) The procedure is the same for the tires on the left and right
MLG. Data is given for the tires on the left MLG. Data for the
tires on the right MLG, which is different, is given in
parentheses.
(4) The GHSH TASK 12-15-03-600-801-A/300 gives the
procedure to inflate the tires on the NLG.
B. Job Set-Up
WARNING:


C. MLG Tire - Servicing
WARNING: YOU MUST GO TO THE TIRES FROM THE
FRONT OR FROM BEHIND THE TIRES IN
RELATION TO THE FLIGHT DIRECTION. YOU
MUST NEVER STAY NEAR THE SIDES OF THE
TIRES, THAT IS, IN FRONT OF THE WHEEL
DURING THIS PROCEDURE.
WARNING:
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
DO NOT INFLATE AN AIRCRAFT TIRE DIRECTLY

FROM A HIGH-PRESSURE STORAGE CYLINDER.
ONLY USE TIRE INFLATION EQUIPMENT WHICH
HAS THE APPROVAL OF THE AIRCRAFT
MANUFACTURER. IF YOU INFLATE NA AIRCRAFT
TIRE DIRECTLY FROM A HIGH-PRESSURE
12-15-01-600-801-A/300
Page 301
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
STORAGE
OCCUR.
CYLINDER,
AN
EXPLOSION
CAN
WARNING:

GOGGLES WHEN
YOU
DO WORK
ON
PRESSURIZED
FLUID
AND
GAS
ARE
WARNING:
BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU HANDLE HOT WHEELS,

TIRES OR BRAKES. THEY CAN CAUSE INJURY
TO PERSONS.
(1) Do the procedure to inflate the tire (1):

NOTE: There is not technical objection to the use of
temperature-compensated pressure gauge to do the
pressure check of a hot tire. But such equipment must
give measurements equivalent to the cold tire pressure
given in the AMM. Before the use of a temperaturecompensated pressure gauge, refer to the
Manufactures instructions applicable to the equipment.
(a) Make sure that the temperature of the tire (1) is the same
(b) Adjust the outlet pressure of GSE 057 to a maximum value
30 percent higher than the nominal pressure value given in
the tire specification.
NOTE: This adjustment makes the tire servicing
procedure easier.
After you adjust the pressure in the GSE 057, do
not inflate the tires to this total pressure. Inflate
the tires progressively to the approximate correct
nominal-pressure-value.
Then
make
the
applicable adjustments: inflate or deflate the
tires, if necessary.
(c) Remove the cap (3) from the valve (5).
(d) Connect the hose (4) from the GSE 057 to the valve
(5) on the wheel (2).
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-15-01-600-801-A/300
Page 302
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
(e) Operate the GSE 057 to inflate the tire (1) to the
correct pressure (GHSH TASK 12-15-01-200-801A/300 for the pressure data). Refer to Figure 301.
(f) Remove the hose (4) from the valve (5).
(g) Make sure that there is no leakage from the valve (5).
(h) Install the cap (3) on the valve (5).
(2) Repeat these procedures for each of the other tires (1) of
the MLG.
D. Job Close-Up
(1) Put the aircraft back to its initial condition.
(a) Do the procedures to put the aircraft back to its initial
condition (AMM TASK 32-00-00-860-802-A/200).
(b) Remove all tools, equipment and unwanted materials
from the work area.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-15-01-600-801-A/300
Page 303
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
ZONES
731
741
1. TIRE
2. WHEEL
4. HOSE
5. VALVE
3. CAP
MLG Tire - Servicing

Figure 301
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-15-01-600-801-A/300
Page 304
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
GHSH TASK 12-15-03-200-801-A
1. Nose-Landing-Gear Tire Pressure - Check
A. General
(1) This task gives the procedure to do a check of the pressure
of a tire on the NLG.
(2) The pressure check can be done with a wheel pressure
gauge or with other external gauge. But, do not use the
wheel pressure gauge as a reference during inflation of the
tire.
(3) This procedure is for an aircraft with its weight on its wheels,
(4) The task GHSH TASK 12-15-01-200-801-A/300 gives the
procedure to do a check of the tire pressure on the MLG.
B. Job Set-Up
WARNING:


C. Nose-Landing-Gear Tire Pressure - Check
WARNING: DO NOT GO NEAR THE AIRCRAFT TIRES WHEN
THEY ARE HOT. IF IT IS NECESSARY TO
MEASURE THE TEMPERATURE OF THE TIRES,
GO NEAR THEM FROM THE FRONT. DO NOT
GO TO THE TIRES FROM THE SIDE. THE HIGH
TEMPERATURE CAN CAUSE AN EXPLOSION
OF THE TIRES.
WARNING:
EFFECTIVITY: ALL

KILL YOU.
12-15-03-200-801-A/300
Page 301
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
GOGGLES WHEN
YOU
DO WORK
ON
PRESSURIZED
FLUID
AND
GAS
ARE
WARNING:
(1) Do a check of the tire pressures as follows:

(a) Only use a calibrated pressure gauge with the correct
units of measurement.
DO NOT BLEED AIR FROM A HOT TIRE TO
MAKE THE PRESSURE COME TO THE
CORRECT LIMITS BECAUSE, AT AMBIENT
TEMPERATURE, THEIR PRESSURE WILL BE
LESS THAN THE CORRECT OPERATIONAL
PRESSURE.
CAUTION:
(b) Make sure that the temperature of the tire (1) is the same
(d) Connect the pressure gage (GSE 059) (4) to the valve (6)
and do a check of the tire pressure.
(e) The pressure must be between 931 and 965 kPa
(135 0/+5 psi) with the aircraft on ground.
NOTE: For unloaded condition (aircraft on jack), the
pressure in the tire must be 4% lower than loaded
condition (aircraft on ground).
1. If there is a large temperature decrease between the
departure and the destination airports, you must

adjust the tire pressure for the colder airport before
the flight. If the temperature difference is equal to or
greater than 25 C (45 F) lower, do this procedure:
a.
Increase the given tire pressure 1% for each

3 C (5.4 F) of temperature difference.
1) Example:
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-15-03-200-801-A/300
Page 302
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
2) Temperature at departure airport = 20 C
(68 F)
3) Temperature at arrival airport = -10 C
(14 F)
4) Temperature difference = 30 C (54 F)
5) Increase the tire pressure: (30 C /3 x
1%) = 10% (54 F / 5.4 x 1% = 10%)

6) If the tire pressure is 965 kPa (140 psi),
increase the tire pressure: 965 kPa (140

psi) + 10% = 1061 kPa (154 psi).
NOTE: The tire pressure is limited to
1185 kPa (172 psi) in loaded
condition (aircraft on ground). Do
not increase the tire pressure
above this value.
(f)
If the pressure is in the limits given above:

1. If the pressure of a tire is at (or close to) the
bottom limit of the range, Embraer recommends

that you inflate the tire to 965 kPa (140 psi). This
is to prevent removals which are not necessary
at subsequent pressure checks.
2. If the pressure in a tire is at (or close to) the
higher limit of the range, go to SUBTASK 200002-A.
(g) If the pressure is not within the limits given above,
refer to the table below for the correct maintenance
procedure:
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-15-03-200-801-A/300
Page 303
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
Table 301 - Tire Pressure, Condition and Maintenance Procedure
NOTE: An authorized retreader must examine a tire which is
removed because of low inflation pressure. This is to make

sure that the casing does not have internal degradation. If it
does, discard the tire.
(2) Do these checks again to the other NLG wheel (2).
(3) After the check, do as follows:
(a) Remove the pressure gage (GSE 059) (4) from the
valve (6).
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-15-03-200-801-A/300
Page 304
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
(b) Make sure that there is no leakage of gas from the

valve (6).
(c) Install the cap (3) on the valve (6).
D. Job Close-Up
(1) Put the aircraft back to its initial condition (AMM TASK
32-00-00-860-802-A/200).
SURE THAT YOU REMOVED ALL TOOLS

AND EQUIPMENT AFTER YOU COMPLETED
THE WORK. IF YOU DO NOT OBEY THIS
CAN OCCUR.
(2) Remove all tools, equipment and unwanted materials
from the work area.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-15-03-200-801-A/300
Page 305
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
A
ZONE
711
1. TIRE
2. WHEEL
A
C
B
6. VALVE
3. CAP
4. PRESSURE
GAGE
5. HOSE
NLG Tire Pressure - Check

Figure 301
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-15-03-200-801-A/300
Page 306
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
GHSH TASK 12-15-03-600-801-A
1. Nose-Landing-Gear Tire - Servicing
A. General
(1) This task gives the procedure to inflate a tire on the NLG.
(3) The GHSH TASK 12-15-01-600-801-A/300 gives the
procedure to inflate the tires on the MLG.
B. Job Set-Up
WARNING:


C. Nose-Landing-Gear Tire - Servicing
WARNING: BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU HANDLE HOT
WHEELS, TIRES OR BRAKES. THEY CAN
CAUSE INJURY TO PERSONS.
WARNING: YOU MUST GO TO THE TIRES FROM THE
FRONT OR FROM BEHIND THE TIRES IN
RELATION TO THE FLIGHT DIRECTION. YOU
MUST NEVER STAY NEAR THE SIDES OF THE
TIRES, THAT IS, IN FRONT OF THE WHEEL
DURING THIS PROCEDURE.
WARNING:
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
DO NOT INFLATE AN AIRCRAFT TIRE DIRECTLY

FROM A HIGH-PRESSURE STORAGE CYLINDER.
ONLY USE TIRE INFLATION EQUIPMENT WHICH
HAS THE APPROVAL OF THE AIRCRAFT
MANUFACTURER. IF YOU INFLATE NA AIRCRAFT
TIRE DIRECTLY FROM A HIGH-PRESSURE
12-15-03-600-801-A/300
Page 301
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
STORAGE
OCCUR.
WARNING:
CYLINDER,
AN
EXPLOSION
CAN

GOGGLES WHEN
YOU
DO WORK
ON
PRESSURIZED
FLUID
AND
GAS
ARE
(1) Do the procedure to inflate the tires (Figure 301), as follows:

NOTE: There is not technical objection to the use of
temperature-compensated pressure gauge to do the
pressure check of a hot tire. But such equipment must
give measurements equivalent to the cold tire
pressure given in the AMM. Before the use of a
temperature-compensated pressure gauge, refer to
the Manufactures instructions applicable to the
equipment.
(a) Set up the GSE 057 and the GSE 059 as shown. Refer to
Figure 301.
(b) Adjust the outlet pressure of GSE 057 to a maximum value
30 percent higher than the nominal pressure value given in
the tire specification.
NOTE: This adjustment makes the tire servicing
procedure easier.
After you adjust the pressure in the GSE 057, do
not inflate the tires to this total pressure. Inflate the
tires progressively to the approximate correct
nominal-pressure-value. Then make the applicable
adjustments: inflate or deflate the tires, if
necessary.
(d) Connect the hose (2) from the GSE 059 to the valve
(3) on the wheel.
(e) Inflate the tire (4) and monitor the pressure with the
pressure gauge. Refer to Figure 301.
(f) Remove the hose (2) from the valve (3).
(g) Make sure that there is no leakage from the valve (3).
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-15-03-600-801-A/300
Page 302
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
(h) Install the cap (1) on the valve (3).
(2) Repeat these procedures again to the other tire of the NLG.
D. Job Close-Up
the work area.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-15-03-600-801-A/300
Page 303
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
A
ZONE
711
1. CAP
2. HOSE
4. TIRE
3. VALVE
NITROGEN
CYLINDER
PRESSURE GAUGE
CONTROL VALVE
HOSE ASSEMBLY
PRESSURE
REGULATOR
VALVE
NLG Tire - Servicing

Figure 301
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-15-03-600-801-A/300
Page 304
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
GHSH TASK 12-15-05-200-801-A
1. Hydraulic System Accumulator Pressure Charge - Check
A. General
(1) This task gives the procedure to do the check of the
pressure in the accumulators of the No. 1, No. 2, and
No. 3 hydraulic systems.
(2) The accumulators of the No. 1 and No. 2 hydraulic systems
are installed on each side of the fuselage, aft of the wing,
below the wing-to-fuselage fairing.
(3) The pressure gauge/fill points of the No. 1 and No. 2
accumulators are installed in the hydraulic ground service
panels on each side of the fuselage, aft of the wing, on the
wing-to-fuselage fairing.
(4) The No. 3 hydraulic system accumulator is installed in the
aft hydraulic compartment, aft of the rear pressure
bulkhead.
(5) The pressure gauge/fill point of the No. 3 accumulator is
installed in the hydraulic ground service panel, on the right
side of the fuselage, forward of the rear fuselage access
door.
B. Job Set-Up
WARNING:


(GHSH TASK 20-00-00-910-801-A/200).
TASK 24-42-02-860-801-A/200).
follows:
(a)

access door 199CL.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-15-05-200-801-A/300
Page 301
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
(b)
(c)

access panel 198BR.
access door 314AR.
WARNING: MAKE SURE THAT THE LANDING GEAR

DAMAGE TO MATERIAL.
WARNING: KEEP PERSONS AND EQUIPMENT FAR FROM
THE FLIGHT CONTROL SURFACES, THRUST
REVERSERS, AND LANDING GEAR. THESE
COMPONENTS CAN MOVE SUDDENLY WHEN
YOU SUPPLY HYDRAULIC POWER AND CAUSE
INJURIES TO PERSONS AND DAMAGE TO
EQUIPMENT.
(4) Press and hold the palm button on the dump/thermal relief
valve (5) for 20 seconds to release the pressure from the
No. 1 and/or No. 2 hydraulic system. To release the
pressure from the No. 3 hydraulic system press and hold
the palm button on the dump/thermal relief valve. Refer to
NOTE:
Use a flashlight while you work in these
compartments.
Use a workstand (rear fuselage) to have access
to the No. 3 hydraulic compartment.
Before you do the check of the nitrogen pressure
in the accumulator, let the pressure stabilize for
10 minutes after you release the pressure from
the hydraulic system.
(5) On the hydraulic synoptic page, make sure that the
pressure indication decreases for the applicable hydraulic
system (1), (2) or (3). Refer to Figure 301.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-15-05-200-801-A/300
Page 302
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
C. Accumulator - Pressure Level Check
WARNING: THE HYDRAULIC SYSTEM HAS PHOSPHATEESTER HYDRAULIC FLUID. PUT ON APPROVED
WHEN YOU WORK ON THE HYDRAULIC
SYSTEM. IF THE FLUID TOUCHES YOU, FLUSH
YOUR SKIN WITH WATER. IF IT GETS IN YOUR
EYES, FLUSH THEM WITH WATER AND GET
MEDICAL AID. THE FLUID CAN CAUSE SKIN
AND EYE IRRITATION.
WARNING: OBEY ALL HYDRAULIC SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
OCCUR.
(1) Do a test of the nitrogen pressure in the No. 1 and No. 2
accumulators, as follows:
(a) Look at the pressure gauge of the applicable
accumulator pressure gauge/fill assembly (1), for the
No. 1 and/or No. 2 hydraulic system, or (2), for the No.
3 hydraulic system. Refer to Figure 302 and Figure 303.
(b) Make sure that the pressure is as follows:
Table 301 - Accumulator Charging Pressures Versus Fluid
Temperature
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-15-05-200-801-A/300
Page 303
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
(2) If the pressure value is out of the range limits given in Table
301, do the servicing of the accumulator (AMM TASK 1215-05-600-801-A/300).
D. Job Close-Up
CAN OCCUR.
the work area.
as follows:
(a)
(b)
(c)
In zone 199, for the No. 1 hydraulic system, close the

access door 199CL.
access panel 198BR.
access door 314AR.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-15-05-200-801-A/300
Page 304
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
2. SYSTEM 3
HYDRAULIC
PRESSURE
3. SYSTEM 2
HYDRAULIC
PRESSURE
1. SYSTEM 1
HYDRAULIC
PRESSURE
PRESS
QTY
PRESS
SYS 1
90 33/64 C
728
PSI
QTY
PRESS
QTY
SYS 3
90 33/64 C
78 %
1080
SYS 2
90 33/64 C
PSI
27 %
760
PSI
21 %
PTU
LANDING GEAR
LH
3/4
ELE V IN BD
AIL IN BD
ENG 2 REVERSER
MF SP OILER 5
GND SPOI
LER 1
BR A K E IN BD
NOSE WHEEL STR
EM ER/PARK BRAKE
E LEV OUTBD
R U D UPPER
ENG 1 REVERSER
MF SPOILER
GND SPOILER 2
BRAKE OUTBD
EL EV OUTBD RH
RUD LOW
ER
AI
L O U TB D
Hydraulic Synoptic Page - Accumulator - Pressure Level Check

Figure 301
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-15-05-200-801-A/300
Page 305
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
A
ZONE
190
B
5. PALM BUTTON
A
TYPICAL
1. PRESSURE
GAUGE
2. CHARGING
VALVE
4. DUST CAP
3. NUT
1
B
TYPICAL
1
TORQUE: 5.64 6.78 N.m (50 60 lb.in)
TORQUE: HAND TIGHT
No. 1 / No. 2 Hydraulic System - Accumulator - Pressure Level Check

Figure 302
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-15-05-200-801-A/300
Page 306
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
HYDRAULIC
SYSTEM (REF.)
A
ZONES
314
316
1. CHARGING
VALVE
GROUND SERVICE
PANEL (REF.)
2. PRESSURE
GAUGE
3. NUT
5. PALM
BUTTON
B
C
1
TORQUE: 5.64 6.78 N.m (50 60 lb.in)
4. DUST CAP
No. 3 Hydraulic System - Accumulator - Pressure Level Check

Figure 303
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-15-05-200-801-A/300
Page 307/308
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
GHSH TASK 12-15-06-614-801-A
1. Cockpit Oxygen Cylinder - Charging
A. General
(1) This task gives the procedure to fill the oxygen system.
(2) During the charging of the oxygen cylinder, the cylinder
compartment temperature is equal to the OAT if:
The aircraft is in ground configuration

The electrical power is off
The ground power unit is disconnected
B. Job Set-Up
WARNING:


(GHSH TASK 20-00-00-910-801-A/200).
WARNING:
BE
SURE
TO
OBEY
THE
SAFETY
PRECAUTIONS BEFORE YOU DO THE
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES IN THE CREW
OXYGEN SYSTEM. THIS IS TO PREVENT
THE EQUIPMENT.

of the crew oxygen system (AMM TASK 35-10-00-910-801A/200).
C. Cockpit Oxygen Cylinder Charging
WARNING: OBEY THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS BELOW
BEFORE YOU DO THE SERVICING OF THE
OXYGEN SYSTEM:
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-15-06-614-801-A/300
Page 301
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
KEEP ALL SOURCES OF IGNITION (HOT
EXHAUSTS, SPARKS, FLAMES, SMOKING)
AWAY FROM THE OXYGEN SERVICING
AREA.
BE
CAREFUL
TO
PREVENT
CONTAMINATION FROM OILS, GREASES,
DUST, OR WATER.
DO THE SERVICING IN AN OPEN AREA OR
WHERE THERE IS A GOOD FLOW OF AIR.
DO NOT FILL THE OXYGEN CYLINDER
WHILE YOU DO THE FUEL, HYDRAULIC
FLUID, AND OIL SERVICING. DURING THE
OXYGEN SERVICING, DO NOT DO TESTS
FOR WHICH THE AIRCRAFT MUST BE
ENERGIZED.
DO NOT FILL THE OXYGEN CYLINDER
DURING LIGHTNING DISCHARGES.
DO NOT PERMIT PERSONS TO STAY IN THE
AIRCRAFT INTERIOR OR IN THE ADJACENT
AREA DURING THE OXYGEN SYSTEM
SERVICING.
WARNING: OPEN THE SHUTOFF VALVE ON THE OXYGEN
CYLINDER SLOWLY. IF YOU OPEN THE VALVE
QUICKLY, THE OXYGEN CAN BECOME HOT
AND CAUSE AN EXPLOSION.
(1) Open access door 132AR.
(2) Fill the oxygen cylinder as follows:
NOTE: Use aviation breathing oxygen. Refer to SM Standard Manual, MIL-O-27210 only.
(a) Do a check of the overboard discharge indicator before
you fill the oxygen cylinder to make sure that the safety
fitting did not discharge.
(b) Remove the protective cap (3). Refer to Figure 301.
(c) Connect GSE 027 (4) to the hose of GSE 028 (5).
(d) Connect GSE 028 (5) to the oxygen source.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-15-06-614-801-A/300
Page 302
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
(e) Connect GSE 027 (4) to the charging valve (2) and
make sure that there is no leakage.
(f) Measure the ambient temperature (OAT).
(g) With the OAT, find the filling pressure (Figure 302).
NOTE: The system filling pressure is 12755.3 kPa
(1850 psi) at OAT of 21 C (70 F).
(h) Immediately after you close GSE 028 (5), slowly open
the oxygen-cylinder shutoff valve.
NOTE: Slowly fill the system (rate not greater than
1378.95 kPa (200 psig) per minute) to prevent
heating in the system and, consequently, an
incorrect pressure indication. Refer to AIR1059
Transfilling and Maintenance of Oxygen
Cylinders.
(i)
Slowly open GSE 028 (5) and let the system fill up to
the recommended pressure.
(j) Monitor the pressure gauge (1) of the aircraft and
GSE 028 (5).
(k) Wait at least 10 minutes to let the temperature of the
oxygen-cylinder becomes stable. Then do a check of
the pressure (GHSH TASK 35-10-00-210-801-A/600)
and adjust as necessary to reach maximum service
pressure. Refer to AIR1059 Transfilling and
Maintenance of Oxygen Cylinders.
(l) Close the oxygen-cylinder shutoff valve.
(m) Carefully remove GSE 027 (4) from the charging valve
to release the remaining pressure in the hose.
D. Job Close-Up
(1) Do a test on the charging valve for leaks with fluid LEAKTEC 16-OX. If there are leaks, replace the charging valve
(AMM MPP 35-10-08/401).
(2) Install the protective cap (3) and close access door 132AR.
(3) Remove GSE 027 (4) from the hose of GSE 028 (5). Keep
the equipment in a correct location, where there are the
cleaning conditions necessary for the oxygen system.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-15-06-614-801-A/300
Page 303
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
A
OVERBOARD DISCHARGE
INDICATOR (REF.)
ZONE
132
1. PRESSURE
GAUGE
2. CHARGING
VALVE
3. PROTECTIVE
CAP
5. GSE 028
ACCESS DOOR
(132AR) (REF.)
OXYGEN CYLINDER
SHUTOFF VALVE (REF.)
4. GSE 027
A
OXYGEN SOURCE (REF.)
Oxygen Filling - Servicing

Figure 301
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-15-06-614-801-A/300
Page 304
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
70F
PRESSURE VS TEMPERATURE
2100
2000
1900
1800
INDICATED GAUGE PRESSURE (PSI)
1700
5
18
1600
1500
16
70
AT
AT
C
1
C
1
(7
(70
F)
1400
1300
14
1200
00
1100
120
AT
21
2
AT
C(
70
1C
(70
F)
1000
900
10
800
T
00 A
A
850
21
T 21
C (7
C (
0F
70F
21C
700
40
30
20
10
10
20
30
40
50
60
CYLINDER COMPARTMENT TEMPERATURE C
40
20
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
CYLINDER COMPARTMENT TEMPERATURE F
600
Oxygen Pressure Correction as a Function of Temperature Servicing

Figure 302
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-15-06-614-801-A/300
Page 305/306
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
GHSH TASK 12-22-01-100-801-A
1. External Aircraft - Cleaning
A. General
(1) This task gives the procedures to remove light and heavy
dirt from the ACFT external surfaces.
(2) The list of approved consumable material to use in this
procedure are:
Cleaning materials: detergent MIL- D -16791G Type 1

and detergent SUPER BEE 210.
Solvent materials: solvent MIL-PRF-680 and MEK.
B. Job Set-Up
WARNING:


(GHSH TASK 20-00-00-910-801-A/200).
CAUTION:
WHEN YOU COVER AN OPENING, MAKE SURE

THAT YOU HAVE A SATISFACTORY VIEW OF
THE COVER FROM THE GROUND. DO NOT
OPERATE THE ENGINES WITH COVERS
INSTALLED BECAUSE THE COVERS CAN
COME OFF AND CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE
ENGINES.
USE
COVERS,
BLACK
POLYETHYLENE SHEETS, AND YELLOW
VINYL ADHESIVE TAPES TO KEEP LIQUIDS
OUT OF THE DRAINS OF THE AIRCRAFT AND
MAKE
SURE
THAT
YOU
HAVE
A
SATISFACTORY VIEW OF THE COVERS FROM
THE GROUND. IF YOU DO NOT REMOVE THE
COVERS FROM DRAINS, DAMAGE TO THE
STRUCTURE CAN OCCUR. USE BLACK
POLYETHYLENE SHEETS AND YELLOW VINYL
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-22-01-100-801-A/300
Page 301
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
ADHESIVE TAPES TO KEEP LIQUIDS OUT OF
THE AREAS THAT CONTAIN MECHANICAL,
ELECTRICAL, OR HYDRAULIC COMPONENTS.
LIQUIDS THAT GET INTO THESE AREAS CAN
CAUSE
CORROSION,
FREEZE
DURING
FLIGHT,
OR
REMOVE
NECESSARY
LUBRICANTS. MAKE SURE THAT THE PITOT
PROBE COVER IS IN GOOD CONDITIONS AND
DOES NOT SHOW EVIDENCE OF DAMAGE,
SPECIALLY FRAYING AROUND ITS OPENING.
FRAYED FIBERS FROM THE COVER,
COMBINED WITH OTHER SUBSTANCES SUCH
AS DIRT, GREASE, AND FLUIDS CAN CAUSE
OBSTRUCTION OF THE PROBE. MAKE SURE
THAT THE MIXTURE OF WATER DOES NOT
GET ON THE STEEL OR CARBON BRAKE
HEAT SINKS. CONTAMINATION CAN CAUSE
DAMAGE TO THE CARBON AND STEEL
BRAKES.
(2) Do the aircraft normal parking procedures (GHSH TASK 1010-01-500-801-A/200).
(3) Seal the inlets and outlets of the refrigeration pack
compartments (AMM SDS 21-51-00/1) with polyethylene
film or equivalent water and detergent-resistant film, and
adhesive tape or equivalent.
(4) Seal the AOA vanes and their attachment bases on the
fuselage with polyethylene film or equivalent water and
detergent-resistant film, and adhesive tape or equivalent.
(5) Close the forward passenger door (AMM SDS 52-11-00/1)
and seal it with adhesive tape or equivalent.
(6) Close the aft passenger door (AMM SDS 52-12-00/1) and
seal it with adhesive tape or equivalent.
(7) Close the forward service door (AMM SDS 52-41-00/1) and
(8) Close the aft service door (AMM SDS 52-42-00/1) and seal
it with adhesive tape or equivalent.
(9) Close the FWD cargo door (AMM SDS 52-31-00/1) and seal
it with adhesive tape or equivalent.
(10)Close the aft cargo door (AMM SDS 52-32-00/1) and seal it
with adhesive tape or equivalent.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-22-01-100-801-A/300
Page 302
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
(11)Seal the access panel 351GL with adhesive tape or
equivalent.
WARNING: WHEN THE STATIC PORT IS COVERED, MAKE
SURE THAT THIS CONDITION IS VISIBLE FROM
THE GROUND. ALSO, ATTACH A REMOVEBEFOREFLIGHT TAG TO THE LEFT CONTROL
YOKE IN THE COCKPIT. IF YOU DO NOT OBEY
THIS PRECAUTION, ERROR TO THE AIRSPEED
AND ALTITUDE SENSING SIGNALS CAN
OCCUR, WHICH CAN CAUSE LOSS OF SAFE
FLIGHT CONDITION.
WARNING: DO NOT SPRAY DETERGENT OR WATER
DIRECTLY INTO OR AT THE STATIC PORT. IF
DAMAGE TO THE STATIC PORT CAN OCCUR,
WHICH CAN CAUSE LOSS OF SAFE FLIGHT
CONDITION.
WARNING: DO NOT PLACE ADHESIVE TAPE OVER THE
HOLES OF THE STATIC PORT. IF YOU DO NOT
OBEY THIS PRECAUTION, ERROR TO THE
ALTITUDE SENSING SIGNALS CAN OCCUR,
WHICH CAN CAUSE LOSS OF SAFE FLIGHT
CONDITION.
(12)Cover the static port with adhesive tape MEP 18-005 and a
orange vinyl streamer that has REMOVE BEFORE FLIGHT
printed on it in black letters, as follows (Figure 302):
WARNING: ALWAYS
OBEY
THE
MANUFACTURERS
YOU USE METHYL ETHYL KETONE (MEK). DO
NOT GET MEK ON YOUR SKIN, IN YOUR EYES
OR MOUTH, AND DO NOT BREATHE ITS
FUMES. KEEP MEK AWAY FROM SPARKS,
FLAMES OR SOURCES OF HEAT. PUT ON
APPROVED
PROTECTIVE
CLOTHING,
GOGGLES AND GLOVES. MEK IS POISONOUS
AND FLAMMABLE, AND IF YOU DO NOT OBEY
THESE PRECAUTIONS, INJURIES CAN OCCUR.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-22-01-100-801-A/300
Page 303
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
(a) Clean the area around the static port with MEK or
equivalent, and use a lint-free wiper cloth to apply the
adhesive tape.
(b) Cover the holes of static port with the orange vinyl
streamer.
(c) Apply the adhesive tape MEP 18-005 on the top and
vertical edges of orange vinyl streamer.
(d) Apply the adhesive tape MEP 18-005 on each vertical
edge of orange vinyl streamer, overlapping the first strip
of adhesive tape MEP 18-005.
(e) Apply the adhesive tape MEP 18-005 horizontally over
the orange vinyl streamer, below the static port holes,
overlapping the vertical strips of adhesive tape
MEP 18-005.
(13)Close the escape hatch door (AMM SDS 52-20-00/1) and
C. Light Dirt - Cleaning
CAUTION:
DO NOT USE DRY-CLEANING DUST ON

PAINTED
OR
ACRYLIC
SURFACES
(PASSENGER
WINDOWS,
WING-TOFUSELAGE FAIRING, WING LIGHTS, ETC).
THIS CLEANING PROCEDURE CAN CAUSE
DAMAGE TO THE PAINTED OR ACRYLIC
SURFACES.
CAUTION:
PUT ON GLOVES AND GOGGLES TO

PREVENT INJURY TO YOUR SKIN AND EYES.
USE A SAFETY HARNESS WHEN YOU ARE ON
WET SURFACES ABOVE THE GROUND.
CAUTION:
OBEY
THE
MANUFACTURERS
INSTRUCTIONS WHEN YOU PREPARE AND
APPLY
CLEANING
AND
DISINFECTANT
SOLUTIONS. IF THESE PRODUCTS ARE
STRONGER THAN THE ONES SPECIFIED,
THEY
CAN
CAUSE
DAMAGE
THE
DECORATIVE SURFACES.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-22-01-100-801-A/300
Page 304
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
(1) Prepare the cleaning solution in a dilution ratio of 10% of
detergent SUPER BEE 210 to 90% of water.
CAUTION: DO NOT APPLY CLEANING SOLUTION TO
LARGE AREAS THAT YOU CANNOT FULLY
CLEAN BEFORE THE SOLUTION DRIES ON THE
SURFACE. IF YOU DO NOT OBEY THIS
PRECAUTION, STAIN CAN OCCUR ON THE
SURFACE.
(2) Apply the cleaning solution with a low-pressure spray gun,
source of dry compressed air or a soft-bristle brush.
(3) Let the cleaning solution soak into the surface for a
sufficient time for the dirt to become soft (about 5 minutes).
CAUTION: DO NOT USE HIGH PRESSURE (MAXIMUM 70
PSI) AND DO NOT POINT THE FLOW OF WATER
DIRECTLY
TO
THE
ANGLE-OF-ATTACK
SENSORS
OR
OTHER
MECHANICAL,
ELECTRICAL OR HYDRAULIC COMPONENTS.
CAUSE
SERIOUS
DAMAGE
TO
THE
EQUIPMENT.
CAUTION: KEEP
THE NOZZLE
OF THE SPRAY
EQUIPMENT MORE THAN 304 MM (12 IN) AWAY
FROM THE SURFACE OF THE AIRPLANE. THE
SPRAY CAN CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE
AIRCRAFT SURFACE.
(4) Fully flush with a plastic hose or equivalent and clean water,
three or more times. Then, flush the surface from its top
down to the bottom.
NOTE: If necessary, apply solution again and rub with a
soft cloth, soft-bristle brush or paint brush to help
you remove the dirt.
(5) Dry the surface with compressed air or with a dry soft cloth.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-22-01-100-801-A/300
Page 305
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
D. Heavy Dirt - Cleaning
CAUTION: PUT ON GLOVES AND GOGGLES TO PREVENT
INJURY TO YOUR SKIN AND EYES. USE A
SAFETY HARNESS WHEN YOU ARE ON WET
SURFACES ABOVE THE GROUND.
CAUTION: OBEY THE MANUFACTURERS INSTRUCTIONS
WHEN YOU PREPARE AND APPLY CLEANING
AND DISINFECTANT SOLUTIONS. IF THESE
PRODUCTS ARE STRONGER THAN THE ONES
SPECIFIED, THEY CAN CAUSE DAMAGE THE
CAUTION: DO NOT APPLY CLEANING SOLUTION TO
LARGE AREAS THAT YOU CANNOT FULLY
CLEAN BEFORE THE SOLUTION DRIES ON THE
SURFACE. IF YOU DO NOT OBEY THIS
PRECAUTION, STAIN CAN OCCUR ON THE
SURFACE.
(2) Apply solution to the heavily dirty areas with a soft-bristle
brush or cloth.
(3) Let the cleaning solution soak for approximately 5 minutes.
DIRECTLY
TO
THE
ANGLE-OF-ATTACK
SENSORS
OR
OTHER
MECHANICAL,
CAUSE
SERIOUS
DAMAGE
TO
THE
EQUIPMENT.
CAUTION: KEEP
THE NOZZLE
OF THE SPRAY
AIRCRAFT SURFACE.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-22-01-100-801-A/300
Page 306
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
(4) Fully flush with a plastic hose or equivalent and clean water.
CAUTION: DO
NOT
LET
CLEANING
PRODUCTS
(SOLVENTS)
TOUCH
SEALANT
BEADS,
LENSES,
POLYCARBONATE
WINDOWS,
WINDSHIELDS, PAINTED SURFACES, AND
ACRYLIC PARTS. SOLVENTS CAN CAUSE
DAMAGE TO THESE SURFACES.
(5) To remove the heavy dirt from other areas, except the pylon
movable fairing and flap track movable fairing and flap track
(a) Soak a cloth or paint brush in solvent solvent MIL-PRF680 Type 1 and rub the dirty area to make the dirt soft.
(b) Remove the dirt with a dry cloth before solvent solvent
MIL-PRF-680 Type 1 dries.
WARNING: ALWAYS
OBEY
THE
MANUFACTURERS
YOU USE METHYL ETHYL KETONE (MEK). DO
NOT GET MEK ON YOUR SKIN, IN YOUR EYES
OR MOUTH, AND DO NOT BREATHE ITS
FUMES. KEEP MEK AWAY FROM SPARKS,
FLAMES OR SOURCES OF HEAT. PUT ON
APPROVED
PROTECTIVE
CLOTHING,
GOGGLES AND GLOVES. MEK IS POISONOUS
AND FLAMMABLE, AND IF YOU DO NOT OBEY
THESE PRECAUTIONS, INJURIES CAN OCCUR.
CAUTION: DO
NOT
LET
CLEANING
PRODUCTS
(SOLVENTS)
TOUCH
SEALANT
BEADS,
LENSES,
POLYCARBONATE
WINDOWS,
WINDSHIELDS, PAINTED SURFACES, AND
ACRYLIC PARTS. SOLVENTS CAN CAUSE
DAMAGE TO THESE SURFACES.
(6) To remove the oil dirt from the pylon movable fairing and
flap track fairing with solvent MEK, do as follows:
(a) Soak a soft cloth in solvent MEK and rub the dirty area.
(b) Remove the dirt with a dry cloth before solvent MEK
dries.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-22-01-100-801-A/300
Page 307
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
(8) Apply the cleaning solution with a low-pressure spray gun,
source of dry compressed air or a soft-bristle brush.
DIRECTLY
TO
THE
ANGLE-OF-ATTACK
SENSORS
OR
OTHER
MECHANICAL,
CAUSE
SERIOUS
DAMAGE
TO
THE
EQUIPMENT.
CAUTION: KEEP
THE NOZZLE
OF THE SPRAY
AIRCRAFT SURFACE.
(9) Fully flush with a plastic hose or equivalent and clean water.
(10)Dry the surface with compressed air or with a dry soft cloth.
E. Landing Gears - Cleaning
(1) Refer to AMM MPP 12-12-10/301.
F. Job Close-Up
(1) Remove the adhesive tape from the forward cargo door and
seals.
(2) Remove the adhesive tape from the aft cargo door and
seals.
(3) Remove the adhesive tape from the forward service door
and seals.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-22-01-100-801-A/300
Page 308
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
(4) Remove the adhesive tape from the aft service door and
seals.
(5) Remove the adhesive tape from the forward passenger door
and seals.
(6) Remove the adhesive tape from the aft passenger door and
seals.
(7) Remove the adhesive tape from the emergency hatches
and seals.
(8) Open the inlets and outlets of the refrigeration pack
compartments sealed before (AMM SDS 21-51-00/1).
(9) Open the FWD electronic compartment air exhaustion
grilles sealed before (AMM SDS 21-26-00/1).
(10)Remove the adhesive tape and the polyethylene film from
the AOA vanes and from their attachment bases on the
fuselage.
(11)Clean the windshield (AMM SDS 56-11-00/1).
(12)Clean the windows (AMM TASK 12-22-01-100-802-A/300).
(13)Remove the adhesive tape from the access panel 351GL.
(14)Remove the covers from the ice detector, engine air
intake/exhaust, total air temperature, auxiliary power unit,
fan cowl ventilation, NACA intake, thrust reverser exhaust,
static port, nose and main wheel tires, smart probes, and
grille door on rear fuselage.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-22-01-100-801-A/300
Page 309
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
BRUSH (REF.)
SPRAY
GUN (REF.)
CLOTH (REF.)
PLASTIC
WATER HOSE (REF.)
SWEEPING
BRUSH (REF.)
External Aircraft - Cleaning

Figure 301
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-22-01-100-801-A/300
Page 310
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
B
A
REMOVE BEFORE FLIGHT
ZONE
151
A
3
STATIC PORT
ADHESIVE
MASKING
TAPE 25 mm
STATIC PORT
STATIC
PORT
(REF.)
ORANGE VINYL
STREAMER
ORANGE VINYL
STREAMER
FIX THE TOP EDGE OF THE ORANGE VINYL

STREAMER WITH ADHESIVE TAPE.
5
ATTACH THE ORANGE VINYL STREAMER THE STATIC
PORT TO COVER THE HOLES.
STATIC
PORT
(REF.)
ADHESIVE
MASKING
TAPE 25 mm
STATIC
PORT
(REF.)
ORANGE VINYL
STREAMER
ADHESIVE
MASKING
TAPE 25 mm
APPLY A HORIZONTAL STRIP OF ADHESIVE TAPE OVER

THE ORANGE VINYL STREAMER BELLOW THE STATIC
PORT HOLES OVERLAPPING THE TWO VERTICAL STRIPS.
ORANGE VINYL
STREAMER
APPLY TWO STRIPS OF ADHESIVE TAPE OVER THE SIDES
OF THE ORANGE VINYL STREAMER OVERLAPPING THE
TOP STRIP OF ADHESIVE TAPE.
Static Port - Cover Procedure

Figure 302
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-22-01-100-801-A/300
Page 311/312
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
GHSH TASK 12-22-01-100-807-A
1. Cockpit - Cleaning
A. General
(1) This section gives instructions for the maintenance and
cleaning procedures on materials and components of the
cockpit interior.
B. Job Set-Up
WARNING:
MAKE SURE THAT THERE IS A GOOD

AIRFLOW THROUGH THE WORKAREA AND
OBEY
THESE
MANUFACTURERS
INSTRUCTIONS:
PUT ON PROTECTIVE CLOTHING.
DO NOT LET THE MATERIAL GET IN YOUR
MOUTH.
DO NOT SMOKE NEAR THE WORK AREA.
DO NOT BREATHE THE GAS.
THESE MATERIALS ARE POISONOUS AND
FLAMMABLE AND CAN CAUSE SKIN OR EYE
IRRITATION. IF YOUR SKIN OR EYES SHOW
SIGNS OF IRRITATION, GET MEDICAL AID
IMMEDIATELY.
WARNING:
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
BE CAREFUL NOT TO BREATHE THE

FUMES OF FINISHES AND SOLVENTS
DO THE WORK IN AN AREA WITH A GOOD
AIRFLOW.
USE APPROVED RESPIRATORY
PROTECTION AS NECESSARY.
DO NOT GET FINISHES AND SOLVENTS IN
YOUR EYES OR ON YOUR SKIN AND
CLOTHING.
KEEP MATERIALS AWAY FROM SOURCES
OF IGNITION.
FINISHES AND SOLVENTS ARE TOXIC AND
FLAMMABLE.
12-22-01-100-807-A/300
Page 301
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
WARNING:


(GHSH TASK 20-00-00-910-801-A/200).
(2) Do the ACFT normal parking procedures (GHSH TASK 1010-01-500-801-A/200).
WARNING:
MAKE SURE THAT THE DOWNLOCK PINS

ARE INSTALLED ON ALL THE LANDING GEAR
UNITS. REMOVE THE DOWNLOCK PIN ONLY
FROM THE LANDING GEAR UNIT THAT YOU
WILL
ADJUST.
IF
YOU
MOVE
THE
LANDINGGEAR CONTROL LEVER, THE
INJURIES TO PERSONS OR DAMAGE TO THE
EQUIPMENT.
(3) Make sure that the LDG safety pins are installed (GHSH
TASK 32-00-05-400-801-A/400).
(4) Install the workstand below the FWD passenger door and
FWD service door.
(5) Open the FWD passenger door (AMM SDS 52-11-00/1) and
FWD service door (AMM SDS 52-41-00/1).
(6) Open the cockpit door and the direct-vision window (AMM
SDS 56-12-00/1).
C. Carpets - Cleaning
CAUTION:
DO
NOT
USE
CHLORINATED
AND
FLUORCARBON SOLVENTS IN ACRYLIC,
POLYCARBONATE,
AND
POLYSULFONE
PLASTICS OR IN AREAS PAINTED WITH
WATER-BASE PAINTS. THESE SOLVENTS
CAN CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE SURFACES.
CAUTION:
DO NOT USE SPRAY CLEANERS ON

ACOUSTIC INSULATION OR PERFORATED
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-22-01-100-807-A/300
Page 302
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
SURFACES. THE SPRAY CLEANERS CAN
CAUSE DAMAGE TO THESE SURFACES.
CAUTION:
DO NOT USE SHARP METAL TOOLS WHEN

YOU CLEAN THE AIRCRAFT. THESE TOOLS
CAN CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE AIRCRAFT.
CAUTION:
OBEY
THE
MANUFACTURERS
INSTRUCTIONS WHEN YOU PREPARE AND
APPLY
CLEANING
AND
DISINFECTANT
SOLUTIONS. IF THESE PRODUCTS ARE
STRONGER THAN THE ONES SPECIFIED,
THEY
CAN
CAUSE
DAMAGE
THE
CAUTION:
USE
ONLY
SPECIFIED
SOLVENTS,
CAUTION:
PUT ON GLOVES AND GOGGLES TO

PREVENT INJURY TO YOUR SKIN AND EYES.
USE A SAFETY HARNESS WHEN YOU ARE ON
WET SURFACES ABOVE THE GROUND.
(1) Do the regular cleaning as follows:

(a) Vacuum the carpet to remove all loose particles.
(b) Prepare the carpet cleaning solution of Shampoo (AMS
1630).
(c) Apply it onto the surface while you use a soft-bristle
brush lightly.
(d) Let the cleaned area dry.
(e) Make sure that the cleaning operations on adjacent
surfaces do not cause the surfaces already cleaned to
become dirty.
(f) Vacuum it to complete the cleaning.
(2) Do the spot cleaning as follows:
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-22-01-100-807-A/300
Page 303
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
CAUTION: DO NOT USE SHARP METAL TOOLS WHEN

(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
(j)
(k)
Lightly use a polyethylene spatula and a lint-free wiper

cloth to clean the area.
Prepare the carpet cleaning solution of Shampoo
(AMS 1630).
Lightly apply it onto the surface with a soft-bristle
brush.
Repeat the operation until the surface is fully cleaned.
Fully dry the surface with a cloth.
Soak the area with a chlorinated solvent (FED. SPEC.
P-D-680 Type l) until you can remove the stains (from
sealants, paints, adhesives, greases, oils, gums, and
lipsticks) easily.
While the surface is wet, lightly use a polyethylene
spatula on the dirty area.
Apply it onto the surface while you use a soft-bristle
brush lightly.
Let the cleaned area dry.
Make sure that the cleaning operations on adjacent
surfaces do not cause the surfaces already cleaned to
become dirty.
Vacuum it to complete the cleaning.
D. Seat Cover and Curtain Fabric - Cleaning
NOT
USE
CHLORINATED
AND
CAUTION: DO
POLYCARBONATE,
AND
POLYSULFONE
WATER-BASE PAINTS. THESE SOLVENTS CAN
CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE SURFACES.
CAUTION: DO NOT USE SPRAY CLEANERS ON ACOUSTIC
INSULATION OR PERFORATED SURFACES.
THE SPRAY CLEANERS CAN CAUSE DAMAGE
TO THESE SURFACES.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-22-01-100-807-A/300
Page 304
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK


ONLY
SPECIFIED
SOLVENTS,
CAUTION: USE
(1) Clean the seat cover and curtain as follows:

NOTE: When the fire-blocking fabric is dirty, do a dry
cleaning, with solvent (FED. SPEC. P-D-680,
Type I).
(a)
(b)
Collect all loose particles with a vacuum cleaner.

Remove stains from fabric and be careful not to soak
the seat upholstery.
NOTE: For stains difficult to remove, you can use a
soft-bristle brush.
(2) If necessary, remove the seat cover and curtain to do the

cleaning procedure as follows:
(a) Remove the cover from the seat.
(b) Apply a matching-type Velcro tape to all Velcro tapes to
prevent damage during the cleaning.
(c) Remove the stains.
(d) Turn the seat-cover inner side out.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-22-01-100-807-A/300
Page 305
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
(e) Dry-clean with a mixture of solvent (FED. SPEC. P-D680, Type I), neutral detergent (MIL- D -16791G
Type 1), and cold water.
NOTE: The solution must be in the proportion that the
detergent manufacturer recommends and the
temperature must not be more than 22 C
(72 F).
(f) Dry the cover at a temperature not more than 55 C
(130 F).
(g) Remove the Velcro tape again.
(h) Install the cover onto the seat.
E. Acrylic Parts - Cleaning
NOT
USE
CHLORINATED
AND
CAUTION: DO
POLYCARBONATE,
AND
POLYSULFONE
TO THESE SURFACES.


ONLY
SPECIFIED
SOLVENTS,
CAUTION: USE
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-22-01-100-807-A/300
Page 306
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK

(1) Lightly rub the surface with a soft cloth soaked in neutral
detergent (MIL- D -16791G Type 1) to fully clean the
surface.
(2) Use a soft cloth soaked in clean water to fully remove the
detergent.
(3) Rub the surface dry with a soft clean cloth.
CAUTION: DO NOT LET NAPHTHA TOUCH THE PLASTIC
SURFACES. NAPHTHA CAN CAUSE DAMAGE
TO THEM.
(4) If necessary, clean the surface with a cloth soaked in

Naphtha (TT-N-95,Type ll ) and detergent (AMS 1550).
(5) Rub the surface with a soft cloth soaked in neutral detergent
(MIL- D -16791G Type 1) to make sure that it is fully clean.
(6) Fully remove all detergent with a soft cloth soaked in clean
water.
F. Leathers - Cleaning
NOT
USE
CHLORINATED
AND
CAUTION: DO
POLYCARBONATE,
AND
POLYSULFONE
TO THESE SURFACES.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-22-01-100-807-A/300
Page 307
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK


ONLY
SPECIFIED
SOLVENTS,
CAUTION: USE
(1) Do the regular cleaning as follows:

(a) Prepare the neutral cleaning solution of detergent (MILD-16791G type l).
(b) Apply only foam to leather with a soft cloth. Lightly lintfree wiper cloth with circular movements.
(c) Remove all detergent with a soft cloth soaked in clean
water.
(d) Rub the surface with a dry soft clean cloth.
(2) Do the spot cleaning as follows:
(a) Prepare the neutral cleaning solution of detergent (MILD-16791G Type l).
(b) Clean stains with neutral cleaning solution.
(c) Prepare the cleaning solution of solvent (FED. SPEC. PD-680, Type l).
(d) Clean stains with a soft cloth soaked in cleaning
solution.
(e) Prepare the neutral cleaning solution of detergent (MILD-16791G type l).
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-22-01-100-807-A/300
Page 308
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
(f) Apply only foam to leather with a soft cloth. Lightly lintfree wiper cloth with circular movements.
(g) Remove all detergent with a soft cloth soaked in clean
water.
(h) Rub the surface with a dry soft clean cloth
G. Metal Surfaces - Cleaning
NOT
USE
CHLORINATED
AND
CAUTION: DO
POLYCARBONATE,
AND
POLYSULFONE
TO THESE SURFACES.


ONLY
SPECIFIED
SOLVENTS,
CAUTION: USE
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-22-01-100-807-A/300
Page 309
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
CAUTION: DO NOT PUT THE REMAINING CLEANING

PRODUCT
BACK
INTO
ITS
ORIGINAL
CONTAINER.
THIS
CAN
CAUSE
CONTAMINATION
OF
THE
CLEANING
PRODUCT THAT IS IN THE CONTAINER.
(1) Clean the metal surfaces with solvents as follows:

(a) Moist a clean dry cotton cloth with the solvent (FED.
SPEC. P-D-680, Type l ). Put the solvent onto the cloth.
NOTE:
We recommend that you apply a corrosion
inhibitor on metal surfaces independently of
the cleaning material that you use. Metal
surfaces are normally treated or anodized
to prevent corrosion. Normal wear, and
abnormal abuse affect corrosion, and it is
always a factor in aircraft.
Do not scour or abrade surfaces. Corrosion
protection is normally a thin layer of anodic
or organic agent. Abrasion can remove the
protection film or coating.
Do not permit solvent to evaporate on
surface.
Do not use cloth a second time because
this can redeposit contaminants on the
surface.
(b) Clean the metal surfaces with the solvent (FED. SPEC.
P-D-680, Type l) until the surface is free of dirt.
NOTE: For oxidation, powdery white corrosion, use
corrosion inhibitor/cleaner.
(c) Dry the parts with a clean, dry cotton cloth.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-22-01-100-807-A/300
Page 310
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK

(2) Clean the metal surfaces with BRULIN 815MX:
NOTE: Cool water works best with normal dirt and dust.
Warm water works best with oily surfaces.
(a) Prepare a solution of BRULIN 815MX with cool or
lukewarm water at 32 - 49 C (90 - 120 F). Prepare a
solution with 1 part BRULIN 815MX to 64 parts of water
by volume, for light dirt. You can increase the solution
up to 1 part of BRULIN 815MX to 10 parts of water by
volume.
(b) Apply the solution with a spray bottle, soft bristle brush,
sponge or cotton cloth.
(c) Rub the surface with a wet sponge or cotton cloth.
NOTE: You can also spray the material onto the
surfaces and rub with a clean sponge or soft
bristle brush.
(d) Do not let excess run onto adjacent surfaces and touch
porous surfaces.
(e) Rub the dirty area as necessary, and repeat applications
of the solution to remove contamination.
(f) Flush the surface with a fresh sponge or a cloth moist
with clean water to remove residues.
(g) Dry the surface with a clean, dry cotton cloth.
(3) Clean the metal surfaces with CALLA 301-A LEMON:
(a) Prepare a solution of CALLA 301-A LEMON with cool or
solution with 1 part CALLA 301-ALEMON to 4-8 parts of
water by volume for normal cleaning. For concentrated
dirt or spots, use full strength.
or cotton cloth.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-22-01-100-807-A/300
Page 311
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
CAUTION: DO NOT USE SPRAY CLEANERS ON

(c) Spray the solution onto the surface.

(d) Do not let excess run onto adjacent surfaces and touch
porous surfaces.
(e) Rub the surface with a clean cloth or sponge.
(f) Rub the dirty area as necessary, and repeat applications
as necessary to remove contamination.
(g) Flush the surface with a fresh sponge or a cloth moist
(h) Dry the surface with a clean, dry cotton cloth.
H. Plastic or Vinyl Panels - Cleaning
(1) Clean the plastic or vinyl panels with mild household
detergent as follows:
(a) Prepare a solution of mild household detergent with
lukewarm water at 32 - 49 C (90 - 120 F). Prepare the
solution with 1 part detergent to 50 parts of water by
volume.
(b) Wet a cotton cloth or sponge with the solution.
(c) Use circular wipes to apply the solution to the surface.
(d) Do not let excess run onto adjacent surfaces.
(e) Rub the dirty area as necessary, and repeat
applications of the solution to remove contamination.
(f) Flush the surface with a fresh sponge or a cloth moist
(g) Dry the surface with a clean, dry cotton cloth.
(2) Clean the metal surfaces with BRULIN 815MX:
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-22-01-100-807-A/300
Page 312
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
(a) Prepare a solution of BRULIN 815MX with cool or
solution with 1 part BRULIN 815MX to 64 parts of water
by volume, for light dirt. You can increase the solution up
to 1 part of BRULIN 815MX to 10 parts of water by
volume.
sponge or cotton cloth.
(c) Spray the solution onto the surface. Rub the surface
with a clean cloth or sponge.
(d) Rub the surface with a clean cloth or sponge.
(e) Do not let excess run onto adjacent surfaces and touch
porous surfaces.
(f) Rub the dirty area as necessary, and repeat
applications of the solution to remove contamination.
with clean water to remove residue.
(3) Clean the plastic or vinyl panels with CALLA 301-A LEMON:
(a) Prepare a solution of CALLA 301-A LEMON with cool or
solution with 1 part CALLA 301-ALEMON to 4-8 parts of
water by volume for normal cleaning. For concentrated
dirt or spots, use full strength.
or cotton cloth.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-22-01-100-807-A/300
Page 313
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK

(c) Spray the solution onto the surface.

(d) Rub the surface with a clean cloth or sponge.
(e) Do not let excess run onto adjacent surfaces and touch
porous surfaces.
(f) Rub the dirty area as necessary, and repeat applications
of the solution to remove contamination.
I. Painted Surfaces - Cleaning
NOT
USE
CHLORINATED
AND
CAUTION: DO
POLYCARBONATE,
AND
POLYSULFONE
TO THESE SURFACES.


ONLY
SPECIFIED
SOLVENTS,
CAUTION: USE
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-22-01-100-807-A/300
Page 314
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK

CAUTION: DO NOT PUT THE REMAINING CLEANING

PRODUCT
BACK
INTO
ITS
ORIGINAL
CONTAINER.
THIS
CAN
CAUSE
CONTAMINATION
OF
THE
CLEANING
PRODUCT THAT IS IN THE CONTAINER.
(1) Prepare the neutral cleaning solution of detergent (MIL-D16791G Type l).
(2) Apply neutral cleaning solution to the dirty area with a soft
cloth.
(3) Rub the surface with a soft clean cloth soaked in clean
water to remove the detergent.
(5) If necessary, rub the surface with a cloth moist with solvent
(FED. SPEC. P-D-680 Type I).
(6) Apply neutral cleaning solution to the dirty area with a soft
cloth.
(7) Rub the surface with a soft clean cloth soaked in clean
water to remove the detergent.
J. Decals - Cleaning
NOT
USE
CHLORINATED
AND
CAUTION: DO
POLYCARBONATE,
AND
POLYSULFONE
TO THESE SURFACES.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-22-01-100-807-A/300
Page 315
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK


ONLY
SPECIFIED
SOLVENTS,
CAUTION: USE
CAUTION: DO NOT CLEAN DECALS WITH ORGANIC

SOLVENTS
(ALCHOOL,
CHLORINATED
SOLVENTS, FLUORINATED SOLVENTS, ETC.).
THESE SOLVENTS CAN CAUSE DAMAGE TO
THE DECALS.
(1) Prepare the neutral cleaning solution of detergent (MIL-D16791G Type l).
(2) Rub the decal with a soft clean cloth soaked in neutral
cleaning solution.
(3) Remove all neutral cleaning solution with a soft cloth
soaked in clean water.
K. Job Close-Up
(1) Close the cockpit controls door and the direct-vision window
(AMM SDS 56-12-00/1).
(2) Close the FWD passenger door (AMM SDS 52-11-00/1) and
FWD service door (AMM SDS 52-41-00/1).
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-22-01-100-807-A/300
Page 316
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
(3) Remove the workstand from below the FWD passenger

door and FWD service door.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
12-22-01-100-807-A/300
Page 317/318
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
GHSH TASK 20-00-00-910-801-A
1. Aircraft Maintenance Safety Procedures - Standard Procedures
A. General
(1) This task gives the usual safety procedures for the aircraft
maintenance.
(2) The functions of this task are to configure the aircraft before
the maintenance procedures and to restore the aircraft after
the maintenance procedures.
(3) For short maintenance procedures you can use the ramp or
other approved areas. But, for long periods of the aircraft
maintenance, you can use a hangar.
B.
Aircraft Safe Procedures for Maintenance Services

Maintenance Practices (Figure 201) (Figure 202) (Figure 203)
WARNING:
MAKE SURE THAT THE DOOR BARRIER

STRAP IS INSTALLED WHEN THERE IS NOT A
WORKSTAND BELOW THE DOOR. IF THE
BARRIER STRAP IS NOT INSTALLED, A
PERSON CAN FALL FROM THE AIRCRAFT
AND INJURIES CAN OCCUR TO HIM OR HER.
(1) For the ramp maintenance procedures, do the SUBTASK

860-001-A.
(2) For the hangar maintenance procedures, do the SUBTASK
860-004-A and SUBTASK 860-002-A.
SUBTASK 860-001-A
(3) For the ramp maintenance procedures, do as follow:
WARNING:
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
MAKE SURE THAT THE DOWNLOCK PINS ARE

INSTALLED IN EACH LANDING GEAR.
INJURIES TO PERSONS AND/OR DAMAGE TO
THE EQUIPMENT.
20-00-00-910-801-A/200
Page 201
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
(a) Install the landing gear downlock safety pins in the nose
and main landing gears (GHSH TASK 32-00-05-400-801A/400).
(b) Put the chocks GSE 070 on the landing gear wheels.
WARNING:
BE SURE TO CORRECTLY INSTALL THE RAT

STOW LOCK PIN. IF THE RAT STOW LOCK PIN
IS NOT CORRECTLY INSTALLED, AND THE
RAT
ACCIDENTALLY
RECEIVES
AN
AUTOMATIC OR MANUAL DEPLOY COMMAND,
THE RAT WILL EXTEND AND POSSIBLY
CAUSE INJURY TO PERSONS AND DAMAGE
TO EQUIPMENT.
(c) Lock the RAT with stow lock pin GSE 189, and install the
REMOVE-BEFORE-FLIGHT streamer (AMM TASK 24-2308-480-801-A/400).
(d) Set the emergency/parking brake to the PARKING
position.
CAUTION: THE
MODULE
OR
UNIT
CONTAINS
ELECTROSTATIC
DISCHARGE
SENSITIVE
(ESDS) ITEMS. OBEY THE APPROVED
INDUSTRY PRECAUTIONS WHEN YOU TOUCH,
REMOVE, OR INSERT PARTS OR ASSEMBLIES.
DAMAGE CAN OCCUR FROM ELECTROSTATIC
DISCHARGE.
(e) When you work with electronic equipment, obey the ESD
rules. Refer to AMM TASK 20-40-00-910-801-A/200.
(f) When working on or around EWIS components, do the
following procedures:
SWPM 20-61-10
SWPM 20-67-00
NOTE: These procedures should be done to obey the
Protect and Clean As You Go philosophy.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
20-00-00-910-801-A/200
Page 202
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
(g) Keep the area around the aircraft free from residues,
grease, oil, and fuel.
(h) Use correct containers to collect/drain fluids.
(i) Use approved platforms to get access to the aircraft.
NOT
TOUCH
THE
INTEGRATED
WARNING: DO
PITOT/STATIC/AOA SENSORS, TAT SENSORS,
AND ICE DETECTORS. THESE COMPONENTS
OPERATE AT HIGH TEMPERATURE. IF YOU
TOUCH THEM, THEY WILL CAUSE INJURIES TO
YOU.
(j)
The integrated pitot/static/AOA heating system is ON if:

One of the engines is running;
The aircraft is in flight condition;
The TAT heating system senses that MAU 3, MAU 1,
SPDA 2, GIO MOD 1 (MAU 1 - MOD 11/12), Custom
I/O - MOD 2 (MAU 3 - MOD 7/8), or SPDA 2 LRM 11
are OFF (Refer to AMM SDS 30-31-00/1 and WM 3031-50);
The integrated pitot/static/AOA sensors are OFF (Refer
to AMM SDS 30-31-00/1 and AMM SDS 34-13-00/1).
SUBTASK 860-004-A
(4) For the hangar maintenance procedures, do as follow:
WARNING: MAKE SURE THAT THE DOWNLOCK PINS
ARE INSTALLED IN EACH LANDING GEAR.
LANDING GEAR CAN RETRACT AND
CAUSE INJURIES TO PERSONS AND/OR
(a) Install the landing gear downlock safety pins in the nose
and main landing gears (GHSH TASK 32-00-05-400801-A/400).
(b) Put the chocks GSE 070 on the landing gear wheels.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
20-00-00-910-801-A/200
Page 203
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
WARNING: BE SURE TO CORRECTLY INSTALL THE

RAT STOW LOCK PIN. IF THE RAT STOW
LOCK PIN IS NOT CORRECTLY INSTALLED,
AND THE RAT ACCIDENTALLY RECEIVES
AN AUTOMATIC OR MANUAL DEPLOY
COMMAND, THE RAT WILL EXTEND AND
POSSIBLY CAUSE INJURY TO PERSONS
AND DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT.
(c) Lock the RAT with stow lock pin GSE 189, and install
the REMOVE-BEFORE-FLIGHT streamer (AMM TASK
24-23-08-480-801-A/400).
(d) Set the emergency/parking brake to the PARKING
position.
CAUTION: THE MODULE OR UNIT CONTAINS
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE SENSITIVE
(ESDS) ITEMS. OBEY THE APPROVED
INDUSTRY PRECAUTIONS WHEN YOU
TOUCH, REMOVE, OR INSERT PARTS OR
ASSEMBLIES. DAMAGE CAN OCCUR FROM
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE.
(e) When you work with electronic equipment, obey the

ESD rules. Refer to AMM TASK 20-40-00-910-801A/200.
(f) When working on or around EWIS components, do the
following procedures:
SWPM 20-67-00
SWPM 20-61-10
(g) Keep the area around the aircraft free from residues,
grease, oil and fuel.
(h) Use correct containers to collect/drain fluids.
(i) Use approved platforms to get access to the aircraft.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
20-00-00-910-801-A/200
Page 204
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
SUBTASK 860-002-A
WARNING: DO NOT TOUCH THE EXTERNAL SURFACE OF
THE WINDSHIELD WHEN THE WINDSHIELD
HEATING SYSTEM IS ON. IF YOU DO THIS, YOU
CAN FEEL A SHOCK. THIS OCCURS BECAUSE
OF ITS AC ELECTRIC COUPLING. IF YOU DO
NOT OBEY THIS PRECAUTION, INJURY TO YOU
CAN OCCUR.
(5) For the hangar maintenance procedures, do as follows:

(a) Open these circuit breakers and put a circuit breaker
ring and tag (inoperative - do not operate) on each one
of them:
WINDSHIELD 1 CMD-RICC (DC BUS 2)

WINDSHIELD 1 PWR-RICC (AC BUS 2)
WINDSHIELD 2 CMD-LICC (DC BUS 1)
WINDSHIELD 2 PWR-LICC (AC BUS 1)
(b) Put NO SMOKING placards around the maintenance

area. Refer to Figure 201.
(c) To prevent damage, circulation areas outside the work
place must be available for must be available for
(d) If possible, do the maintenance procedures in an
isolated area. Let a radius of at least 3 m from other
aircraft.
(e) Make sure that the flaps and slats are retracted.
WARNING: MAKE SURE THAT THE FLIGHT-CONTROL
SAFETY LOCKS AND THE WARNING NOTICES
ARE IN POSITION. THIS IS TO PREVENT NA
ACCIDENTAL COMMAND OF THE FLIGHT
CONTROL SURFACES AND INJURY TO
PERSONS.
(f) Put a warning notice in the cockpit to tell persons not to

operate the aircraft controls.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
20-00-00-910-801-A/200
Page 205
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
(g) When you work in the lower fuselage area, put the
covers (GSE 023) on the TCAS, and DME and XPDR.
(h) Put the winglet covers GSE 197. Refer to Figure 202,
Sheet 2.
(i) Open these circuit breakers and put a circuit breaker
ring and tag (inoperative - do not operate) on each one
of them:
ADS PROBE 1 HTR-LICC (DC BUS 1)

ADS PROBE 2 HTR-LICC (DC BUS1)
ADS PROBE 4 HTR-RICC (DC BUS 2)
PROBE 3 HEATER PWR-RHCBP (DC ESS BUS 3 NAV)
TAT 1 HEAT-SPDA1 (CBMENU/CB BY SYS/ICE/RAIN)
WARNING: MAKE SURE THAT THE INTEGRATED
PITOT/STATIC/AOA
SENSOR
HEATING
SYSTEM, TAT HEATING SYSTEM, STATIC
PORT HEATING SYSTEM AND ICE
DETECTOR SYSTEM ARE OFF. MAKE SURE
THAT
THE
INTEGRATED
PITOT/STATIC/AOA
SENSORS,
TAT
SENSORS, STATIC PORT AND ICE
DETECTORS ARE COLD BEFORE YOU PUT
COVERS ON THEM. BE CAREFUL NOT TO
TOUCH THESE COMPONENTS WHEN THEY
ARE HOT. IF YOU TOUCH THEM, THEY
WILL CAUSE INJURY TO YOU.
WARNING: THE INTEGRATED PITOT/STATIC/AOA AND

TAT HEATING SYSTEMS MUST BE OFF
DURING MAINTENANCE. THIS IS BECAUSE
SYSTEMS THAT INTERFACE WITH MAU 1,
MAU 3 AND SPDA 2 CAN CAUSE THE
INTEGRATED PITOT/STATIC/AOAAND TAT
SENSORS TO BECOME HOT. THESE
SENSORS
OPERATE
AT
HIGH
TEMPERATURE. IF YOU TOUCH THEM,
THEY WILL CAUSE INJURIES TO YOU.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
20-00-00-910-801-A/200
Page 206
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
WARNING: DO NOT TOUCH THE INTEGRATED

PITOT/STATIC AOA SENSOR, TAT SENSOR,
STATIC PORT AND ICE DETECTORS
IMMEDIATELY AFTER THE HEATER WAS
SET TO OFF TO PREVENT INJURY TO
PERSONS.
(j) Put the covers on the integrated pitot/static/AOA

sensors (GSE 020, GSE 022), TAT sensor (GSE 025),
and the ice detectors (GSE 024). Refer to Figure 202.
(k) Put the wheel tires covers GSE 083. Refer to Figure
202, Sheet 3.
(l) Put the protection fence around the area of the RAT
door. Refer to Figure 204.
WARNING: MAKE SURE THAT THERE ARE NO
PERSONS OR EQUIPMENT IN THE
LANDING GEAR COMPARTMENT.
(m) Put the protection fences GSE 114, or guards around

the applicable areas during the retraction or extension of
the landing gear. Refer to Figure 203.
(n) If during the maintenance procedures the engine run-up
is necessary, obey the safety precautions in the AMM
MPP 71-00-00/201.
C. Aircraft Restoration Procedures for Maintenance Services
Maintenance Practices
(1) To restore the aircraft after the maintenance procedure, do
as follow:
(a) Remove the warning notice in the cockpit that tells
persons not to operate the aircraft controls.
(b) Remove the covers (GSE 023) from the TCAS, the
DME, and the XPDR.
(c) Remove the covers (GSE 024, GSE 025) from TAT
sensor, and the ice detectors.
(d) Remove the winglet covers GSE 197.
(e) Use the GSE 022 to remove the covers from the
integrated pitot/static/AOA sensors (GSE 020).
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
20-00-00-910-801-A/200
Page 207
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
WARNING: DO NOT TOUCH THE INTEGRATED

PITOT/STATIC AOA SENSOR, TAT SENSOR,
STATIC PORT AND ICE DETECTORS
IMMEDIATELY AFTER THE HEATER WAS
SET TO OFF TO PREVENT INJURY TO
PERSONS.
(f) Remove the circuit breaker ring and tag (inoperative do not operate) from each of tag (inoperative - do not
operate) from each of
ADS PROBE 1 HTR-LICC (DC BUS 1)

ADS PROBE 2 HTR-LICC (DC BUS1)
ADS PROBE 4 HTR-RICC (DC BUS 2)
PROBE 3 HEATER PWR-RHCBP (DC ESS BUS 3 NAV)
(g) Remove the platforms, fire extinguishers, safety
devices, tools, and other equipment and unwanted
materials from the work area.
(h) Remove the items used for EWIS components
protection.
NOTE: After you finish the maintenance activities, make
sure that there is no sign of contamination in
EWIS components. If contamination is found, refer
to SWPM 20-61-10.
(i) Remove the circuit breaker ring and tag (inoperative do not operate) from each of these circuit breakers and
close them:
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
WINDSHIELD 1 CMD-RICC (DC BUS 2)

WINDSHIELD 1 PWR-RICC (AC BUS 2)
WINDSHIELD 2 CMD-LICC (DC BUS 1)
WINDSHIELD 2 PWR-LICC (AC BUS 1)
20-00-00-910-801-A/200
Page 208
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
WHEEL
CHOKS
WHEEL
CHOKS
A
A
CIRCULATION
AREA
AIRCRAFT ON
MAINTENANCE
NO SMOKING
Aircraft Safe for Maintenance - Maintenance Area

Figure 201
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
20-00-00-910-801-A/200
Page 209
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
B
ZONE
651
ZONE
551
ZONES
123/124
221/222
D
ZONE
711
ZONES
123/124
125/126
131/132
ZONES
731
741

F
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
COVER
(GSE 022)
E
1
Aircraft Safe for Maintenance - Aircraft Cover Locations

Figure 202 Sheet 1
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
20-00-00-910-801-A/200
Page 210
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
ICE DETECTOR
COVER
(GSE 024)
TAT SENSOR
COVER
(GSE 025)
COVER WINGLET
(GSE 197)
B
2

Figure 202 Sheet 2
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
20-00-00-910-801-A/200
Page 211
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
H
H
H
H
TDR
ANTENNA
ANTENNA
DME
ANTENNA
COVERDME,
ANTENNAS
(GSE 023)

(GSE 083)
D
3
DME
ANTENNA
TDR
ANTENNA

Figure 202 Sheet 3
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
20-00-00-910-801-A/200
Page 212
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
Aircraft Safe for Maintenance - Landing Gear Protection Fence

Figure 203
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
20-00-00-910-801-A/200
Page 213
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
A
ZONE
124
Aircraft Safe for Maintenance - RAT Access Door Protection Fence

Figure 204
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
20-00-00-910-801-A/200
Page 214
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
GHSH TASK 20-40-02-910-801-A
1. Static Grounding - Standard Practices
A. General
(1) The aircraft has three approved static grounding points, two
on the bottom of each wing leading edge and one on the
right main landing gear.
(2) Bonding is the process of connecting two or more
conductive objects with a conductor to make sure that there
is the same electrical potential between them.
(3) Grounding is the process of connection two or more
conductive objects with a conductor to the ground.
(4) Static Grounding is mandatory in the following situations:
Maintenance in the aircraft with power tools, lights or any
other equipment connected to a power source
Maintenance or servicing operations outside of the
aircraft, during electrical storms
(5) For fuel servicing, the electrical bonding between the aircraft
and the refueling equipment is necessary to prevent sparks
generated because of differential potential between them.
Static Ground is recommended.
(6) For oxygen servicing, there are two options to prevent
sparks caused by static charges:
Static grounding of the aircraft and oxygen servicing
equipment are necessary, or
Electrical bonding between the aircraft and the oxygen
servicing equipment is necessary. Static Ground is
recommended
B. Static Grounding - Standard Practices
WARNING: DURING
ATMOSPHERIC
ELECTRICAL
DISTURBANCES, DO NOT WEAR HEADSET,
TOUCH EQUIPMENT ELECTRICALLY CONNECTED
TO THE AIRCRAFT OR HOLD A GROUND
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
20-40-02-910-801-A/200
Page 201
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
CONNECTION. A LIGHTNING STRIKE CAN CAUSE
SEVERE INJURY TO PERSONS.
(1) Examine the static discharge cable for damage and make
sure that the end-fittings are correctly attached.
NOTE: For static grounding with the use of the wingleading edge points, use a flexible grounding
cable (specification MIL-DTL-83420) with a plug
(specification MILDTL - 83413/4).
For static grounding with the use of the right mainlanding gear point, use a flexible grounding cable
(specification MIL-DTL-83420) with a grounding
clamp (specification MIL-DTL-83413/7).
WARNING: ALWAYS ATTACH THE GROUNDING CABLE TO
THE GROUND CONNECTION FIRST. NEVER
ATTACH THE CABLE TO THE AIRPLANE AND
THEN TO THE GROUND CONNECTION.
(2) For aircraft static grounding, do as follows:
(a) Make sure that the aircraft is parked adjacent to an
approved and identified grounding point.
NOTE: The approved and identified grounding points
can be located in the parking surface or
another fixed location.
(b) Connect the static grounding cable to an approved and
identified grounding point.
(c) Connect the grounding clamp/plug of the static
grounding cable to the approved static grounding point
on the aircraft (Figure 201, Figure 202).
(3) For oxygen or fuel servicing, do the electrical bonding of the
aircraft to servicing equipment as follows:
(a) Connect the bonding cable to the servicing equipment.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
20-40-02-910-801-A/200
Page 202
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
(b) Connect the grounding clamp/plug of the bonding cable
to the approved static grounding point on the aircraft
(Figure 201, Figure 202).
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
20-40-02-910-801-A/200
Page 203
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
A
ZONE
516
A
ZONE
616
GROUND POINT
PLUG
END CONNECTED TO THE

SERVICING EQUIPMENT
OR AT AN APPROPRIATE
GROUND POINT
Wing Ground Points

Figure 201
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
20-40-02-910-801-A/200
Page 204
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
ZONE
741
END CONNECTED TO THE

SERVICING EQUIPMENT
OR AT AN APPROPRIATE
GROUND POINT
GROUNDING
POINT
GROUNDING
CLAMP
Landing Gears Ground Points

Figure 202
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
20-40-02-910-801-A/200
Page 205/206
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
GHSH TASK 24-41-02-860-801-A
1. Connection of the external DC power supply to the aircraft Aircraft / System Configuration
A. General
(1) This task gives the procedure to supply DC electrical power
to the aircraft to start the APU.
(2) You must use this task to start the APU (GHSH TASK 4910-00-910-801-A/200).
(3) The 28-VDC external power supply is connected to the
aircraft through the receptacle installed on the LH side of
the rear fuselage.
B. Job Set-Up
WARNING: MAKE SURE THAT THE AIRCRAFT IS IN A SAFE
CONDITION BEFORE YOU DO THE MAINTENANCE
PROCEDURES. THIS IS TO PREVENT INJURY TO
PERSONS
AND/OR
DAMAGE
TO
THE
EQUIPMENT.
WARNING: MAKE SURE THAT IT IS SAFE TO ENERGIZE THE
AIRCRAFT. CIRCUITS THAT ARE NOT SAFE CAN
CAUSE INJURY TO PERSONS AND/OR DAMAGE
TO EQUIPMENT.
(GHSH TASK 20-00-00-910-801-A/200).
WARNING:
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
IF THE EXTERNAL POWER SUPPLY HAS AN

EARTH GROUNDED NEUTRAL, MAKE SURE
THAT THERE IS NO OPEN OR FLOATING
GROUND IN THE NEUTRAL CIRCUIT OF THE
EXTERNAL POWER SUPPLY. AN OPEN OR
FLOATING GROUND CAN CAUSE AN
ELECTRICAL POTENTIAL IN THE AIRCRAFT
GROUND CIRCUIT. AS A RESULT, SEVERE
INJURIES TO PERSONNEL CAN OCCUR, IF
THEY TOUCH THE AIRCRAFT.
24-41-02-860-801-A/200
Page 201
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
(2) Make sure that the external power supply operates correctly
before you supply power to the aircraft.
WARNING: ALWAYS ATTACH THE GROUNDING CABLE
TO THE GROUND CONNECTION FIRST.
NEVER ATTACH THE CABLE TO THE
AIRPLANE AND THEN TO THE GROUND
CONNECTION.
(a) If the ground return circuit of the external power supply
does not operate correctly, do the static grounding
safety procedure (AMM TASK 20-40-02-910-801A/200).
(3) Set the GSE 043 or GSE 045 to ON.
(4) Adjust the output voltage of the external DC-power supply to
28 0.5 VDC.
(5) Set the GSE 043 or GSE 045 to OFF.
(6) Open the access door 313AL to get access to the external
DC power supply receptacle.
B. Connection of the External DC Power Supply to the Aircraft
- Maintenance Practices
(1) Do these procedures to connect the external DC power
supply to the aircraft:
(a) Connect the GSE 043 or GSE 045 to the external DC
power supply receptacle.
(b) Set the GSE 043 or GSE 045 to ON.
Result:
1. On the external power supply receptacle, on the
external power control panel, the AVAIL lamp in in
the DC GPU PWR pushbutton, comes on (Figure
201).
(c) On the external power supply receptacle, on the
external power control panel, set the DC GPU PWR
pushbutton to the latched in (on) position (Figure 201).
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
24-41-02-860-801-A/200
Page 202
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
Result:
1. On the external power control panel, in the DC GPU
PWR pushbutton, the IN USE lamp comes on.
2. On the external power control panel, the AVAIL
lamp in the DC GPU PWR pushbutton goes off.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
24-41-02-860-801-A/200
Page 203
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
A
ZONE
313
B
313 AL
1. DC GPU PWR
B
External DC Power Supply Receptacle Location
Figure 201
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
24-41-02-860-801-A/200
Page 204
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
GHSH TASK 24-41-02-860-802-A

1. Disconnection of the external DC power supply from the
aircraft - Aircraft / System Configuration
A. General
(1) This task gives the procedure to remove electrical power
from the aircraft after you use an external DC power supply.
(2) The 28-VDC external power supply is connected to the
aircraft through the receptacle installed on the LH side of
the rear fuselage.
B. Job Set-Up
PERSONS
AND/OR
DAMAGE
TO
THE
EQUIPMENT.
(1) Make sure that the aircraft is in the same configuration as it

was at the end of the energization task (GHSH TASK 24-4102-860-801-A/200).
C. Disconnection of the External DC Power Supply from the
Aircraft - Maintenance Practices (Figure 201)
(1) Do these procedures to disconnect the external DC power
supply from the aircraft:
(a) On the external power supply receptacle, on the
external power control panel, set the DC GPU PWR
pushbutton to the latched out (off) position (Figure 201).
Result:
1. On the external power control panel, the IN USE
lamp in the DC GPU PWR pushbutton goes off.
2. On the external power control panel, the AVAIL lamp
in the DC GPU PWR pushbutton comes on.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
24-41-02-860-802-A/200
Page 201
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
(b) Set the GSE 043 or GSE 045 to OFF.

Result:
1. On the external power supply receptacle, on the
external power control panel, the AVAIL lamp in the
DC GPU PWR pushbutton goes off (Figure 201).
WARNING: REMOVE THE ELECTRICAL POWER FROM
THE EXTERNAL POWER CABLE BEFORE YOU
REMOVE IT FROM THE AIRCRAFT. IF YOU DO
NOT OBEY THIS PRECAUTION, AN ELECTRIC
SHOCK CAN OCCUR AND CAUSE INJURY TO
PERSONS.
(2) Disconnect the GSE 043 or GSE 045 from the external DC
power supply receptacle.
D. Job Close-Up (Figure 201)
(1) Close the access door 313AL.
the work area.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
24-41-02-860-802-A/200
Page 202
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
A
ZONE
313
B
313 AL
1. DC GPU PWR
B
External DC Power Supply Receptacle Location
Figure 201
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
24-41-02-860-802-A/200
Page 203/204
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
GHSH TASK 24-42-02-860-801-A
1. Connection of the external AC power supply to the aircraft Aircraft/System Configuration
A. General
(1) This task gives the procedure to supply electrical power to
the aircraft with an external AC power supply.
(2) The 115/200-VAC, three-phase, 400-Hz AC external power
supply is connected to the aircraft through the receptacle
installed on the left side of the forward fuselage.
B. Job Set-Up
TO EQUIPMENT.
(GHSH TASK 20-00-00-910-801-A/200).
WARNING:
IF THE EXTERNAL POWER SUPPLY HAS AN

EARTH GROUNDED NEUTRAL, MAKE SURE
THAT THERE IS NO OPEN OR FLOATING
GROUND IN THE NEUTRAL CIRCUIT OF THE
EXTERNAL POWER SUPPLY. AN OPEN OR
FLOATING GROUND CAN CAUSE AN
ELECTRICAL POTENTIAL IN THE AIRCRAFT
GROUND CIRCUIT. AS A RESULT, SEVERE
INJURIES TO PERSONNEL CAN OCCUR, IF
THEY TOUCH THE AIRCRAFT.
(2) Make sure that the external power supply operates correctly
before you supply power to the aircraft.
WARNING: ALWAYS ATTACH THE GROUNDING CABLE
TO THE GROUND CONNECTION FIRST.
NEVER ATTACH THE CABLE TO THE
AIRPLANE AND THEN TO THE GROUND
CONNECTION.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
24-42-02-860-801-A/200
Page 201
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
(a) If the ground return circuit of the external power supply
does not operate correctly, do the static grounding
safety procedure (GHSH TASK 20-40-02-910-801A/200).
(3) On the overhead panel, on the ELECTRIC control panel,
make sure that these AC POWER switches are set to these
positions:
GPU latched out (off)
AC BUS TIES AUTO
(4) On the overhead panel, on the ELECTRIC control panel,
make sure that these DC POWER switches are set to these
positions:
TRU 1 - AUTO
TRU ESS AUTO
TRU 2 AUTO
DC BUS TIES AUTO
BATT 1 OFF
BATT 2 - OFF
(5) On the overhead panel, on the HYDRAULIC control panel,

make sure that the ELEC PUMP switches are set to these
positions:
ELEC PUMP (SYS 1) - AUTO

ELEC PUMP (SYS 2) - AUTO
ELEC PUMP A (SYS 3) - OFF
ELEC PUMP B (SYS 3) AUTO
(6) Set the GSE 044 or GSE 045 to ON

(7) Adjust the output voltage of the external AC power supply to
115 +3/-2 VAC.
NOTE: If you do not obey the specified range, the EPM
overvoltage/undervoltage protection will actuate
and the external AC power supply will be
disconnected from the aircraft.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
24-42-02-860-801-A/200
Page 202
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
(8) Set the GSE 044 or GSE 045 to OFF.
(9) Open the access door 125AL to get access to the external
AC power-supply receptacle.
D. Connection of the External AC Power Supply to the Aircraft Maintenance Practices
WARNING: BEFORE CONNECTING THE EXTERNAL AC
POWER TO THE AIRCRAFT, REMOVE ANY
GREASE, OIL, DEICING FLUID, ANTI-ICING
FLUID, OR OTHER CONTAMINANT FROM THE
EXTERNALAC
POWER
PLUG
AND
RECEPTACLE. IF YOU DO NOT OBEY THIS
PRECAUTION, AN ELECTRICAL SHOCK CAN
OCCUR, CAUSING INJURY TO PERSONS AND
(1) Connect the GSE 044 or GSE 045 to the external AC power
supply receptacle. Refer to Figure 201.
(2) Set the GSE 044 or GSE 045 to ON.
(a) On the ELECTRIC control panel, the AVAIL lamp in the
GPU pushbutton comes on. Refer to Figure 202.
CAUTION:
DO THE CHECK OF THE BATTERY VOLTAGE

AS QUICKLY AS POSSIBLE. THE COMPLETE
PROCEDURE MUST NOT BE LONGER THAN 3
SECONDS. THE BATTERIES WILL DISCHARGE
WHEN THEY ARE THE ONLY POWER SOURCE
IN USE.
(3) Do a check on the batteries voltage as follows:

(a) On the ELECTRIC control panel, set the BATT 1 switch
to ON and the BATT 2 switch to AUTO.
(b) Make sure that only the pilot MFD and EICAS displays
are available.
(c) On the pilot MFD, do a check on the batteries voltage.
(d) Make sure that the minimum voltage of battery 1 and 2
is 22 V.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
24-42-02-860-801-A/200
Page 203
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
NOTE: If the voltage of one of the batteries is less
than 22 V and the aircraft is in preparation for
dispatch, you can continue the steps that
follow. It is necessary to do the battery
charging procedure at the end of the task.
EFFECTIVITY: ON ACFT WITH PRIMUS EPIC LOAD 21.2 AND ON
OR POST-MOD SB 190LIN-31-0001 OR POST-MOD SB 190LIN-310004
(4) Do a check on the batteries voltage as follows:
(a) The AVAIL lamp in the GPU pushbutton goes off.
(b) The IN USE lamp in the GPU pushbutton comes on.
NOTE: The EICAS status Message FLT CTRL TEST
IN PROG will show during the power-up
procedure while the flight control electrical
PBIT is running.
The flight control electrical PBIT is complete
three minutes after the AC power is supplied to
the aircraft. If you set the hydraulic pump to ON
before that, the flight control electrical PBIT is
canceled.
Also,
if
during
this
aircraft energization, the hydraulic systems are
still pressurized from a previous connection
and/or disconnection procedure, the flight
control electrical PBIT will not start as well.
You cannot do the flight control system returnto-service procedure if the flight control
electrical PBIT is canceled.
You must not move the flight controls. If you
move the flight controls with the hydraulic
pressure off, CAS message will show.
You can do a check of the MFD, on the FCS
synoptic page, for the remaining time on the
digital readout. The readout shows the
remaining hours until the electrical and
hydraulic PBITs expire. When the readout
shows 50 hours, it means that the electrical
and hydraulic PBITs were successful. The
electrical PBIT will start after AC power is
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
24-42-02-860-801-A/200
Page 204
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
supplied to the aircraft. The hydraulic PBIT will
only start after you start the hydraulic system
pumps. For more information please refer to
AMM SDS 27-00-00/1.
(5) If one or two MFD show PFD content after power-up, do the
reversion of the related display unit to change the MFD
MODE switch, on the REVERSIONARY PANEL, to MFD
position.
(6) On the MFD, on the Systems - Elec status page (Figure
203), make sure that the electrical synoptic shows as
follows:
Table 201 - Electrical Synopitc Status
CAUTION:
YOU MUST NOT DO THIS STEP IF ONE OF

THESE MESSAGES SHOWS ON THE EICAS:
CRG AFT SMOKE, CRG FWD SMOKE, APU
FIRE, ENG 1 FIRE, OR ENG 2 FIRE. IF ONE OF
THESE MESSAGES SHOWS, DO THE RELATED
FAULT ISOLATION PROCEDURE.
(7) If this is the initial connection of the external AC power to

the aircraft, of the day, and unexpected messages show on
the EICAS display, do as follows:
NOTE: Unexpected messages are those messages that
show not because of a system initialization or
aircraft configuration.
(a) Make sure that there are no open issues from the
previous flight(s). If there is a reported problem, do the
related fault isolation procedure before you continue
these steps.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
24-42-02-860-801-A/200
Page 205
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
(b) Disconnect the external AC power from the aircraft
(GHSH TASK 24-42-02-860-802-A/200).
(c) After a minimum of 30 seconds, connect the external
AC power back to the aircraft (GHSH TASK 24-42-02860-801-A/200).
(d) If the messages still show after subsequent correct
external AC power connection to the aircraft (GHSH
TASK 24-42-02-860-801-A/200) do the related fault
isolation procedure.
(8) If the voltage of battery 1 and/or 2 is less than 22 V, and the
aircraft is almost prepared for dispatch, charge the batteries
(AMM TASK 24-36-01-610-802-A/300).
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
24-42-02-860-801-A/200
Page 206
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
A
ZONE
125
External AC Power Supply Receptacle - Component Location

Figure 201
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
24-42-02-860-801-A/200
Page 207
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
ELECTRIC CONTROL PANEL
ELECTRIC
AC POWER
IDG 1
IDG 2
AUTO
AUTO
OFF
OFF
DISC
GPU
PUSHBUTTON
DISC
AC BUS 1
AC BUS 2
AC BUS TIES
GPU
AVAIL
APU GEN
1
OPEN
AUTO
2
OPEN
IN USE
DC POWER
TRU 1
TRU ESS
AUTO
TRU 2
AUTO
OFF
OFF
MFD STATUS PAGE

DC BUS 1
DC ESS BUS
DC BUS 2
BATT 1
ON
BATTERY 1
AND 2 VOLTAGE
Map
Plan
DOORS
FLIGHT
23 H 14
TAT +9O9 C
SAT -711 C
G. W. 73377 KG
ELEC
ENG OIL LEVEL
Systems
Status
OFF
AUTO
OFF
SERV DOOR
REFUEL PNL
CREW OXY
OFF
BATT1
22.8 V
BATT2
23 .0 V
BATT 2
DC BUS TIES
AUTO
5 . 2 QT
O . O 18OO PSI
BRAKES
EMER
ACCU
PSI
S
Y
S
2
3979
42
TEMP
C
OB
9O9
IB
531
TCAS
IB
9O9
BATT 1
OB
531
Weather
BATT 2
S
Y
S
1
Checklist
B
ELECTRIC Control Panel - Component Location
Figure 202
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
24-42-02-860-801-A/200
Page 208
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
A
MFD ELECTRICAL PAGE
Map
Plan
Elec
Systems
IN USE
GEN
2
AC GPU
0V
0Hz
0KVA
115V
400Hz
6KVA
AC BUS 1
AC BUS 2
28.0V TRU
1
60A
TRU
2
AC ESS
AC STBY
TRU
ESS
DC BUS 1
DC ESS 1
28.0V
26C
28.0V
60A
28.0V
6A
DC BUS 2
DC ESS 3
DC ESS 2
BATT 1
APU START
BATT 2
TCAS
Weather
28.0V
26C
Checklist
GEN
1
0V
0Hz
0KVA
A
Electrical Synoptic Status - Component Location
Figure 203
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
24-42-02-860-801-A/200
Page 209/210
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
GHSH TASK 24-42-02-860-802-A
1. Disconnection of the external AC power supply from the
aircraft - Aircraft/System Configuration
A. General
(1) This task gives the procedures to remove the electrical
power from the aircraft supplied by an external AC power
supply.
(2) The 115/200-VAC, three-phase, 400-Hz AC external power
supply is connected to the aircraft through the receptacle
installed on the left side of the forward fuselage.
B. Job Set-Up
TO EQUIPMENT.
was at the end of the energization task (GHSH TASK 24-4202-860-801-A/200).
C. Disconnection of the External AC Power Supply from the
Aircraft Maintenance Practices - Aircraft/System Configuration
(1) Do these procedures to disconnect the external AC power
supply from the aircraft:
NOTE: If you intend to disconnect the external AC power
supply and reconnect it again, check on the MFD,
on the Systems - Flt Clt status page that there is
no pressure in the hydraulic systems. If the
hydraulic systems are already pressurized when
you reconnect the AC power supply from the
aircraft, the flight control built-in test will not run.
(a) On the ELECTRIC control panel, set the GPU
pushbutton to the latched out position (off).
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
24-42-02-860-802-A/200
Page 201
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
Result:
1. The IN USE lamp in the GPU pushbutton goes off.
2. The AVAIL lamp in the GPU pushbutton comes on.
(b) On the ELECTRIC control panel, set the BATT 1 and
BATT 2 switches to OFF.
(c) Set the GSE 044 or GSE 045 to OFF.
Result:
1. On the ELECTRIC control panel, the AVAIL lamp in
the GPU pushbutton goes off.
WARNING: REMOVE THE ELECTRICAL POWER FROM
THE EXTERNAL POWER CABLE BEFORE
YOU REMOVE IT FROM THE AIRCRAFT. IF
YOU DO NOT OBEY THIS PRECAUTION, AN
ELECTRIC SHOCK CAN OCCUR AND
CAUSE INJURY TO PERSONS.
(d) Disconnect the GSE 044 or GSE 045 from the external
AC power receptacle (Figure 204).
D. Job Close-Up (Figure 204)
(1) Close the access door 125AL.
the work area.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
24-42-02-860-802-A/200
Page 202
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
A
ZONE
125
External AC Power Supply Receptacle - Component Location

Figure 201
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
24-42-02-860-801-A/200
Page 203
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
ELECTRIC CONTROL PANEL
ELECTRIC
AC POWER
IDG 1
IDG 2
AUTO
AUTO
OFF
OFF
DISC
GPU
PUSHBUTTON
DISC
AC BUS 1
AC BUS 2
AC BUS TIES
GPU
AVAIL
APU GEN
1
OPEN
AUTO
2
OPEN
IN USE
DC POWER
TRU 1
TRU ESS
AUTO
TRU 2
AUTO
OFF
OFF
MFD STATUS PAGE

DC BUS 1
DC ESS BUS
DC BUS 2
BATT 1
ON
BATTERY 1
AND 2 VOLTAGE
Map
Plan
DOORS
FLIGHT
23 H 14
TAT +9O9 C
SAT -711 C
G. W. 73377 KG
ELEC
ENG OIL LEVEL
Systems
Status
OFF
AUTO
OFF
SERV DOOR
REFUEL PNL
CREW OXY
OFF
BATT1
22.8 V
BATT2
23 .0 V
BATT 2
DC BUS TIES
AUTO
5 . 2 QT
O . O 18OO PSI
BRAKES
EMER
ACCU
PSI
S
Y
S
2
3979
42
TEMP
C
OB
9O9
IB
531
TCAS
IB
9O9
BATT 1
OB
531
Weather
BATT 2
S
Y
S
1
Checklist
B
ELECTRIC Control Panel - Component Location
Figure 202
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
24-42-02-860-802-A/200
Page 204
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
GHSH TASK 32-00-05-000-801-A
1. Landing-Gear Downlock Safety-Pins - Removal
A. General
(1) This task gives the procedure to remove the downlock
safety pins from the NLG and from the MLG.
(2) The procedure to remove the downlock safety-pins is the
same for the LH and RH MLGs.
(3) Data is given for the left MLG. Data for the right MLG, which
is different, is given in parentheses.
(4) The procedure to install the landing-gear downlock safetypins is given in GHSH TASK 32-00-05-400-801-A/400.
B. Job Set-Up
PERSONS
AND/OR
DAMAGE
TO
THE
EQUIPMENT.
WARNING: DO NOT REMOVE THE DOWNLOCK SAFETY PINS
FROM THE LANDING GEAR. THE DOWNLOCK
SAFETY PINS STOP ACCIDENTAL OPERATION OF
THE LANDING GEAR. ONLY REMOVE THE
DOWNLOCK SAFETY PINS TO OBEY A
MAINTENANCE
INSTRUCTION.
ACCIDENTAL
OPERATION OF THE LANDING GEAR CAN CAUSE
INJURY TO PERSONNELAND DAMAGE TO THE
AIRCRAFT.
(2) Make sure that the landing-gear downlock safety-pin (1) is
installed in a recess of the right aft console, in the cockpit.
C. Landing-Gear Downlock Safety-Pins - Removal
(1) Remove the landing-gear downlock safety-pins, as follows:
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
32-00-05-000-801-A/400
Page 401
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
(a) Remove the MLG downlock safety-pins (2) from the
locking stays (1) of the left and right MLGs.
(b) Remove the NLG downlock safety-pin (3) from the
locking stay (4) of the NLG.
D. Job Close-Up
(1) Put the aircraft back to its initial condition:
(a) Keep the landing-gear downlock safety-pin (1) in the
recess of the right aft console in the cockpit. Refer to
Figure 401.
CAN OCCUR.
(b) Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials
from the work area.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
32-00-05-000-801-A/400
Page 402
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
RIGHT AFT CONSOLE

(REF.)
1. LANDINGGEAR
DOWNLOCK
SAFETYPIN
B
Landing-Gear-Downlock Safety-Pins - Removal/Installation
Figure 401
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
32-00-05-400-801-A/400
Page 403
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
C
MAIN LANDING
GEAR
ZONE ZONE
731
711
741
4. LOCKING
STAY
A
D
3. LANDINGGEAR
DOWNLOCK
SAFETYPIN
D
NOSE LANDING
GEAR
2. LANDINGGEAR
DOWNLOCK
SAFETYPIN
1. LOCKING
STAY

Figure 402
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
32-00-05-400-801-A/400
Page 404
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
GHSH TASK 32-00-05-400-801-A
2. Landing-Gear Downlock Safety-Pins - Installation
A. General
(1) This task gives the procedure to install the downlock safety
pins on the NLG and on the MLG.
(2) The procedure to install the landing-gear downlock safetypins is the same for the LH and RH MLG.
(3) Data is given for the left MLG. Data for the right MLG, which
is different, is given in
B. Job Set-Up
PERSONS
AND/OR
DAMAGE
TO
THE
EQUIPMENT.
WARNING: DO NOT REMOVE THE DOWNLOCK SAFETY PINS
FROM THE LANDING GEAR. THE DOWNLOCK
SAFETY PINS STOP ACCIDENTAL OPERATION OF
THE LANDING GEAR. ONLY REMOVE THE
DOWNLOCK SAFETY PINS TO OBEY A
MAINTENANCE
INSTRUCTION.
ACCIDENTAL
OPERATION OF THE LANDING GEAR CAN CAUSE
INJURY TO PERSONNELAND DAMAGE TO THE
AIRCRAFT.
was at the end of the removal task (GHSH TASK 32-00-05000-801-A/400).
(3) Make sure that the landing gear downlock safety-pin (1) is
installed in a recess of the right aft console in the cockpit.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
32-00-05-400-801-A/400
Page 405
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
C. Landing-Gear Downlock Safety-Pins - Installation
(1) Install the landing-gear downlock safety-pins, as follows:
(a) Install the NLG downlock safety-pin (3) in the locking
stay (4) of the NLG.
(b) Install the MLG downlock safety-pins (2) in the locking
stays (1) of the left and right MLG.
D. Job Close-Up
(1) Make sure that personnel can see the REMOVE BEFORE
FLIGHT flag clearly.
CAN OCCUR.
the work area.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
32-00-05-400-801-A/400
Page 406
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
RIGHT AFT CONSOLE

(REF.)
1. LANDINGGEAR
DOWNLOCK
SAFETYPIN
B
Figure 401
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
32-00-05-400-801-A/400
Page 407
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
C
MAIN LANDING
GEAR
ZONE ZONE
731
711
741
4. LOCKING
STAY
A
D
3. LANDINGGEAR
DOWNLOCK
SAFETYPIN
D
NOSE LANDING
GEAR
2. LANDINGGEAR
DOWNLOCK
SAFETYPIN
1. LOCKING
STAY

Figure 402
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
32-00-05-400-801-A/400
Page 408
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
GHSH TASK 35-10-00-210-801-A
1. Crew Oxygen System Pressure - General Visual Inspection
A. General
(1) This task gives the procedure to do a pressure check of the
crew oxygen system.
(2) To do this procedure you can use the oxygen pressure
gauge or the MFD.
(3) Only approved persons must do the maintenance tasks in
the oxygen system.
B. Job Set-Up - (With Oxygen Pressure Gauge)
PERSONS
AND/OR
DAMAGE
TO
THE
EQUIPMENT.
(GHSH TASK 20-00-00-910-801-A/200).
WARNING: BE SURE TO OBEY THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
BEFORE
YOU
DO
THE
MAINTENANCE
PROCEDURES IN THE CREW OXYGEN SYSTEM.
THIS IS TO PREVENT INJURY TO PERSONS
AND/OR DAMAGE TO THE EQUIPMENT.
(3) Open the access panel 132AR (AMM TASK 06-41-00-800801-A/100).
C. Crew Oxygen Pressure (With Oxygen Pressure Gauge) - Visual
Check
(1) To make sure that there is a minimum oxygen pressure in
the crew oxygen system for dispatchability, do as follows:
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
35-10-00-210-801-A/600
Page 601
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
(a) Read the pressure shown on the pressure gauge.
(b) Measure the ambient temperature.
NOTE: The cylinder compartment temperature is equal
to the OAT if:
The aircraft is in ground configuration
The electrical power is off
The ground power unit is disconnected
(c) Plot the two values on the graph. Refer to Figure 603.
(d) Draw a parallel line to the curve shown on the graph.
NOTE: Make sure that you know the number of crew
members on the aircraft.
The parallel line to the curve must cross the
point that you plotted on the graph.
(e) Move the point along the parallel line drawn from the
plotted point to the 21 C (70 F) temperature line.
(f) Draw a line from the 21 C (70 F) temperature line to
the indicated gauge pressure line. Refer to Figure 603.
Table 601 - Minimum Oxygen Cylinder Pressure (kPa (psi)
AT 21 C (70 F))

AT 21 C (70 F))
(2) EFFECTIVITY: ON ACFT WITH 50 CU.FT OXYGEN

CYLINDER
If the pressure is below the minimum value, fill the oxygen
system (GHSH TASK 12-15-06/301). You can also remove
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
35-10-00-210-801-A/600
Page 602
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
the oxygen cylinder from the aircraft (AMM TASK 35-10-07000-801-A/400) and install a serviceable cylinder (AMM
TASK 35-10-07-400-801-A/400). Refer to Figure 601 and
Figure 602.
CYLINDER
If the pressure is below the minimum value, fill the oxygen
system (GHSH TASK 12-15-06/301). You can also remove
the oxygen cylinder from the aircraft (AMM TASK 35-10-07000-801-A/400) and install a serviceable cylinder (AMM
TASK 35-10-07-400-801-A/400). Refer to Figure 601 and
Figure 602.
C. Job Close-Up (With Oxygen Pressure Gauge)
(1) Close the access panel 132AR.
the work area.
D. Job Set-Up - (With MFD)
WARNING: BE SURE TO OBEY THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
BEFORE
YOU
DO
THE
MAINTENANCE
PROCEDURES IN THE CREW OXYGEN SYSTEM.
THIS IS TO PREVENT INJURY TO PERSONS
AND/OR DAMAGE TO THE EQUIPMENT.
(GHSH TASK 20-00-00-910-801-A/200).
WARNING:
BE
SURE
TO
OBEY
THE
SAFETY
PRECAUTIONS BEFORE YOU DO THE
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES IN THE CREW
OXYGEN SYSTEM. THIS IS TO PREVENT
THE EQUIPMENT.

EFFECTIVITY: ALL
35-10-00-210-801-A/600
Page 603
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
TASK 24-42-02-860-801-A/200).
(4) Use the CCD to get access to the Systems Status synoptic
page on the MFD.
(5) Use the MCDU (AMM SDS 34-61-00/1), to make sure that
these circuit breakers are closed:
SPDA2 PWR SPLY 1-RICC (DC BUS 2)

SPDA2 PWR SPLY 2-RICC (DC ESS BUS 2)
SPDA2 PWR SPLY 3-EICC (DC ESS BUS 1)
SPDA2 PWR SPLY 4-LICC (DC GND SVC BUS)
SPDA2 DC GND SVC-LICC (DC GND SVC BUS)
E. Crew Oxygen Pressure (With MFD) - Visual Check

(1) EFFECTIVITY: ON ACFT WITH PRIMUS EPIC LOAD 21.2
AND ON OR POST-MOD SB 190LIN-31-0001 OR POSTMOD SB 190LIN-31-0004
In the cockpit, on the MFD, on the Systems Status synoptic
page, read the pressure on the OXY PRESS box.
CYLINDER
If the pressure is below the minimum value (Table 603), fill
the oxygen system (GHSH TASK 12-15-06/301). You can
also remove the oxygen cylinder from the aircraft (AMM
TASK 35-10-07-000-801-A/400) and install a serviceable
cylinder (AMM TASK 35-10-07-400-801-A/400). Refer to
AT 21 C (70 F))

CYLINDER
If the pressure is below the minimum value (Table 604), fill
the oxygen system (GHSH TASK 12-15-06/301). You can
also remove the oxygen cylinder from the aircraft (AMM
TASK 35-10-07-000-801-A/400) and install a serviceable
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
35-10-00-210-801-A/600
Page 604
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
cylinder (AMM TASK 35-10-07-400- 801-A/400). Refer to
Figure 601.
AT 21 C (70 F))
F. Job Close-Up (With MFD)

(1) Disconnect the external AC power supply from the
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
35-10-00-210-801-A/600
Page 605
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
A
ZONE
132
B
ACCESS DOOR
132 AR
OXYGEN
PRESSURE GAUGE
A
Plan
Map
FLIGHT
TAT -4O C
G.W. 315OO KG
ELEC
23 H 14
SAT -56 C
ENG OIL LEVEL
Status
OXY PRESS
PSI
BATT1
28.O V
BATT2
28.O V
Systems
DOORS
CREW 185O
6.5
QT
2.4
BRAKES
EMER
ACCU
PSI
S
Y
S
1
3OOO
S
Y
S
2
OXY PRESS
PSI
3OOO
TEMP
C
OB
25O
IB
25O
MFD
IB
25O
CREW 185O
OB
25O
TCAS
Weather
Checklist
OXYGEN CYLINDER
PRESSURE
Crew Oxygen System - Visual Check

Figure 601
EFFECTIVITY:
ON ACFT WITH PRIMUS EPIC LOAD 21.2 AND ON OR
POST-MOD SB 190LIN-31-0001 OR POST-MOD SB 190LIN-31-0004
35-10-00-210-801-A/600
Page 606
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
70F
REQUIRED OXYGEN PRESSURE

AT 21 C ( 70 F )
2100
2000
1900
1800
1700
1600
1500
7
16
1400
0A
T2
(70
1300
1200
1100
120
0A
1
T2
C(
70
F)
1000
900
800
21C
700
600
40
30
20
10
10
20
30
40
50
60
40
20
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
1
2
APPROXIMATE VALUES FOR 3 CREW MEMBERS.
Oxygen Pressure Correction as a Function of Temperature

Figure 602 Sheet 1
EFFECTIVITY: ON ACFT WITH 50 CU.FT OXYGEN CYLINDER 35-10-00-210-801-A/600
Page 607
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
70F
REQUIRED OXYGEN PRESSURE

AT 21 C ( 70 F )
2100
2000
1900
1800
1700
1600
1500
1400
1300
1200
1100
120
0A
1
T2
C(
70
F)
1000
900
800
A
850
T 21
C (
70F
21C
700
600
40
30
20
10
10
20
30
40
50
60
40
20
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
1
2

Figure 602 Sheet 2
EFFECTIVITY: ON ACFT WITH 77 CU.FT OXYGEN CYLINDER
35-10-00-210-801-A/600
Page 608
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
PLOT THE TWO VALUES ON THE GRAPH.
DRAW A PARALLEL LINE TO THE CURVE

SHOWN ON THE GRAPH.
MOVE THE POINT ALONG THE PARALLEL
LINE DRAWN FROM THE PLOTTED POINT TO
THE 21 C (70 F) TEMPERATURE LINE.
DRAW A LINE FROM THE 21 C (70 F)

TEMPERATURE LINE TO THE INDICATED
GAUGE PRESSURE LINE.

Figure 603
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
35-10-00-210-801-A/600
Page 609/610
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
GHSH TASK 49-10-00-910-801-A
1. Auxiliary Power Unit (APU) - Start
A. General
(1) This section gives the procedure to start the APU on the
ground.
(2) The APU is installed in the tail cone assembly.
B. Job Set-Up
WARNING:


(GHSH TASK 20-00-00-910-801-A/200).
(2) Make sure that the APU danger zones are clear of
personnel and equipment when you operate the APU. Refer
to AMM MPP 49-00-00/201.
(3) Make sure that these circuit breakers are closed:
APU FUEL SOV-RHCBP (DC ESS BUS 2)

APU FIREX-RHCBP (DC ESS BUS 2)
MAU 1 PWR 2-LHCBP (DC ESS BUS 1)
MAU 1 PWR 3-LHCBP (DC BUS 1)
MAU 3 PWR 1-RHCBP (DC ESS BUS 2)
MAU 3 PWR 2-RHCBP (DC BUS 2)
(4) On the FUEL control panel, make sure that the AC PUMP 1
and AC PUMP 2 switches are in the AUTO position.
(5) On the APU control panel, make sure that the FUEL DC
PUMP switch is in AUTO position.
(6) On the ELECTRICAL panel, make sure the APU GEN
pushbutton is pushed in.
(7) If an external AC power supply is available do as follows:
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
49-10-00-910-801-A/200
Page 201
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
(a)
Connect the external AC power supply to the aircraft

(GHSH TASK 24-42-02-860-801- A/200).
(8) If an AC power supply is not available do as follows:

CAUTION:
DO THIS PROCEDURE AS QUICKLY AS

POSSIBLE. IF NOT, THE BATTERIES WILL
DISCHARGE.
CAUTION:
DO THE CHECK OF THE BATTERY

VOLTAGE AS QUICKLY AS POSSIBLE.
THE COMPLETE PROCEDURE MUST NOT
BE LONGER THAN 3 SECONDS. THE
BATTERIES WILL DISCHARGE WHEN
THEY ARE THE ONLY POWER SOURCE IN
USE.
(a) On the ELECTRICAL panel set the BATT1 switch to

ON and the BATT2 switch to AUTO.
(b) Make sure that only the EICAS and MFD 1 displays
show.
NOTE: If the aircraft is kept energized for more than
48 seconds only with the batteries, the MFD
can revert to PFD content. If applicable, use
the reversionary panel to put the display back
to its normal configuration.
(c) On the MFD status page, make sure that the batteries
voltage is at or above 21 V.
(d) If the voltage of battery 1 and/or 2 is less than 22 V,
and the aircraft is almost prepared for dispatch, charge
the batteries with the APU generator after APU start.
Refer to AMM TASK 24-36-01-610-802-A/300.
(9) If the battery 2 is not available to APU start, connect a DC
power supply to the aircraft (GHSH TASK 24-41-02-860801-A/200).
(10)On the EICAS, make sure that there is fuel in the fuel tanks.
Fill the fuel tanks as necessary (GHSH TASK 12-11-01-650801-A/300 or GHSH TASK 12-11-03-650-801-A/300).
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
49-10-00-910-801-A/200
Page 202
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
(11)On the MCDU (AMM SDS 34-61-00/1), use the sequence in
parentheses to make sure that these SSPCs are closed:
ABC CMD PWR-SPDA2 (CBMENU/CB BY SYS/APU)

APU FUEL SOV CLS-SPDA2 (CBMENU/CB BY SYS/APU)
(12)Do the test of the fire protection system (AMM TASK 26-0000-700-801-A/500).
(13)On the EXTERNAL LIGHTS panel, set the NAV switch to
ON.
C. Auxiliary Power Unit (APU) - Start (Figure 201)
SUBTASK 868-007-A
WARNING:
DURING THE START PROCEDURES, MAKE SURE

THAT THERE IS A TECHNICIAN (EXTERNAL
OBSERVER) WITH A FIRE EXTINGUISHER (CO2)
ADJACENT TO THE AIRCRAFT TO MONITOR THE
APU OPERATION. USE THE REAR INTERPHONE
SYSTEM
(RAMP)
FOR
COMMUNICATIONS
BETWEEN THE COCKPIT AND THE EXTERNAL
OBSERVER.
WARNING:
DO NOT OPERATE THE APU NEAR FLAMMABLE

MATERIALS OR FUEL VENT EXPLOSION CAN
OCCUR.
CAUTION: DO NOT OPERATE THE APU FOR MORE THAN 10

MINUTES WITH THE APU ACCESS PANELS
REMOVED. THIS CAN CAUSE THE APU
TEMPERATURE TO INCREASE MORE THAN ITS
OPERATIONAL LIMITS. AS A RESULT, THE APU
WILL STOP OPERATION AUTOMATICALLY. HIGH
TEMPERATURES CAN CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE
APU.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
49-10-00-910-801-A/200
Page 203
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
CAUTION: DO NOT OPERATE THE APU DURING THE DEICING AND ANTI-ICING PROCEDURES. IF IT IS
NECESSARY TO OPERATE THE APU DURING
THESE PROCEDURES, YOU MUST OPERATE IT IN
THE GENERATOR MODE ONLY (NO BLEED).
MAINTENANCE PERSONNEL MUST MAKE SURE
THAT THE AIRPORT PERSONNEL DO NOT APPLY
THE DE-ICING AND ANTI-ICING FLUID DIRECTLY
TO OR NEAR THE APU INLET AND OIL-COOLER
DUCT INLET. IF YOU DO NOT OBEY THESE
INSTRUCTIONS, THE FLUID CAN GO INTO THE
INLETS. THIS CAN CAUSE APU OVERSPEED
AND/OR WHEEL BURST. AS A RESULT, DAMAGE
TO THE EQUIPMENT CAN OCCUR.
CAUTION: DAMAGE TO THE FUEL PUMP WILL OCCUR IF IT
OPERATES WITH NO FUEL (DRY OPERATION).
(1) Set the APU MASTER switch to the ON position.
NOTE: The APU FADEC is energized and the APU fuel SOV
is open.
NOTE: The SPDA sends power to APU FADEC energization
only 30 seconds after its power-up. So, APU start is
not available before this time period.
(2) Wait until the APU indication on the EICAS changes from OFF
to the APU control parameters (speed and EGT).
(3) Set the MASTER switch to the START
approximately 3 seconds and back to ON.
position
for
NOTE: At 7% engine speed, the APU FADEC commands the

fuel solenoid valve in the fuel module to open. The
APU lights off. As a result, the EGT quickly increases.
The APU starting system lets you try 3 (three)
consecutive starts. If the APU fails to start, refer to the
FIM.
NOTE: At 95% speed plus 3 seconds, the APU is at ready-toload state, and will supply AC power and bleed air to
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
49-10-00-910-801-A/200
Page 204
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
aircraft as determined by the related EPGDS and
AMS. The APU will accelerate to its normal operation
speed (100%).
If the APU stops automatically, the cause of failure will
be recorded on the CMCM and on the APU FADEC.
(4) On the EICAS, monitor the APU EGT and speed (rpm), and
make sure they stay in their normal range. Refer to AMM TASK
49-00-00-910-801-A/200.
NOTE: If the APU is used as a primary source of AC power to
the aircraft:
The EICAS status message FLT CTRL TEST IN
PROG will show during the power-up procedure
while the flight control electrical PBIT is running.
The flight control electrical PBIT is complete three
minutes after the AC power is supplied to the
aircraft. If you set the hydraulic pump to ON before
that, the flight control electrical PBIT is canceled.
Also, if during this aircraft energization, the
hydraulic systems are still pressurized from a
previous
connection
and/or
disconnection
procedure, the flight control electrical PBIT will not
start as well.
You cannot do the flight control system return-toservice procedure if the flight control electrical PBIT
is canceled.
You must not move the flight controls. If you move
the flight controls with the hydraulic pressure off,
CAS messages will show.
You can do a check of the MFD, on the FCS
synoptic page, for the remaining time on the digital
readout. The readout shows the remaining hours
until the electrical and hydraulic PBITs expire. When
the readout shows 20 hours, it means that the
electrical and hydraulic PBITs were successful. The
electrical PBIT will start after AC power is supplied
to the aircraft. The hydraulic PBIT will only start
after you start the hydraulic system pumps.
CAUTION: YOU MUST NOT DO THIS STEP IF ONE OF THESE
MESSAGES SHOWS ON THE EICAS: CRG AFT
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
49-10-00-910-801-A/200
Page 205
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
SMOKE, CRG FWD SMOKE, APU FIRE, ENG 1
FIRE, OR ENG 2 FIRE. IF ONE OF THESE
MESSAGES SHOWS, DO THE RELATED FAULT
ISOLATION PROCEDURE.
(5) If you use the APU to supply initial AC power to the aircraft for
the first time of the day and unexpected messages show on the
EICAS display, do as follows:
NOTE: Unexpected messages are those messages that show
neither because of a system initialization nor aircraft
configuration.
(a) Make sure that there are no open issues from the
previous flight(s). If there is problem reported, do the
related fault isolation procedure before continue these
steps.
(b) Stop the APU (GHSH TASK 49-10-00-910-802-A/200).
(c) On the ELECTRICAL panel set the batteries switches as
follows:
BATT1 switch to OFF.

BATT2 switch to OFF.
(d) After a minimum of 30 seconds, do the complete start

procedure of the APU again (Including job set-up steps).
(e) If the messages still show after subsequent aircraft AC
power-up with the APU, do the related fault isolation
procedures.
D. Job Close-Up
(1) If you used a DC power supply to start the APU, remove it
(GHSH TASK 24-41-02-860-802- A/200).
(2) If you used an AC power supply (GHSH TASK 24-42-02860-802-A/200) for aircraft energization, remove it as
required.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
49-10-00-910-801-A/200
Page 206
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
D
E
MTO
ATTCS
8O.O
2O.7
EICAS
8O.O
APU FIRE
2O.7
N1
REV
IGN
A
463
ITT
463
N2
9O.O
9O.O
IGN
A
FF PPH 1OOO
1OOO
6OO
FUEL QTY
2OOO
4OO
LANDING GEAR
UP
FQ KG
4OO
6OO
VIB
APU
1OO %
1O2O C
CABIN
12
11
81
PRESS
ALT
RATE
P
LFE
1O6
TEMP
LP
HP
TRIMS
SPDBRK
S
5
5
64.6
12OO
FT
FPM
PSI
FT
PITCH
ROLL
F
UP
22
YAW
2
S/F
FUEL CONTROL PANEL
APU CONTROL PANEL

FUEL
ENG 1
ENG 2
XFEED
OFF
LOW 1
LOW 2
APU CONTROL
SWITCH TO
OFF POSITION
APU
AC PUMP 1
AUTO
AC PUMP 2
AUTO
EMER STOP
ON
AUTO
XFEED OVRD
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
START
ON
OFF
MASTER
FUEL DC PUMP
FUEL TRANSFER
AUTO
OFF
ISOLATION
OVRD
MODE
AIR COND / PNEUMATIC

PANEL
FIRE CONTROL
PANEL
RECIRC
CKPT
C
ATTND
PACK 1
FIRE EXTINGUISHER
PAX
CABIN
PACK 2
CARGO SMOKE
FWD
AFT
XBLEED
WING 2
START 2
GND
CONN
APU
TEST
BLEED 1
APU BLEED
BLEED 2
WING 1
START 1
Auxiliary-Power-Unit (APU) Stop - Component Location

Figure 201
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
49-10-00-910-801-A/200
Page 207/208
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
GHSH TASK 49-10-00-910-802-A
1. Auxiliary Power Unit (APU) - Shutdown
A. General
(1) This task gives the procedures to stop the APU on the
ground.
(2) It is possible to stop the APU from the cockpit with two
procedures:
(a) Normal stop.
(b) Emergency stop.
(3) The APU is installed in the tail cone assembly.
B. Auxiliary Power Unit (APU) - Normal Stop (Figure 201)
EFFECTIVITY: ON ACFT WITH APU FADEC SOFTWARE 01.00
(1)
On the APU CONTROL panel, set the APU master switch to

the OFF position.
NOTE: The APU will operate for two minutes after you set
the master switch to the OFF position.
(2)
On the EICAS display, make sure that the APU is stopped.

NOTE: The APU indication shows OFF. The messageAPU
FUEL SOV CLOSED shows for 10 seconds after
normal closure of the APU SOV.
EFFECTIVITY: ON ACFT WITH APU FADEC SOFTWARE 02.00

AND ON
(3)
On the APU CONTROL panel, set the APU master

switch to the OFF position.
NOTE: The APU will operate for one minute after you
set the master switch to the OFF position.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
49-10-00-910-802-A/200
Page 201
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
(4) On the EICAS display, make sure that the APU is
stopped.
NOTE: The
APU indication shows OFF. The

messageAPU FUEL SOV CLOSED shows for
10 seconds after normal closure of the APU
SOV.
C. Auxiliary Power Unit (APU) - Emergency Stop (Figure 201)

(1) If the APU FIRE message shows on the EICAS display, do
the procedures that follow:

(a) On the cockpit APU control panel, lift the guard and
push the APU EMERG STOP pushbutton.

(b) Set the APU master switch to the OFF position and
make sure that the EICAS shows APU FUEL SOV

CLOSED.
(2) If you cannot make sure that the fuel solenoid valve is
closed and the APU FIRE message stays on the EICAS

display, do the procedures that follow:
(a) On the cockpit fuel control panel, set the AC PUMP 1
and AC PUMP 2 switches to the OFF position.

(b) On the APU control panel, set the FUEL DC PUMP
switch to the OFF position.

(c) After 30 seconds, if the APU FIRE message stays on
the EICAS display, on the fire extinguishing control

panel, push the APU pushbutton.
D. Job Close-Up
(1) After the APU shutdown, if there is no AC power
generator, on the ELECTRIC panel, do not forget to set

the BATT1 and BATT2 switches to OFF, if applicable.
NOTE: This step is to avoid unnecessary battery
discharging.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
49-10-00-910-802-A/200
Page 202
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
D
E
MTO
ATTCS
8O.O
2O.7
EICAS
8O.O
APU FIRE
2O.7
N1
REV
IGN
A
463
9O.O
ITT
463
N2
9O.O
IGN
A
FF PPH 1OOO
1OOO
6OO
FUEL QTY
2OOO
4OO
LANDING GEAR
UP
FQ KG
4OO
6OO
VIB
APU
1O2O C
1OO %
CABIN
12
11
81
PRESS
ALT
RATE
P
LFE
1O6
TEMP
LP
HP
TRIMS
SPDBRK
S
5
5
64.6
12OO
FT
FPM
PSI
FT
PITCH
ROLL
F
UP
22
YAW
2
S/F
FUEL CONTROL PANEL
APU CONTROL PANEL

FUEL
ENG 1
ENG 2
XFEED
OFF
LOW 1
LOW 2
APU CONTROL
SWITCH TO
OFF POSITION
APU
AC PUMP 1
AUTO
AC PUMP 2
AUTO
EMER STOP
ON
AUTO
XFEED OVRD
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
START
ON
OFF
MASTER
FUEL DC PUMP
FUEL TRANSFER
AUTO
OFF
ISOLATION
OVRD
MODE

PANEL
FIRE CONTROL
PANEL
RECIRC
CKPT
C
ATTND
PACK 1
FIRE EXTINGUISHER
PAX
CABIN
PACK 2
CARGO SMOKE
FWD
AFT
XBLEED
WING 2
START 2
GND
CONN
APU
TEST
BLEED 1
APU BLEED
BLEED 2
WING 1
START 1
Auxiliary-Power-Unit (APU) Stop - Component Location

Figure 201
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
49-10-00-910-802-A/200
Page 203/204
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
APPENDIX
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
GROUND SUPPORT
EQUIPMENT
APPENDIX
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
GHSH GSE APPENDIX - TABLE OF CONTENTS
SUBJECT
GSE NUMBER
PAGE
Ground Support
Equipment Appendix
STATION - PTT BELT................................ GSE 011
201
SMART PROBE PROTECTIVE COVER.... GSE 020
201
TOOL - INSTL / RMV, SMART PROBE

PROTECTIVE COVER............................... GSE 022
201
COVER - DME, TCAS, XNPDR

ANTENNAS................................................ GSE 023
201
COVER - ICE DETECTOR SENSOR......... GSE 024
201
COVER - T.A.T. SENSOR.......................... GSE 025
201
OXYGEN CHARGING ADAPTER............... GSE 027
201
REGULATOR - OXYGEN SERVICING....... GSE 028
201
PLUMB - AIRCRAFT RIGGING................... GSE 039
201
GPU - DIESEL, 28 VDC............................... GSE 043
201
GPU - SOLID STATE A/C,

WITH TRAILER. GSE 044
201
GPU - DIESEL ENGINE DRIVEN

(200/115 VAC, 28 VDC)............................... GSE 045
201
WYE TYPE DUMPING CONNECTOR.... GSE 049
201
COUPLING - TOILET SYSTEM FILLING..... GSE 050
201
______________________________________________________________________
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
GHSH GSE Appendix - Table of Contents
Page TOC-1
Rev.00 - SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
SUBJECT
GSE NUMBER
PAGE
Ground Support
Equipment Appendix
CART - TOILET GROUND SERVICING.... GSE 051
201
CART - POTABLE WATER........................ GSE 052
201
REGULATOR NITROGEN
SERVICING................................................. GSE 057
201
GAUGE - TIRE SERVICING....................... GSE 059
201
WHEEL CHOCK......................................... GSE 070
201
TOWBAR.................................................... GSE 080
201
COVERS KIT - WHEEL TIRES................... GSE 083
201
FUEL SAMPLE UNIT................................... GSE 096
201
UNIT - HYDRAULIC RESERVOIR

SERVICING (SKYDROL). GSE 099
201
GUN - 1/4 HYDRAULIC SYSTEM OIL

REPLENISHING........................................... GSE 100
201
FENCE, PROTECTION LANDING

GEAR........................................................... GSE 114
201
PIN - STOW LOCK...................................... GSE 189
201
COVER WINGLET.................................... GSE 197
201
TOWBARLESS TOWING VEHICLE............ GSE 200
201
APU AIR INTAKE COVERS KIT......... GSE 212
201
______________________________________________________________________
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
Page TOC-2
Rev.00 - SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
SUBJECT
GSE NUMBER
PAGE
Ground Support
Equipment Appendix
COVER - THRUST REVERSER
EXHAUST................................................. GSE 248
201
COVER - FAN COWL VENTILATION...... GSE 249
201
COVER - FUEL NACA.............................. GSE 275
201
GRILLE COVER, DOOR, REAR

FUSELAGE............................................... GSE 277
201
CONNECTOR - HIGH PRESSURE

SERVICING.............................................. GSE 287
201
COVER - VERT STAB LEADING

EDGE NACA.. GSE 303
201
TOWBARLESS - TOWING VEHICLE

(DOUGLAS TBL280). GSE 422
201
TOWBARLESS - TOWING VEHICLE

(SCHPF PPU TLTV).. GSE 423
201
FUEL SAMPLE UNIT - AUX TANK........... GSE 447
201
______________________________________________________________________
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
Page TOC-3/4
Rev.00 - SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
GSE NUMBER: 011
ITEM NAME: STATION - PTT BELT
PURPOSE AND USE: Used to provide interface between the ramp
headset and the aircraft.
PART NUMBER: C35-26 (Figure 201)
1. MANUFACTURER
DAVID CLARK
2. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Not applicable.
3. BRIEF OPERATION DESCRIPTION
The equipment contains a momentary PTT switch for the headset
microphone, a jack that accepts the headset plug, and a belt clip
that allows the attachment of the station to the bolter cloth.
4. TOOL CONSISTS OF
Not applicable.
5. REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST
For information on parts, refer to the vendors documentation.
6. QUANTITY
01
7. DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHT
Length: 7924.80 mm (312 in)
Weight: 0.05 kg (1.11 lb)
8. SUPPORTING TOOLS
Used in conjunction with GSE 012 - HEADSET - RAMP
HANDLING.
9. GSE MAINTENANCE
For information on maintenance, refer to the Vendors
documentation.
10. TOOL HISTORY
Not applicable.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
GSE 011
Page 201
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
HEADSETRAMP HANDLING
(REF.)
STATIONPTT BELT
STATION - PTT BELT (P/N C35-26)

Figure 201
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
GSE 011
Page 202
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
GSE NUMBER: 020
ITEM NAME: SMART PROBE PROTECTIVE COVER
PURPOSE AND USE: Used to protect the air data smart probe.
PART NUMBER: KPC3-780-45 (Figure 201)
1. MANUFACTURER
GOODRICH
A nonflammable fabric cover.
Not applicable.
4. TOOL CONSISTS OF
Not applicable.
Not applicable.
6. QUANTITY
04
Lenght: 115 mm (4.53 in)
Width: 30 mm (1.18 in)
Height: 30 mm (1.18 in)
8. SUPPORTING TOOLS
Used in conjunction with GSE 022 - TOOL - INSTL / RMV, SMART
PROBE PROTECTIVE COVER.
9. GSE MAINTENANCE
Not applicable.
10. TOOL HISTORY
Not applicable.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
GSE 020
Page 201
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
150.00 mm
(6.00 in.)
COVERAIR DATA
SMART PROBE
B
SMART PROBE PROTECTIVE COVER (P/N KPC3-780-45)
Figure 201
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
GSE 020
Page 202
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
GSE NUMBER: 022
ITEM NAME: TOOL - INSTL / RMV, SMART PROBE PROTECTIVE
COVER
PURPOSE AND USE: Used to remove/install the smart probe cover.
PART NUMBER: AGE-02755-401 (Figure 201)
1. MANUFACTURER
EMBRAER
Telescopic tube pole, made of aluminum, extending from 1500 mm
to 3000 mm, with a steel fork at the end, to receive the smart probe
cover.
An aluminum telescopic tube with a steel fork at the end to adapt
the smart probe cover.
4. TOOL CONSISTS OF
Not applicable.
6. QUANTITY
01
Lenght: 1500 mm (59.05 in)
8. SUPPORTING TOOLS
Not applicable.
9. GSE MAINTENANCE
Not applicable.
10. TOOL HISTORY
Not applicable.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
GSE 022
Page 201
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
ADSP COVER (REF.)
ADSP COVER INSTL/REMOVAL TOOL
TOOLSMART PROBE PROTECTIVE COVER (PN AGE-02755-401)

Figure 201
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
GSE 022
Page 202
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
GSE NUMBER: 022
ITEM NAME: TOOL - INSTL / RMV, SMART PROBE PROTECTIVE
COVER
PURPOSE AND USE: Used to remove/install the smart probe cover.
PART NUMBER: A10002-7 (Figure 202)
1. MANUFACTURER
AGSE
Telescopic tube pole, made of aluminum, extending from 1500 mm
to 3000 mm, with a steel fork at the end, to receive the smart probe
cover.
An aluminum telescopic tube with a steel fork at the end to adapt
the smart probe cover.
4. TOOL CONSISTS OF
Not applicable.
For information on parts, refer to the Vendors documentation.
6. QUANTITY
01
Lenght: 1500 mm (59.05 in)
8. SUPPORTING TOOLS
Not applicable.
9. GSE MAINTENANCE
documentation.
10. TOOL HISTORY
Not applicable.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
GSE 022
Page 203
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
ADSP COVER (REF.)
ADSP COVER INSTL/REMOVAL TOOL
A
TOOLSMART PROBE PROTECTIVE COVER (P/N A10002-7)
Figure 201
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
GSE 022
Page 204
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
GSE NUMBER: 023
ITEM NAME: COVER - DME, TCAS, XNPDR ANTENNAS
PURPOSE AND USE: Used to protect personnel against physical
injuries caused by the DME, TCAS and
transponder antennas.
1. MANUFACTURER
EMBRAER
The cover assures protection to personnel against physical injuries
caused by the DME, TCAS and transponder antennas.
A plastic foil with two internally-stuck foam cushions and a warning
streamer.
4. TOOL CONSISTS OF
Not applicable.
Not applicable.
6. QUANTITY
01
8. SUPPORTING TOOLS
Not applicable.
9. GSE MAINTENANCE
Not applicable.
10. TOOL HISTORY
Not applicable.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
GSE 023
Page 201
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
B
B
DME
ANTENNA
TDR
ANTENNA
TDR
ANTENNA
ANTENNA
DME
ANTENNA
COVER DME,TCAS,XNPDR ANTENNAS
B
TYPICAL
COVER - DME, TCAS, XNPDR ANTENNAS (P/N AGE-00992-401)

Figure 201
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
GSE 023
Page 202
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
GSE NUMBER: 024
ITEM NAME: COVER - ICE DETECTOR SENSOR
PURPOSE AND USE: Used to protect the ice detector when the
aircraft is on the ground.
PART NUMBER: 123-17138-401 (Figure 201)
1. MANUFACTURER
EMBRAER
A plastic foil comprising two internally stuck foam cushions and a
warning streamer flag.
Not applicable.
4. TOOL CONSISTS OF
Not applicable.
Not applicable.
6. QUANTITY
01
8. SUPPORTING TOOLS
Not applicable.
9. GSE MAINTENANCE
Not applicable.
10. TOOL HISTORY
Not applicable.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
GSE 024
Page 201
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
COVERICE
DETECTOR SENSOR
COVER - ICE DETECTOR SENSOR (P/N 123-17138-401)

Figure 201
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
GSE 024
Page 202
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
GSE NUMBER: 025
ITEM NAME: COVER - T.A.T. SENSOR
PURPOSE AND USE: Used to protect the TAT sensor.
1. MANUFACTURER
EMBRAER
A. It is a protective cover manufactured of polyamid impregnated
with PVC and a elastic stripe.
Two pieces of plastic webbing stitched together to form a pocket,
covering the TAT probe, with a warning streamer.
4. TOOL CONSISTS OF
Not applicable.
Not applicable.
6. QUANTITY
01
Width: 150 mm (5.91 in)
8. SUPPORTING TOOLS
Not applicable.
9. GSE MAINTENANCE
Not applicable.
10. TOOL HISTORY
Not applicable.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
GSE 025
Page 201
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
COVERT.A.T. SENSOR
COVER - T.A.T. SENSOR (P/N AGE-04428-401)

Figure 201
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
GSE 025
Page 202
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
GSE NUMBER: 025
ITEM NAME: COVER - T.A.T. SENSOR
PURPOSE AND USE: Used to protect the TAT sensor.
PART NUMBER: FTC-102 (Figure 202)
1. MANUFACTURER
GOODRICH
A. The Probe Cover is made of red Nomex.
B. Temperature tolerance of 800 F.
C. Flame-retardant (does not melt).
D. Chemical resistant.
E. High abrasion resistance.
F. Weather tolerant.
G. Low particulate.
H. Cover is completely metal free.
I. Water repellent.
J. Soft flexibility ensures a tight fit without scratching the Probe.
K. Assembled with warning streamer and part number
identification tag.
Not applicable.
4. TOOL CONSISTS OF
Not applicable.
6. QUANTITY
01
Weight: 0.350 kg (0.77 lb)
8. SUPPORTING TOOLS
Not applicable.
9. GSE MAINTENANCE
documentation.
10. TOOL HISTORY
Not applicable.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
GSE 025
Page 203
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
COVERT.A.T. SENSOR
COVER - T.A.T. SENSOR (P/N FTC-102)

Figure 202
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
GSE 025
Page 204
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
GSE NUMBER: 027
ITEM NAME: OXYGEN CHARGING ADAPTER
PURPOSE AND USE: Used to couple the oxygen bottle to the aircraft.
PART NUMBER: PC-1006 (Figure 201)
1. MANUFACTURER
TRONAIR
A. Oxygen pressure, maximum rating: 2500 psi.
B. Inlet connection: MS 33656-4 (1/4 in flared tube).
C. Outlet connection: Female, 3/8 - 24 UNF-2B and a Plug.
A coupling installed at the end of the hose that transfers the
oxygen from the oxygen bottle to the aircraft.
4. TOOL CONSISTS OF
Not applicable.
6. QUANTITY
01
Lenght: 2.44 mm (0.10 in)
8. SUPPORTING TOOLS
Used in conjunction with GSE 028 - REGULATOR - OXYGEN
SERVICING.
9. GSE MAINTENANCE
documentation.
10. TOOL HISTORY
Not applicable.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
GSE 027
Page 201
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLUING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
CHARGING
VALVE (REF.)
PRESSURE
GAUGE (REF.)
REGULATOR OXYGEN
SERVICING (REF.)
PROTECTIVE
CAP (REF.)
OXYGEN CYLINDER
OXYGEN CHARGING
ADAPTER
OXYGEN CHARGING ADAPTER (P/N PC-1006)

Figure 201
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
GSE 027
Page 202
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
GSE NUMBER: 028
ITEM NAME: REGULATOR - OXYGEN SERVICING
PURPOSE AND USE: Used to control the replenishment of the crew
oxygen bottle.
1. MANUFACTURER
TRONAIR
A. Oxygen:
3
3
Rated flow capacity: 0.24 m /s (3900 ft /min).
Pressure, maximum rating: 20.68 MPa (3000 psi).
Pressure, maximum inlet: 20.68 MPa (3000 psi).
Output range: 0 to 17.24 MPa (0 to 2500 psi).
Inlet connection: CGA - 540.
Outlet connection: No. 4,37 degrees JIC female swivel.
The oxygen flux to the crew bottle is controlled by the regulator
and showed by the manometer.
4. TOOL CONSISTS OF
Not applicable.
6. QUANTITY
01
Lenght: 4572 mm (180 in)
8. SUPPORTING TOOLS
Not applicable.
9. GSE MAINTENANCE
documentation.
10. TOOL HISTORY
Not applicable.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
GSE 028
Page 201
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
CHARGING
VALVE (REF.)
PRESSURE
GAUGE (REF.)
OXYGEN SERVICING
REGULATOR
PROTECTIVE
CAP (REF.)
OXYGEN CYLINDER
OXYGEN CHARGING
ADAPTER (REF.)
REGULATOR - OXYGEN SERVICING (P/N 20-4502-6000)

Figure 201
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
GSE 028
Page 202
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
GSE NUMBER: 039
ITEM NAME: PLUMB - AIRCRAFT RIGGING
PURPOSE AND USE: Used to check aircraft alignment and leveling.
PART NUMBER: EMB-00016-009 (Figure 201)
1. MANUFACTURER
EMBRAER
The device consists of a plumb assembly and a thumb screw for
attachment to the aircraft structure, both being interconnected by a
string.
Not applicable.
4. TOOL CONSISTS OF
6. QUANTITY
01
Length: 3800 mm (149.61 in)
8. SUPPORTING TOOLS
Not applicable.
9. GSE MAINTENANCE
Not applicable.
10. TOOL HISTORY
Not applicable.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
GSE 039
Page 201
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
A
C
B
A
FOR LEVELING
3800 mm
(150 in)
FOR THE
ALIGNMENT CHECK
4
PLUMBAIRCRAFT
RIGGING
B
PLUMB - AIRCRAFT RIGGING (P/N EMB-00016-009)
Figure 201
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
GSE 039
Page 202
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
GSE NUMBER: 043
ITEM NAME: GPU - DIESEL, 28 VDC
PURPOSE AND USE: Used to supply alternative power to start the
APU.
PART NUMBER: JET-EX5D (Figure 201)
1. MANUFACTURER
HOBART
A. Towable unit, mounted with fenders, bumpers and cable trays.
B. Generator: 28.5 VDC. Current rating 550 A continuous at 28.5
VDC. Current limiting Soft Start, 300 to 1600 A adjustable.
C. Powered by a 2.3 Ford Ranger Industrial Engine.
D. Ground clearance: 89 mm (3.5 in).
A Diesel Engine drives the AC generator that supplies a DC
rectifier.
4. TOOL CONSISTS OF
Not applicable.
6. QUANTITY
01
Length: 1939 mm (76.34 in)
Width: 1702 mm (67.01 in)
Height: 1574 mm (61.97 in)
Weight: 121 kg (266.76 lb)
8. SUPPORTING TOOLS
Not applicable.
9. GSE MAINTENANCE
documentation.
10. TOOL HISTORY
Not applicable.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
GSE 043
Page 201
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
A
B
DC POWER PLUG (REF.)
DIESEL GPU 28 VDC
ELECTRIC POWER
DC CABLE (REF.)
GPU - DIESEL, 28 VDC (P/N JET-EX5D)

Figure 201
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
GSE 043
Page 202
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
GSE NUMBER: 044
ITEM NAME: GPU - SOLID STATE A/C, WITH TRAILER
PURPOSE AND USE: Used to supply power to the aircraft on the
ground (200/115 VAC, 3-phase, 90 kVA).
PART NUMBER: 90SX200-2T (Figure 201)
1. MANUFACTURER
HOBART
A. Output:
90 kVA continuous.
200/115 VAC, 3-phase, 400 Hz, 4-wire (wye connection),
frequency regulation: 0.2 Hz, voltage regulation: less than
1%.
Overloads: 125% - 10 minutes, 150% - 30 seconds, 200% 10 seconds.
Frequency modulation: < 0.25%.
Short circuit protected.
B. Protection:
Input: Phase loss, low/high input voltage.
Output: Over/under voltage per MIL-STD-704E & ARP
5015; over/under frequency per MIL-STD-704E & ARP
5015; short circuit solid state shutdown of the unit without
damaging it.
C. Control Indicators:
ON/OFF for each output, output voltage for each phase (LN) and average, output current for each phase and average,
input power lamp in green, output power lamp for each
output in amber, fault lamp in red, circuit breaker to remove
input power, line drop compensation adjust.
D. Environmental:
Operating temperature: 40 to +52 C (40 to +125 F).
Non-operating temperature: 40 to +60 C (40 to +140 F).
Ventilation: filtered forced air.
E. Input/Output Cable:
The unit is supplied with 60 ft cable, including aircraft
connector.
The input cable and input connector are not supplied.
F. Voltage: 400 to 460 V.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
GSE 044
Page 201
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
G. Frequency: 50 to 60 Hz.
H. Power: 400 W.
BRIEF OPERATION DESCRIPTION
A Solid State frequency converter.
TOOL CONSISTS OF
Not applicable.
REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST
QUANTITY
01
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHT
Lenght: 1955.81 mm (77 in)
Width: 1219.20 mm (48 in)
Height: 1143 mm (45 in)
Weight: 590 kg (1300.73 lb)
SUPPORTING TOOLS
Not applicable.
GSE MAINTENANCE
documentation.
TOOL HISTORY
Not applicable.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
GSE 044
Page 202
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
A
B
GPUSOLID STATE A/C,

WITH TRAILER
SOLID STATE A/C, WITH TRAILER (P/N 90SX200-2T)

Figure 201
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
GSE 044
Page 203/204
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
GSE NUMBER: 045
ITEM NAME: GPU - DIESEL ENGINE DRIVEN (200/115 VAC, 28
VDC)
PURPOSE AND USE: Used to supply 115 to 200 VAC, 3-phase, 90
kVA and 28 VDC, 600 to 2000 A peak
performance.
PART NUMBER: 90CU24P5 (Figure 201)
1. MANUFACTURER
HOBART
A. The unit is available in a trailer-mounted model and without
trailer.
B. Engine-Driven Ground Power Unit Specifications:
Cummins B-39 diesel operating at 2400 rpm.
Operates at 110 HP Turbocharged 4-stroke, 4-cylinder
diesel with in line fuel pump.
12 VDC battery system.
Low oil pressure shutdown.
Electronic governor system.
C. Electrical Outputs:
90 kVA continuous, 125% rated load 5 minutes, 150% for 10
seconds.
200/115 VAC, 3-phase, 400 Hz, 4-wire WYE connection.
Frequency: regulation: 2 Hz steady state; transient
recovery; to within 5 Hz in <2 seconds per SAE ARP 5015;
modulation: <0.25%.
Voltage: regulation: 1% no load to full load, adjust: 15 V
individual harmonic content: <2%; three-phase average
sensing, built-in line drop compensation, up to 5%, transient
voltage recovery time: to within 1% in 100 ms (no load to
rated load); modulation: does not exceed 0.5% of steady
state voltage; total harmonic distortion: <3% of the
fundamental (RMS) voltage.
D. Protection and Performance:
Meets or exceeds MIL-STD-704E.
E. Trailer:
Operation temperature: -31 to 52 C ( -25 to 125 F).
Relative humidity: 0 to100% noncondensing.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
GSE 045
Page 201
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
No altitude derating required up to 10000 ft, when running in

normal operating range.
A diesel engine drives the AC generator that supplies a DC
rectifier.
TOOL CONSISTS OF
Not applicable.
QUANTITY
01
Lenght: 3543.30 mm (139.50 in)
Width: 1955.80 mm (77 in)
Height: 1549.40 mm (61 in)
Weight: 2540 kg (5599.73 lb)
SUPPORTING TOOLS
Not applicable.
GSE MAINTENANCE
documentation.
TOOL HISTORY
Not applicable.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
GSE 045
Page 202
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
B
125 AR
DIESEL ENGINE DRIVEN

GPU (200/115VAC, 28VDC)
GPU - DIESEL ENGINE DRIVEN (200/115 VAC, 28 VDC)

Figure 201
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
GSE 045
Page 203/204
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
GSE NUMBER: 049
ITEM NAME: WYE TYPE DUMPING CONNECTOR
PURPOSE AND USE: Used to couple the airplane lavatory output to
the waste cart during the cleaning operation.
PART NUMBER: K-2029 (Figure 201)
1. MANUFACTURER
TRONAIR
This GSE consists of a rubber hose with a metal coupling.
It connects the aircraft to the toilet service cart.
4. TOOL CONSISTS OF
Not applicable.
6. QUANTITY
01
Width: 101.60 mm (4 in)
8. SUPPORTING TOOLS
Used in conjunction with GSE 051 - CART - TOILET GROUND
SERVICING and GSE 050 COUPLING - TOILET SYSTEM
FILLING.
9. GSE MAINTENANCE
documentation.
10. TOOL HISTORY
Not applicable.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
GSE 049
Page 201
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
TOILET GROUND
SERVICING CART (REF.)
TOILET SYSTEM
FILLING COUPLING (REF.)
WYE TYPE DUMPING

CONNECTOR
A
WYE TYPE DUMPING CONNECTOR (P/N K-2029)
Figure 201
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
GSE 049
Page 202
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
GSE NUMBER: 050
ITEM NAME: COUPLING - TOILET SYSTEM FILLING
PURPOSE AND USE: Used to fill the aircraft waste tank with chemical
solution.
PART NUMBER: K-2410 (Figure 201)
1. MANUFACTURER
TRONAIR
This GSE consists of a rubber hose with a metal coupling.
A rubber hose with a metal coupling couples to the aircraft for the
replenishment of the toilet bowl with chemical solution.
4. TOOL CONSISTS OF
Not applicable.
Not applicable.
6. QUANTITY
01
Not applicable.
8. SUPPORTING TOOLS
Used in conjunction with GSE 051 - CART - TOILET GROUND
SERVICING and GSE 049 WYE 051 - CART - TOILET
GROUND SERVICING and GSE 049 WYE
9. GSE MAINTENANCE
Not applicable.
10. TOOL HISTORY
Not applicable.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
GSE 050
Page 201
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
TOILET GROUND
SERVICING CART (REF.)
TOILET SYSTEM
FILLING COUPLING
WYE TYPE DUMPING

CONNECTOR (REF.)
A
COUPLING - TOILET SYSTEM FILLING (P/N K-2410)
Figure 201
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
GSE 050
Page 202
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
GSE NUMBER: 051
ITEM NAME: CART - TOILET GROUND SERVICING
PURPOSE AND USE: Used to dump and fill the toilet system.
1. MANUFACTURER
TRONAIR
A. Chemical fill totalizer.
B. Gravity dump with gate valve and a 457 mm (18 in) long hose.
C. Fill pump and totalizer with a 2438 mm (8 ft output hose.
D. Tank dumping capacity: 258 (68 gal.).
E. Tank filling capacity: 117 (31 gal.).
Not applicable.
4. TOOL CONSISTS OF
Not applicable.
6. QUANTITY
01
Width: 940 mm (37 in)
Weight: 172 kg (379.19 lb)
8. SUPPORTING TOOLS
Used in conjunction with GSE 049 - WYE TYPE DUMPING
CONNECTOR and GSE 050 COUPLING - TOILET SYSTEM
FILLING.
9. GSE MAINTENANCE
documentation.
10. TOOL HISTORY
Not applicable.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
GSE 051
Page 201
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
TOILET GROUND
SERVICING CART
LAVATORY DUMPING
COUPLING (REF.)
CART - TOILET GROUND SERVICING (P/N 10-6402-0010)

Figure 201
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
GSE 051
Page 202
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
GSE NUMBER: 052
ITEM NAME: CART - POTABLE WATER
PURPOSE AND USE: Used to transport and supply potable water to
the airplane.
1. MANUFACTURER
TRONAIR
A. Designed to be used in cold weather conditions.
B. High-density polyethylene tank unit with UV inhibitor.
C. High-capacity hand pump (6 strokes per gallon).
D. Size: 4572 mm (180 in) output fill hose.
E. Potable water coupling included.
F. Capacity: 117.4 (31 gal.).
G. Tire size: 254 mm (10 in).
H. Voltage: 120 VAC (50/60 Hz) thermostatically controlled mat
heater and insulated cabinet.
This cart transports and supplies potable water to the aircraft, in
cold weather, by using a positive displacement electric pump.
4. TOOL CONSISTS OF
Not applicable.
6. QUANTITY
01
Weight: 158 kg (348 lb)
8. SUPPORTING TOOLS
Used in conjunction with a tractor.
9. GSE MAINTENANCE
documentation.
10. TOOL HISTORY
Not applicable.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
GSE 052
Page 201
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
POTABLE WATER
CART
A
CART - POTABLE WATER (P/N 19-4306-0000)
Figure 201
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
GSE 052
Page 202
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
GSE NUMBER: 052
ITEM NAME: CART - POTABLE WATER
PURPOSE AND USE: Used to transport and supply potable water to
the airplane.
1. MANUFACTURER
TRONAIR
A. High-density polyethylene tank unit with UV inhibitor.
B. High-capacity hand pump (6 strokes per gallon).
C. Size: 4572 mm (180 in) output fill hose.
D. Potable water coupling included.
E. Capacity: 117.4 (31 gal.).
F. Tire size: 254 mm (10 in).
This cart transports and supplies potable water to the aircraft, by
using a positive displacement electric pump.
4. TOOL CONSISTS OF
Not applicable.
6. QUANTITY
01
Weight: 111.60 kg (246.04 lb)
8. SUPPORTING TOOLS
Used in conjunction with a tractor.
9. GSE MAINTENANCE
documentation.
10. TOOL HISTORY
Not applicable.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
GSE 052
Page 203
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
POTABLE WATER
CART
A
CART - POTABLE WATER (P/N 19-4305-0000)
Figure 202
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
GSE 052
Page 204
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
GSE NUMBER: 057
ITEM NAME: REGULATOR - NITROGEN SERVICING
PURPOSE AND USE: Used to control the pre-charging of the
hydraulic system pressure accumulators,
tires and LDG shock struts. The regulator is
also used to perform tests of the pneumatic
system.
1. MANUFACTURER
TRONAIR
A. Maximum rating pressure: 3000 psi.
B. Maximum inlet pressure: 3000 psi.
C. Output pressure range: 0 to 500 psi.
D. Inlet connection: CGA-580.
E. Outlet connection: valve stem with thread 0.305 to 32.
This regulator controls the pressurized air that enters the
pneumatic systems.
4. TOOL CONSISTS OF
Not applicable.
6. QUANTITY
01
8. SUPPORTING TOOLS
Used in conjunction with GSE 058 - GAUGE - TIRE PRESSURE
and GSE 059 - GAUGE TIRE SERVICING.
9. GSE MAINTENANCE
documentation.
10. TOOL HISTORY
Not applicable.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
GSE 057
Page 201
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
VALVE
NITROGEN SERVICING
REGULATOR
NITROGEN SOURCE
(REF.)
REGULATOR - NITROGEN SERVICING (P/N 14-6808-6000)

Figure 201
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
GSE 057
Page 202
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
GSE NUMBER: 059
ITEM NAME: GAUGE - TIRE SERVICING
PURPOSE AND USE: Used to do a check of the tire pressure during
tire inflation with the nitrogen supply source
connected.
1. MANUFACTURER
TRONAIR
A. Liquid-filled gauge.
B. For use with nitrogen bottle.
C. Trigger inlet valve.
D. Storage box.
E. Maximum pressure rating: 300 psi
F. Inlet connection: shop air chuck, male.
G. Outlet connection: valve stem, lock-on.
H. Hose length: 457 mm (18 in).
I. Gauge calibration: The pressure gauge must be calibrated
annually or as required.
Not applicable.
4. TOOL CONSISTS OF
Not applicable.
6. QUANTITY
01
8. SUPPORTING TOOLS
Used in conjunction with GSE 057 - REGULATOR - NITROGEN
SERVICING.
9. GSE MAINTENANCE
documentation.
10. TOOL HISTORY
Not applicable.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
GSE 059
Page 201
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
B
A
B
TIRE PRESSURE GAGE
STORAGE BOX
(REF.)
NITROGEN
CYLINDER
GAUGE - TIRE SERVICING (P/N 14-6807-6011)

Figure 201
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
GSE 059
Page 202
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
GSE NUMBER: 070
ITEM NAME: WHEEL CHOCK
PURPOSE AND USE: Used to chock the main and nose landing gear
wheels.
1. MANUFACTURER
TRONAIR
A rubber compound chock.
The rubber compound chocks are placed behind and in front of the
wheels to keep the aircraft chocked or to block its tires.
4. TOOL CONSISTS OF
Not applicable.
Not applicable.
6. QUANTITY
03
Width: 457.20 mm (18 in)
Weight: 7.26 kg (16 lb)
8. SUPPORTING TOOLS
Not applicable.
9. GSE MAINTENANCE
documentation.
10. TOOL HISTORY
Not applicable.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
GSE 070
Page 201
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
WHEEL CHOCK
WHEEL CHOCK
WHEEL CHOCK (P/N 99-9016-6000 - TRONAIR)

Figure 201
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
GSE 070
Page 202
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
GSE NUMBER: 070
ITEM NAME: WHEEL CHOCK
PURPOSE AND USE: Used to chock the main and nose landing gear
wheels.
1. MANUFACTURER
TRONAIR
A. A rubber compound chock.
B. Black with orange stripe.
The rubber compound chocks are placed behind and in front of the
wheels to keep the aircraft chocked.
4. TOOL CONSISTS OF
Not applicable.
Not applicable.
6. QUANTITY
03
Lenght: 152.40 mm (6 in)
Width: 609.60 mm (24 in)
Height: 152.40 mm (6 in)
Weight: 18.18 kg (40.08 lb)
8. SUPPORTING TOOLS
Not applicable.
9. GSE MAINTENANCE
Not applicable.
10. TOOL HISTORY
Not applicable.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
GSE 070
Page 203
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
WHEEL CHOCK
WHEEL CHOCK
A
WHEEL CHOCK (P/N 99-9028-6024)
Figure 202
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
GSE 070
Page 204
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
GSE NUMBER: 080
ITEM NAME: TOWBAR
PURPOSE AND USE: Used to tow the aircraft.
1. MANUFACTURER
EMBRAER
A. Towbar:
Caster and handles for easier movement and attachment.
Tube-mounted spare shear-pin holder.
B. Towbar Head:
Shear pins for push/pull and torque.
Not applicable.
4. TOOL CONSISTS OF

For information on parts, refer to CMM P/N 1727, latest revision.
6. QUANTITY
01
Lenght: 5450 mm (215.57 in)
Width: 645 mm (25.40 in)
Weight: 130 kg (286.60 lb)
8. SUPPORTING TOOLS
Not applicable.
9. GSE MAINTENANCE
For information on maintenance, refer to CMM P/N 1727, latest
revision.
10. TOOL HISTORY
Not applicable.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
GSE 080
Page 201
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
TOWING POINT
TOWBAR ASSY
TOWBAR (P/N AGE-01306-401)

Figure 201
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
GSE 080
Page 202
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
GSE NUMBER: 080
ITEM NAME: TOWBAR
PART NUMBER: TOWE170-C-4 (Figure 202)
1. MANUFACTURER
HYDRO
A. Towbar:
Main tube made of high strength steel.
Revolving tow eye with shock absorber.
Hydraulically height adjustable undercarriage with floating
axle system for easy handling.
Heavy duty air inflated tires.
Caster and handles for easier movement and attachment.
Tube-mounted spare shear-pin holder.
Skydrol-resistant paint finish.
B. Towbar Head:
Shear pins for push/pull and torque.
Retaining pin for maximum safety.
Not applicable.
4. TOOL CONSISTS OF
6. QUANTITY
01
Lenght: 5032 mm (198.11 in)
Weight: 156 kg (343.92 lb)
8. SUPPORTING TOOLS
Not applicable.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
GSE 080
Page 203
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
9. GSE MAINTENANCE
For information on
documentation.
10. TOOL HISTORY
Not applicable.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
maintenance,
refer
to
the
Vendors
GSE 080
Page 204
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
TOWING POINT
TOWBAR ASSY
TOWBAR (P/N TOWE170-C-4)

Figure 202
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
GSE 080
Page 205
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
GSE NUMBER: 080
ITEM NAME: TOWBAR
1. MANUFACTURER
TRONAIR
A. Positive locking mechanism to aircraft tow point.
B. Heavy duty shock assembly.
C. Tension, compression and or radial shear protection
incorporated where required.
D. Handles provided to lift towbar into position.
E. Unpainted surfaces plated to resist corrosion.
F. Pneumatic or semi-pneumatic tires.
G. Tension/compression shear.
H. Hydraulic actuated wheel assembly.
The aircraft attachment is by machined hooks on the towing head
to the nose landing gear tow pin. There is a handle and an eyebolt
at the end of the towbar for towing. The eyebolt incorporates a
compression spring to dampen shock loads during towing.
4. TOOL CONSISTS OF
Not applicable.
6. QUANTITY
01
Width: 602 mm (23.7 in)
8. SUPPORTING TOOLS
Not applicable.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
GSE 080
Page 206
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
9. GSE MAINTENANCE
For information on
documentation.
10. TOOL HISTORY
Not applicable.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
maintenance,
refer
to
the
Vendors
GSE 080
Page 207
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
TOWING POINT
TOWBAR ASSY
TOWBAR (P/N 01-1297-0100)

Figure 203
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
GSE 080
Page 208
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
GSE NUMBER: 080
ITEM NAME: TOWBAR
1. MANUFACTURER
EMBRAER
A. Collapsible and lightweight.
B. Easy to store on board the aircraft.
C. Designed to tow from manufacturers recommended towing
points.
NOTE: Towbar flyaway is intended for occasional and lightduty use and not for everyday usage.
Not applicable.
4. TOOL CONSISTS OF

For information on parts, refer to CMM P/N 2190, latest revision.
6. QUANTITY
01
Lenght: 5450 mm (215.57 in)
Width: 645 mm (25.40 in)
Weight: 100 kg (220.46 lb)
8. SUPPORTING TOOLS
Not applicable.
9. GSE MAINTENANCE
For information on maintenance, refer to CMM P/N 2190, latest
revision.
10. TOOL HISTORY
This Part Number was previously on the GSE 082 TOWBAR
FLYAWAY.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
GSE 080
Page 209
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
TOWING POINT
TOWBAR
TOWBAR HEAD
B
TOWBAR (P/N AGE-01863-401)
Figure 204
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
GSE 080
Page 210
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
GSE NUMBER: 080
ITEM NAME: TOWBAR
PART NUMBER: TOWE170-C-1+8 (Figure 205)
1.
MANUFACTURER
HYDRO
A. Collapsible and lightweight.
B. Easy to store on board the aircraft.
C. Designed to tow from manufacturers recommended towing
points.
NOTE: Towbar flyaway is intended for occasional and lightduty use and not for everyday usage.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.

Not applicable.
TOOL CONSISTS OF
Not applicable.
QUANTITY
01
Lenght: 5300 mm (208.6 in)
Width: 340 mm (13.38 in)
Weight: 92 kg (202.8 lb)
SUPPORTING TOOLS
Not applicable.
GSE MAINTENANCE
documentation.
TOOL HISTORY
This Part Number was previously on the GSE 082 - TOWBAR FLYAWAY.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
GSE 080
Page 211
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
TOWING POINT
B
TOWBAR
TOWBAR HEAD
B
TOWBAR (P/N TOWE170-C-1+8)
Figure 205
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
GSE 080
Page 212
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
GSE NUMBER: 083
ITEM NAME: COVERS KIT - WHEEL TIRES
PURPOSE AND USE: Used to protect the nose wheel, main wheel,
and brake assemblies during aircraft washing.
The covers are also used against solar
radiation.
1. MANUFACTURER
EMBRAER
Not applicable.
Not applicable.
4. TOOL CONSISTS OF
6. QUANTITY
01
Not applicable.
8. SUPPORTING TOOLS
Not applicable.
9. GSE MAINTENANCE
Not applicable.
10. TOOL HISTORY
Not applicable.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
GSE 083
Page 201
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
A
B
B
WHEEL TIRES
COVERS KIT
WHEEL TIRES
COVERS KIT
B
COVERS KIT - WHEEL TIRES (P/N AGE-03636-401)
Figure 201
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
GSE 083
Page 202
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
GSE NUMBER: 096
ITEM NAME: FUEL SAMPLE UNIT
PURPOSE AND USE: Used to collect fuel samples and drain the tank.
PART NUMBER: AGE-04280-401 (Figure 201) (Figure 202)
1. MANUFACTURER
EMBRAER
A. This tool has two bits: one Allen and one Philips. These two
bits allow the tool to be used in two types of drain valves: Allen
shape and Philips shape.
Not applicable.
4. TOOL CONSISTS OF
Not applicable.
6. QUANTITY
01
Length: 2170 mm (85.43 in)
8. SUPPORTING TOOLS
Not applicable.
9. GSE MAINTENANCE
Not applicable.
10. TOOL HISTORY
Not applicable.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
GSE 096
Page 201
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
DRAIN VALVE
DRAIN VALVE
FUEL SAMPLE
UNIT
FUEL SAMPLE
UNIT
FUEL SAMPLE UNIT (P/N AGE-04280-401)

Figure 201
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
GSE 096
Page 202
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
GSE NUMBER: 099
ITEM NAME: UNIT - HYDRAULIC RESERVOIR SERVICING
(SKYDROL)
PURPOSE AND USE: Used to fill hydraulic reservoirs with hydraulic
fluid.
1. MANUFACTURER
TRONAIR
A. 15 ft hose with #6, 37 degree JIC female swivel end fitting.
B. 8 in diameter pneumatic tires.
C. Pressure rating: 150 psi.
D. 3 microns absolute and 15 microns nominal filters.
A high displacement hand pump fills reservoirs rapidly while dual
filters provide exceptionally clean fluid.
4. TOOL CONSISTS OF
Not applicable.
6. QUANTITY
01
Length: 508 mm (20 in)
8. SUPPORTING TOOLS
Used in conjunction with the Coupling Skydrol, Assy of the GSE
241 - KIT - COUPLINGS.
9. GSE MAINTENANCE
documentation.
10. TOOL HISTORY
Not applicable.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
GSE 099
Page 201
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
SKYDROL HYDRAULIC
RESERVOIR SERVICING
UNIT
UNIT - HYDRAULIC RESERVOIR SERVICING (SKYDROL)

Figure 201
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
GSE 099
Page 202
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
GSE NUMBER: 100
ITEM NAME: GUN - 1/4 HYDRAULIC SYSTEM OIL REPLENISHING
PURPOSE AND USE: Used to service Shimmy Damper with skydrol
hydraulic oil.
PART NUMBER: 7170 (Figure 201)
1. MANUFACTURER
RISBRIDGER
A. Replenishing gun for Skydrol.
B. Fluid: Skydrol 500 B4.
This replenishing equipment is specified by aircraft, engine and
transmission. It allows easy and environmentally safe dispensing
of superclean fluids and oils into critical systems. The hand pump
has an integral 2 micron filter element that ensures the introduction
of clean fluids giving longer component life and promoting safety.
4. TOOL CONSISTS OF
Not applicable.
6. QUANTITY
01
Length: 480 mm (18.90 in)
Width: 125 mm (4.92 in)
8. SUPPORTING TOOLS
Used in conjunction with GSE 287 - CONNECTOR - HIGH
PRESSURE SERVICING.
9. GSE MAINTENANCE
documentation.
10. TOOL HISTORY
Not applicable.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
GSE 100
Page 201
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
1/4 HYDRAULIC OIL

REPLENISHING GUN
GUN - 1/4 HYDRAULIC SYSTEM OIL REPLENISHING (P/N 7170)

Figure 201
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
GSE 100
Page 202
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
GSE NUMBER: 114
ITEM NAME: FENCE, PROTECTION LANDING GEAR
PURPOSE AND USE: Used to protect personnel during tests of the
landing gear.
1. MANUFACTURER
EMBRAER
Not applicable.
Not applicable.
4. TOOL CONSISTS OF
Not applicable.
6. QUANTITY
03
Length: 1790 mm (70.47 in)
Width: 270 mm (10.63 in)
Weight: 45 kg (99.2 lb)
8. SUPPORTING TOOLS
Not applicable.
9. GSE MAINTENANCE
Not applicable.
10. TOOL HISTORY
Not applicable.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
GSE 114
Page 201
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
A
A
A
PROTECTION LANDING
GEAR FENCE
FENCE, PROTECTION LANDING GEAR (P/N AGE-01104-401)

Figure 201
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
GSE 114
Page 202
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
GSE NUMBER: 189
ITEM NAME: PIN - STOW LOCK
PURPOSE AND USE: Used to prevent inadvertent RAT deployment
on the ground.
PART NUMBER: AGE14542 (Figure 201)
1. MANUFACTURER
HAMILTON (ELECTRIC)
A. This GSE consists of a pin and a flag.
B. This GSE has two spring pins in the body of handle. The pins
will utilize the safe lock pin slot not allowing the stow lock pin
to turn.
This GSE is inserted in a dedicated hole, located on the left side of
the forward fuselage, to prevent the RAT from causing injuries to
persons during maintenance duties.
4. TOOL CONSISTS OF
Not applicable.
6. QUANTITY
01
Width: 75 mm (3 in)
8. SUPPORTING TOOLS
Not applicable.
9. GSE MAINTENANCE
documentation.
10. TOOL HISTORY
Not applicable.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
GSE 189
Page 201
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
RAT DOOR
(REF.)
RAT STOWLOCK PIN
PIN - STOW LOCK (P/N AGE14542)

Figure 201
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
GSE 189
Page 202
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
GSE NUMBER: 197
ITEM NAME: COVER - WINGLET
PURPOSE AND USE: Used to attract personnel attention to the
winglet, to avoid inadvertent impacts.
1. MANUFACTURER
EMBRAER
A. Cover manufactured of a polyamide fabric impregnated with
PVC.
B. The upper side is painted with stripes black and yellow, for
visual warning.
A cloth cover, with reflective stripes to be installed manually on the
winglets.
4. TOOL CONSISTS OF
Not applicable.
Not applicable.
6. QUANTITY
02
8. SUPPORTING TOOLS
Not applicable.
9. GSE MAINTENANCE
Not applicable.
10. TOOL HISTORY
This Part Number was previously on the GSE 169 - COVER,
CLOTH - WINGLET.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
GSE 197
Page 201
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
A
B
WINGLET CLOTH COVER
B
COVER WINGLET (P/N AGE-03749-401)
Figure 201
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
GSE 197
Page 202
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
GSE NUMBER: 200
ITEM NAME: TOWBARLESS TOWING VEHICLE
PURPOSE AND USE: Used to tow the aircraft without using a towbar.
PART NUMBER: AP8850SDA-AL-100 (Figure 201)
1. MANUFACTURER
LEKTRO
A. Vehicle Drive: Heavy-duty 11 in frame, 72 VDC traction motor
coupled direct to drive wheels through high efficiency gearing.
B. Motor Speed Control: State of the art General Electric EV-200
LXT electronic speed control with on-board trouble shooting
diagnostics. Speed controlled by foot throttle.
C. Batteries: Two 36 V industrial, 550 A.h batteries wired in
series.
D. GPU: Built-in 12/24/28 V, 1175 cold cranking A output
capability with independent batteries and charging system,
optional.
E. Motive Battery Charger: Fully automatic 100 A, 220 V, single
phase charger, standard. Three phase or 50 Hz, optional.
F. Nose Gear Lift Cradle: Lektros patented Universal Nose Gear
Lift Cradle is activated by na electric/hydraulic pump assembly
with dual cylinders, and is capable of handling dual and single
wheel aircraft.
G. Winch: Heavy-duty hydraulic winch with automatic safety cutoff. Winch strap and universal strut straps included.
H. Steering: Electric/hydraulic power steering controlled through
automotive type tilt wheel requiring minimal effort with very
responsive steering action. Adjustable timer shuts down
steering motor when tug is not in use, increasing battery shift
life.
I. Service Brakes: Foot operated dual independent hydraulic
disc-type service brakes utilizing the final wheel drive gearing
to achieve maximum braking with minimal brake pedal effort.
J. Parking Brake: Hand activated, industry standard, yellow
diamond push/pull electric/hydraulic parking brake, coupled to
brake discs on final drive.
K. Drive Tires: Single 23 x 10 x 12 18-ply pneumatic traction drive
tires with siping. Chains optional for slippery conditions. Polyfoam filled tires available.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
GSE 200
Page 201
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
L. Steering Tires: 18 x 7 x 8 semi-pneumatic traction steer tires

mounted to a fully suspended steer axle.
M. Lighting: Dual forward and aft headlights, independently
activated. Six flashing amber running lights positioned around
tug to illuminate sides and top. Amber strobe light mounted
center rear.
Not applicable.
TOOL CONSISTS OF
Not applicable.
For information on parts, refer to the vendors documentation.
QUANTITY
01
SUPPORTING TOOLS
Not applicable.
GSE MAINTENANCE
For information on maintenance, refer to the vendors
documentation.
TOOL HISTORY
Not applicable.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
GSE 200
Page 202
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
TOWBARLESS TOWING VEHICLE (P/N AP8850SDA-AL-100)

Figure 201
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
GSE 200
Page 203/204
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
GSE NUMBER: 212
ITEM NAME: APU AIR INTAKE COVERS - KIT
PURPOSE AND USE: Used to protect the APU air inlet and exhaust.
PART
NUMBER:
AGE-01416-401
(Figure 203)
(Figure
201)
(Figure
202)
1. MANUFACTURER
EMBRAER
Not applicable.
The GSE is used to protect APU against FOD.
4. TOOL CONSISTS OF

Refer to Tool Consist Of.
6. QUANTITY
01
A. Cover 01:
B. Cover 02:
C. Cover 03:
Lenght: 341.5 mm (13.44 in)
167 mm (6.57 in)
155 mm (6.10 in)
8. SUPPORTING TOOLS
Not applicable.
9. GSE MAINTENANCE
Not applicable.
10. TOOL HISTORY
The PN of Cover - Main Air Inlet, APU was changed from AGE03942-401 to AGE-03901-401.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
GSE 212
Page 201
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
A
ZONE
351
APU COVER SET COVER 01
B
APU AIR INTAKE COVERS KIT (P/N AGE-01416-401)
Figure 201
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
GSE 212
Page 202
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
A
B
APU COVER SET COVER 02
320 mm
(12.6 in.)

Figure 202
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
GSE 212
Page 203
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
A
B
KITAPU COVER
COVER 03
B
Figure 203
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
GSE 212
Page 204
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
GSE NUMBER: 248
ITEM NAME: COVER - THRUST REVERSER EXHAUST
PURPOSE AND USE: Used to to cover the thrust reverser exhaust to
prevent unwanted material from entering the
reverser during storage.
PART NUMBER: AT-092777 (Figure 201)
1. MANUFACTURER
GOODRICH
Not applicable.
The left and right covers are inserted into the fan duct exaust and
secured with attached hold down screws.
NOTE: Remove cover before flight.
4. TOOL CONSISTS OF
Not applicable.
Not applicable.
6. QUANTITY
01
Length: 1625.60 mm (64 in)
Width: 1625.60 mm (64 in)
Height: 132.08 mm (5.20 in)
8. SUPPORTING TOOLS
Not applicable.
9. GSE MAINTENANCE
Not applicable.
10. TOOL HISTORY
Not applicable.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
GSE 248
Page 201
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
FAN DUCT EXHAUST PLUG
A
COVER - THRUST REVERSER EXHAUST (P/N AT-092777)
Figure 201
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
GSE 248
Page 202
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
GSE NUMBER: 249
ITEM NAME: COVER - FAN COWL VENTILATION
PURPOSE AND USE: Used to prevent foreign matter from entering
the fan cowl ventilation port on a parked
aircraft.
PART NUMBER: RSE 6418 (Figure 201)
1. MANUFACTURER
GOODRICH
Not applicable.
Not applicable.
4. TOOL CONSISTS OF
Not applicable.
Not applicable.
6. QUANTITY
01
Length: 355.60 mm (14 in)
Width: 101.60 mm (4 in)
Height: 6.40 mm (0.25 in)
8. SUPPORTING TOOLS
Not applicable.
9. GSE MAINTENANCE
Not applicable.
10. TOOL HISTORY
Not applicable.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
GSE 249
Page 201
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
COVER FAN COWL

VENTILATION DOOR
B
COVER - FAN COWL VENTILATION (P/N RSE 6418)
Figure 201
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
GSE 249
Page 202
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
GSE NUMBER: 275
ITEM NAME: COVER - FUEL NACA
PURPOSE AND USE: Used to protect the fuel naca during the
preservation operation or when the fuel tank is
empty.
1. MANUFACTURER
EMBRAER
Not applicable.
Not applicable.
4. TOOL CONSISTS OF
Not applicable.
Not applicable.
6. QUANTITY
02
Width: 180 mm (7.09 in)
8. SUPPORTING TOOLS
Not applicable.
9. GSE MAINTENANCE
Not applicable.
10. TOOL HISTORY
Not applicable.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
GSE 275
Page 201
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
B
A
COVER FUEL NACA
C
COVER - FUEL NACA (P/N AGE-02670-401)
Figure 201
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
GSE 275
Page 202
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
GSE NUMBER: 277
ITEM NAME: GRILLE COVER, DOOR, REAR FUSELAGE
PURPOSE AND USE: Used to cover the grille of the rear fuselage
access door to avoid water ingression, dirt or
humidity while the aircraft is on the ground or
during cleaning of the external surface of the
rear fuselage.
PART NUMBER: 170-60100-801-14H1 (Figure 201)
1. MANUFACTURER
AERNNOVA
The GSE consists of a flexible fabric cover that adjusts to the door
on its outline. It consists of two parts attached between them and a
Remove Before Flight flag.
The GSE is installed on the external side of the rear fuselage
access door.
4. TOOL CONSISTS OF
Not applicable.
6. QUANTITY
01
Not applicable.
8. SUPPORTING TOOLS
Not applicable.
9. GSE MAINTENANCE
documentation.
10. TOOL HISTORY
Not applicable.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
GSE 277
Page 201
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
ROD LABEL
GRILLE COVER, DOOR REAR FUSELAGE (170-60100-801-14H1)

Figure 201
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
GSE 277
Page 202
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
GSE NUMBER: 287
ITEM NAME: CONNECTOR - HIGH PRESSURE SERVICING
PURPOSE AND USE: Used to assist the servicing of the Shimmy
Damper, Landing Gear and Rudder Pedal
Dampers.
PART NUMBER: K-3706 (Figure 201, Sheet 1) (Figure 201, Sheet 2)
(Figure 201, Sheet 3)
1. MANUFACTURER
TRONAIR
A. Thread: 0.305-32 to -04 JIC Flare.
B. This GSE is used for the servicing of the shimmy damper with
Skydrol, the landing gear with mineral oil, and the rudder pedal
dampers with silicone.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
NOTE: It is not recommended to use the same coupling to do

the servicing with different fluids, because there is risk
of contamination.
Not applicable.
TOOL CONSISTS OF
Not applicable.
QUANTITY
01
SUPPORTING TOOLS
Not applicable.
GSE MAINTENANCE
documentation.
TOOL HISTORY
Not applicable.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
GSE 287
Page 201
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
A
B
HIGH PRESSURE SERVICING

CONNECTOR (SILICONE FLUID)
B
CONNECTOR - HIGH PRESSURE SERVICING (P/N K-3706)
Figure 201 Sheet 1
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
GSE 287
Page 202
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
A
A
A

CONNECTOR (MINERAL OIL)
A
TYPICAL

Figure 201 Sheet 2
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
GSE 287
Page 203
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
A
A

CONNECTOR (SKYDROL)
A
TYPICAL

Figure 201 Sheet 3
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
GSE 287
Page 204
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
GSE NUMBER: 303
ITEM NAME: COVER - VERT STAB LEADING EDGE NACA
PURPOSE AND USE: Used to protect the vertical stabilizer leading
edge naca during the preservation operation.
1. MANUFACTURER
EMBRAER
Not applicable.
Not applicable.
4. TOOL CONSISTS OF
Not applicable.
Not applicable.
6. QUANTITY
01
8. SUPPORTING TOOLS
Not applicable.
9. GSE MAINTENANCE
Not applicable.
10. TOOL HISTORY
Not applicable.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
GSE 303
Page 201
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
COVERVERT STAB
LEADING EDGE NACA
COVER - VERT STAB LEADING EDGE NACA (P/N AGE-03379-401)

Figure 201
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
GSE 303
Page 202
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
GSE NUMBER: 422
ITEM NAME: TOWBARLESS - TOWING VEHICLE (DOUGLAS
TBL280)
PART NUMBER: TBL280MK3 (Figure 201)
1. MANUFACTURER
DOUGLAS
A. Deutz TCD 2013 L6 water cooled diesel engine rated at 190
kW (255 bhp).
B. ZF WG201 powershift transmission with three (3) speed
forward and three (3) speed reverse gearbox.
C. Fully enclosed dual control, dual facing, sound insulated luxury
cab with center swivelling seat/control column console for the
operator to face in either direction of travel. Air suspension
seat for driver and suspension seat for one crewmember.
D. Heater/Demister system. Optional: Air Conditioning.
E. Electronically controlled, powered hydraulic selectable 4 mode
steering: 2 wheel front, 2 wheel rear, 4 wheel co-ordinated and
Crab steering.
F. Front two (2) wheel drive.
G. Rear support wheels mounted on steered turntables and
trailing arm type air suspension system.
H. PLC for cradle functions, driveline and vehicle controls.
I. Full highway type lighting for both driving directions.
J. Flashing amber warning beacon on cab roof.
K. Full instrumentation including speedometer and hourmeter.
L. Over-steer warning/alerting system.
M. CCTV system to monitor cradle operation from in the cab.
N. Automatic chassis lubrication system.
O. Maximum cradle lifting capacity - 35,000 kg (Aircraft nose
wheel weight).
The TBL280 has been designed primarily for pushback, inter-gate
towing and longer distance maintenance towing operations at
higher speed. It dispenses with the need for a towbar by docking
with and lifting the nose wheel of the aircraft, making one man
pushback and towing operations possible.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
GSE 422
Page 201
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
NOTE: The TBL280Mk3 cannot be used with the Embraer 190
until the modifications presented in the manufacturers
Technical Service Bulletin number 2007/256 are carried
out. The modifications include an additional brake
reduction valve for reduced braking, the introduction of
wheel size E and an additional power reduction system.
1. TOOL CONSISTS OF
Not applicable.
3. QUANTITY
01
Width: 3400 mm (134 in)
Weight: 15000 kg (33069 lb)
5. SUPPORTING TOOLS
Not applicable.
6. GSE MAINTENANCE
documentation.
7. TOOL HISTORY
Not applicable.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
GSE 422
Page 202
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
TOWBARLESS TOWING VEHICLE
A
TOWBARLESS - TOWING VEHICLE (DOUGLAS TBL280)
Figure 201
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
GSE 422
Page 203/204
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
GSE NUMBER: 423
ITEM NAME: TOWBARLESS - TOWING VEHICLE (SCHPF PPU
TLTV)
PART NUMBER: TANA 42 (Figure 201)
1. MANUFACTURER
SCHOPF
A. Deutz B F4L 2011 turbo-charged air-cooled, four-stroke
industrial diesel engine at 55 kW at 2800 rpm.
B. As an optional extra an automatic fire extinguishing system
(FES) can be fitted.
C. A belt-driven, 28 V / 55 A alternator supplies the 24 V electrical
system and charges the two 70A.h series-coupled batteries. The
engine is fitted with a 4 kW starter motor.
D. Three wheels - its single rear wheel performing both drive and
steering functions.
E. Orbitrol hydrostatic power steering on rear wheel
F. Nose gear turning angle: 45 (max.).
G. The four mineral composite friction drive rollers are
independently driven by hydraulic motors via planetary gear boxes.
Two of the rollers are fixed to the frame, and two are stowed in the
units frame arms.
H. Frame width adjustment function. A hydraulic motor driving a
bottle screw extends or reduces the width of the frame.
A remotely controlled towbarless pushback tractor, working on the
main landing gear without lifting the aircraft, for aircraft with up to
100,000 kg weight. For pushback and aircraft ranging operations
the units are remotely radio controlled by a handset. The machine
is driven so that its frames bracket the aircrafts main-gear wheels
and the two fixed drive rollers both abut them. Two pressure/drive
rollers are swung hydraulically from their housings in the frames
and brought to bear on the other side of the aircrafts tyres thus
clamping the wheels firmly between all four drive rollers. Aircraft
movement is performed by the application of rotational forces to
the aircrafts main landing-gear wheels by means of the four
friction drive rollers. The weight of the aircraft itself is utilized for
traction. Directional control of the aircraft is performed from the
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
GSE 423
Page 201
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
flight deck according to directives from the ground. The PPU is

fitted with a hydraulic differential system which allows complicated
maneuvers to be carried out in both forward and reverse.
TOOL CONSISTS OF
Not applicable.
QUANTITY
01
Width: 2540 mm (100 in)
SUPPORTING TOOLS
Not applicable.
GSE MAINTENANCE
Not applicable.
TOOL HISTORY
Not applicable.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
GSE 423
Page 202
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
A
TOWING VEHICLE (SCHPF PPU TLTV) - P/N TANA 42
Figure 201
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
GSE 423
Page 203/204
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
GSE NUMBER: 447
ITEM NAME: FUEL SAMPLE UNIT - AUX TANK
PURPOSE AND USE: Used to collect fuel samples and drain the
remaining fuel from the auxiliary tanks.
1. MANUFACTURER
EMBRAER
2. ECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
A. This tool has 2 components: a tube that will be inserted into
the aircraft to open the drain valve and a funnel and hose.
Not applicable.
4. TOOL CONSISTS OF

Not applicable.
6. QUANTITY
01
Width: 500 mm (19.68 in)
8. SUPPORTING TOOLS
Not applicable.
9. GSE MAINTENANCE
Not applicable.
10. TOOL HISTORY
Not applicable.
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
GSE 447
Page 201
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
ZONES
130
140
150
A
1
500 mm (19.68 in)
54
0m
(21
.26
in)
FUEL SAMPLE UNIT

AUX TANK
A
FUEL SAMPLE UNIT - AUX TANK
Figure 201
EFFECTIVITY: ALL
GSE 447
Page 202
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
CONSUMABLE
PRODUCTS
APPENDIX
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
EFFECTIVITY: ALL

Page CON-1
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
EFFECTIVITY: ALL

Page CON-2
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
EFFECTIVITY: ALL

Page CON-3
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
EFFECTIVITY: ALL

Page CON-4
SEP 15/09
GROUND HANDLING AND

SERVICING HANDBOOK
EFFECTIVITY: ALL

Page CON-5/6
SEP 15/09

GHSH Lineage 1000

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

GHSH Lineage 1000

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

EMB-190ECJ

GROUND HANDLING AND

CUSTOMER COMMENT FORM

Please use this Customer Comment Form to notify us of

Your feedback will be acknowledged, and we will advise

GROUND HANDLING AND

CUSTOMER COMMENT FORM

Your Name: ................................................ Department: ..................................

Please return this Customer Comment Form to:

This Space Reserved for Embraer

EMPRESA BRASILEIRA DE AERONUTICA S.A.

TO: HOLDERS OF PUBLICATION No. GHSH-3800 - GROUND

REVISION No. 00 DATED SEPTEMBER 15/09

GROUND HANDLING AND

09-10-01-500-801-A . ........211 ........... Sep 15/09

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

GROUND HANDLING AND

09-10-02-500-801-A .. ........236 ........... Sep 15/09

09-20-01-500-801-A . ........205 ........... Sep 15/09

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

GROUND HANDLING AND

10-30-01-500-802-A .. ........208 ........... Sep 15/09

12-11-05-680-801-A.. ........307 ........... Sep 15/09

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

GROUND HANDLING AND

12-12-01-600-801-A .. ........308 ........... Sep 15/09

12-13-01-200-802-A . ........303 ........... Sep 15/09

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

GROUND HANDLING AND

12-15-03-600-801-A .. ........302 ........... Sep 15/09

12-22-01-100-807-A . ........317 ........... Sep 15/09

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

GROUND HANDLING AND

32-00-05-000-801-A .. ........402 ........... Sep 15/09

GSE 024 ................... .............. 201 ........ Sep 15/09

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

GROUND HANDLING AND

GSE 080................... .............. 206........ Sep 15/09

GSE 422 ................... .............. 203 ........ Sep 15/09

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

GROUND HANDLING AND

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

GROUND HANDLING AND

THIS MANUAL IS APPLICABLE TO ALL LINEAGE 1000

GHSH List of Effective Aircraft

GROUND HANDLING AND

GROUND HANDLING AND

GROUND HANDLING AND

(b) PDF Page Identification and Numbering

GROUND HANDLING AND

performed by tasks. The fifth element is a three-digit

GROUND HANDLING AND

(6) Consumable Products

GROUND HANDLING AND

product. It may give a range of temperature (4 to 38C,

25C (MAX) (77F

Fuel, Ozone and/or spark

Sources of heat, Dust, Oil,

Sources of heat, Dust, Oil,

GROUND HANDLING AND

25C (MAX) (77F

Sources of heat, Ozone

Sources of heat, Spark

Electrostatic fields, Magnetic